SAV Precisioncatalogue

SPANN- AUTOMATIONS- NORMTEILETECHNIK GMBH
WORKHOLDING AND AUTOMATION
P R Z I S I O N S - U N D S PA N N S Y S T E M E
MAGNETISCH - HYDRAULISCH - MECHANISCH - VAKUUMTECHNISCH
PRECISION WORKHOLDING AND CLAMPING SYSTEMS

MAGNETIC - HYDRAULIC - MECHANICAL - VACUUM
ERFAHREN INNOVATIV WEGWEISEND

PRECISION EFFICIENCY RELIABILITY
Pages 01 - 16
Permanent Magnetic Chucks Rectangular and Circular Electro Magnetic Chucks Rectangular and Circular Electro-Permanent Magnetic Chucks Rectangular and Circular Demagnetizing equipment and Control Units Magnetic Field and Holding Force Measuring Equipment Magnetic Quick Mould and Die Change Systems for Injection Moulding Machines. Magnetic Separators Sine Tables, with and without Magnetic Chuck Angular and Tilting Tables with Scale Lifting Magnets Magnetic Handling, Holding Magnets Palletising and Automation Systems Clamping Products for EDM Applications Electro Holding Magnets and Electro Magnetic Bars Magnetic Blocks, Laminated Blocks and Laminated Bars Magnetic Accessories, Magnetic Prism Blocks Magnet Stands Holding Magnets, Magnetic Material Magnetic Tape, Organizing Magnets Grinding Wheel Dressing and Profiling Devices, Indexers, Circular Grinding Equipment, Tool Setting Equipment Machine Vices and Pull Down Vices Multi-prism clamping blocks Vacuum Chucks Accessories for Vacuum Workholding Systems Technical Information for Magnetic Workholding
chapter
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15
CATALOGUE
Pages 17 - 32
Pages 33 - 78
Pages 79 - 92
Pages 93 - 100
Pages 101 - 116
Pages 117 - 124
Pages 125 - 170
Pages 171 - 182
Pages 183 - 192
Pages 193 - 230
Pages 231 - 244
Pages 245 - 250
Pages 251 - 260
Pages 261 - 280
The Company
SAV Workholding and Automation is a globally organised and respected manufacturer and supplier of high quality workholding and automation systems with emphasis on quality, precision and cost efficiency. With almost 25 years of manufacturing experience and 180 employees SAV develops unique workholding, clamping and automation solutions, standard products and components that can be used for different applications.
SAV is presently one of the leading manufacturers and suppliers of Workholding solutions from-onesource in Europe and even the World. Among her customers are strong and leading automotive industries, leading machine tool manufacturers and distributors and moreover many high demanding end-users. SAV focuses on innovation, new technologies and applications. Wit her own qualified development and production facilities in Nuremberg and Mittweida SAV is capable to react quick and flexible on specific customer requirements.
SAV-Mittweida GmbH Mittweida Manufacturing / Engineering
SAV Spann- AutomationsNormteiletechnik GmbH NurembergHeadquarters Sales and Marketing
EXPERIENCED INNOVATIVE DIRECTIVE

SAV Production GmbH Nuremberg
SAV - The Company
The SAV group is represented worldwide

Germany Headquarters Sales and Marketing Germany, Austria, Switzerland SAV Spann- AutomationsNormteiletechnik GmbH Schieplatzstrae 36+38a D-90469 Nuremberg Germany Tel.: +49 - 911 - 9483-0 Fax: +49 - 911 - 4801426 Email: info@sav-spanntechnik.de Netherlands Sales and Marketing International SAV Workholding and Automation Steenenstraat 8 NL-3262 JM Oud-Beijerland Netherlands Tel.: +31 - 186 - 626 469 Fax: +31 - 186 - 627 153 Email: info@sav-workholding.com Internet: www.sav-workholding.nl Czech Republic Sales and Marketing Central and Eastern Europe SAV CZECH spol. s. r. o. Kotojedy 56 CZ-767 01 Kromerz Czech Republic Tel.: +420 - 573 - 334 062 Fax: +420 - 573 - 331 456 Email:sav.czech@sav-workholding.com Internet: www.sav-workholding.cz
SAV Produktions GmbH Nuremberg-Eibach Gundelfinger Strae 8 D-90469 Nuremberg-Eibach Germany
SAV Mittweida GmbH Leipziger Strae 29-31 D-09648 Mittweida Poland Germany Sales and Marketing Poland Tel.: +49 - 37 27 / 99 95 - 0 Fax: +49 - 37 27 / 99 95 - 346 Email:sav-mittweida@t-online.de Internet:www.sav-spanntechnik.de F&K Prototypen und Erodiertechnik GbR Leipziger Strae 31 D-09648 Mittweida Germany Tel.: 037 27 / 99 95 - 265 Fax: 0 37 27 / 99 95 - 257 Email: info@fukpro.de Internet: www.fukpro.de
Poland SAV POLSKA sp. z o.o ul. Hetmanska 38 PL-85-039 Bydgoszcz Poland Tel.: +48 - 52 321 91 40 Fax: +48 - 52 321 91 41 Email: info@sav-polska.pl Internet: www.sav-polska.pl
North America Sales and Marketing North America
SAV-North America Inc. 250 Nutmeg Road South STE N PARTEC Automatisierungstechnik South Windsor, CT. 06074 und Handlingsysteme GmbH USA Leipziger Strae 29 Tel.: +1 - 860 - 882 - 0841 D-09648 Mittweida Fax: +1 - 860 - 882 - 0844 Germany Email: savna@sav-workholding.com Tel.: +49 - 3727 - 99950 Internet: www.sav-workholding-na.com Fax: +49 - 3727 - 9995346 Email: info@partec-chemnitz.de Internet: www.partec-chemnitz.de China Sales, Service and Marketing Asia EMATECH GmbH SAV China Elektronik- und Magnettechnik Hong Kong Luitpoldstrae 32 D-87700 Memmingen coming soon Germany
SAV - The Company
Product groups
SAV Magnetic-Systems
Workholding from one source
for hard turning
for milling
for Quick Mould Change
for lifting of loads
for precision circular grinding
for precision surface grinding
for precision profile grinding
for a variety of applications
SAV Palletising and Automation
SAV Precision-Systems
SAV Vacuum Workholding
standard and special pallets
precision turning and sine table
vacuum special solutions
pallet robots
dressing- and circular grinding tools
vacuum chucks, round and square
SAV - The Company
Product groups
SAV mechanical clamping
Workholding from one source

SAV jigs and fixtures
multiple clamping on machine vices
multiple clamping of ejector pins
SAV Norm parts
SAV Indexers
Digital precision indexer with mandrel
SAV - The Company
Production facilities
For the manufacturing of the CAD designed products a range of modern machines is available in the German production facilities. We produce exclusively in our production facilities in Nuremberg and Mittweida Germany.
SAV - The Company
Naturally we apply our own standard products in our workshops. This allows our designers and engineers to test and improve our products and to initiate further development for our customers. The for our customers essential quality is constantly controlled by our quality management.
SAV - The Company
50 CNC-machining centres up to 5000 mm machining length 3 off 5 axis HSC milling machines 50 profile / surface / coordinate / circular (internal and outside) grinding machines up to 4000 mm machining length. 9 wire cutting machines 3 sinker EDM machines 4 CNC turning machines 1 horizontal turning machine up to diameter 3000 mm 4 coordinate measuring machines range: x = 600 mm y = 1000 mm, z = 465 mm 1 injection moulding machine
SAV - The Company
Engineering, Research and Development

Engineering of standard and special solutions Using modern CAD work stations our staff design precision products for standard and special applications and are thus able to offer our customers matured and state-of-the-art technology. Magnetic workholding requires specific experience which we have made available for our customers. To ensure the most flexible application of our catalogue products, we apply the many years of experience in the field of special workholding into the design of even more effective standard products.
Magnetostatic FEM-analysis for high energy magnetic systems for clamping of railway-rail; system magnetically saturated
Leading in technology for SAV not just words

Static FEM analysis for Electropermanent round chuck in segmented design. Diameter 2800 mm, extending over machine table; load 10 000 N.
Research and development are for SAV the basis for success. We develop for our customers magnetic, hydraulic, mechanical and vacuum workholding solutions, but also moulds and prototypes to customer specifications. Available are 11 linked CAD working stations in different locations. All are equipped with 3D systems and FEM calculation modules for magnetostatic, thermal, static and dynamic analysis. We work with Solid Works 2005, Catia V5, NesCAD 2005, AutoCAD R14, Mechanical Desktop and Euklid Design. The information exchange with customers can be made with following interfacing: IGES, DXF (all versions), DWG, STEP, VDA, PARASOLID, UNIGRAPHIC, CATIA-EXPORTED, CATIA-MODELL, VRML and STL. The designs are transferred to our manufacturing through CAC/ CAM-applications NC-WORKS96 and PEPS CAD/CAM V4.2.7.
SAV - The Company
Catalogue usage
Some chapters start with technical explanations and application examples. In chapter 15 you will find a summary of magnetic principles and experiences from praxis, which will help you to find your best solution. Icons are used for different application fields:
Grinding
Sinker-EDM
Wire cutting
Measuring
Milling
Drilling
Turning
Lifting
Demagnetizing
Dressing
General tolerances, unless specified differently; Dimensions to DIN 7168-m Shape and Conditions to DIN 7168-s Metric ISO-threads to tolerance class middle Holding forces, unless specified differently: The specific holding forces as mentioned in chapters 1, 2, 3, 6, 8 and 9 as holding forces of workpiece surfaces in N/cm2 are to be considered nominal holding forces! These refer to a test workpiece of 100 mm length, 100 mm width and 40 mm height made of ST 37 and with a ground surface. In case the application is based on different parameters these values do no longer apply. In chapter 7 the break away forces for the lifting magnets are specified in daN. The break away force is the average of the maximum weights the tool could hold during several tests. This value may not be used to choose a lifting magnet for an application. Using the nominal holding force for ST 37 the right lifting magnet can be selected. The indicated values for flat and round lifting are to be considered for every application. The values for round materials apply only in the specified diameter range. The thickness of the workpiece, as well as the material specification and surface conditions are to be taken into consideration. For further reference see chapter 15. The nominal holding forces in N for electro and permanent-electro magnets in chapters 2 and 9 as well as for the magnetic auxiliary tools of chapter 10 and the pot magnets in chapter 11 shall be applied for 100% coverage of the holding surfaces by a ground workpiece out of ST37. Holding force indications for the bare magnets of chapter 11 are not possible. These depend very much to the application geometries. Regarding the electrical devices: In case no other information is presented, the relative rating in % refers to a period of 10 minutes.
All technical data subject to change We cannot be hold responsible for any printing errors. We will appreciate any indications of such errors. Copyright: SAV Spann- Automations- und Normteiletechnik GmbH 2009 Layout: Design-Agentur-Otto 2009
SAV - The Company
CHAPTER 1
Permanent Magnetic Chucks Permanent Magnetic Vertical Chuck Permanent Magnetic Chuck Permanent Magnetic Chuck Permanent Magnetic Chuck Neodymium Magnetic Chuck Permanent Magnetic Chuck Permanent Magnetic Chuck Permanent Magnetic Circular Chucks Permanent Magnetic Circular Chuck Permanent Magnetic Circular Chuck Permanent Magnetic Circular Chuck Permanent Magnetic Circular Chuck Permanent Magnetic Circular Chuck Permanent Magnetic Circular Chuck Permanent Magnetic Circular Chuck Permanent Magnetic Circular Chuck Laminated Circular Top Plates Laminated Circular Top Plate Laminated Circular Top Plate Laminated Circular Top Plate for circular magnetic chucks for circular magnetic chucks for circular magnetic chucks P = 3 / 1 mm P = 6 mm parallel poles parallel poles parallel poles parallel poles radial poles extreme high holding force parallel poles parallel poles P = 8 / 5 mm P = 6 mm P = 6 mm P = 6 mm P = 6 mm P = 6 mm P = 6 mm Remarks fine transverse poles fine transverse poles fine transverse poles extreme low field height extreme high holding force enhanced holding force transverse poles Pole pitch P = 1.9 mm P = 1.9 mm P = 1.9 mm P = 1.9 mm P = 6 mm P = 15 mm P = 13 mm
Page 01 - 16
SAV-No. 242.90 243.01 243.07 243.09 243.10 243.11 243.12
Page 02 03 03 04 04 05 06 07
Permanent Magnetic Workholding Systems application examples
244.02 244.03 244.04 244.05 244.06 244.07 244.08 244.10
08 09 09 11 10 12 13 11
248.01 248.05 248.06
08 10 13
Short Taper Adapters, Morse Taper Adapters Short Taper Adapter Short Taper Adapter Short Taper Adapter Morse Taper Adapter Accessories for Magnetic Circular Chuck without mounting bolts with bayonet ring fixing with camlock fixing 248.90 248.91 248.92 248.94 14 14 15 15 16
Chapter 1
Product Applications
HSC machining with magnetic pallet SAV 220.31 (see chapter 8) Circular grinding with permanent circular magnetic chuck. In this application upto 300 different workpieces can be machined using 4 sets of pole raisers.
Milling on magnetic chuck.
Spark-erosion with Neodymium circular magnet.
Permanent magnetic beam with high-energy magnetic system and mechanical actuation with roller bearings. With magnetic isolated stop for grinding of workpieces and 20 angle.
Chapter 1
Technical data subject to change without prior notice
Permanent Magnetic Vertical Chuck

With fine transverse pole pitch P = 1.9 mm Use: Primarily for horizontal machining of workpieces. Features: T-section block made from St 52-3 and supplied complete with permanent magnetic chuck SAV 243.01. Laminations 0.5 mm brass / 1.4 mm steel. The T-section can also be supplied with other permanent, electro or electro-permanent chucks. Parallelism and angularity: 0.005 / 100 mm Nominal holding force: 80 N/cm2 Magnetic field height: 6 mm Pole plate wearing limit: 8 mm
SAV 242.90
Dimensions in mm
A 250 350 400 500
B 150 150 200 200
C 190 190 240 240
D 30 30 30 30
E 156 156 175 175
Weight in kg
38.0 52.0 75.0 93.5
A 9
Other sizes available on request. Ordering example: Permanent Magnetic Vertical Chuck SAV 242.90 - 500 Name SAV - No. - A Ordering key:
Permanent Magnetic Chuck

With fine transverse pole pitch P = 1.9 mm Use: For small, medium and large workpieces. Features: Uninterrupted transverse pole arrangement. Constant holding force over the entire polesurface area and along the side faces. Laminations 0.5 mm brass / 1.4 mm steel. Nominal holding force: Magnetic field height: Pole plate wearing limit:
Dimensions in mm
SAV 243.01
80 N/cm2 6 mm 8 mm
Weight in kg Dimensions in mm
A 140* 175 200 250 255 150 250 300 350
B C+0,5 2 70 49 100 49 100 49 100 49 130 49 150 51 150 51 150 51 150 51
D 103 147 172 220 222 115 215 265 315
3.7 7.0 8.1 13.2 14.5 9.8 16.4 19.7 23.0
A 400 450 300 400 500 600 500 500 600
B C+0,5 2 150 51 150 51 200 51 200 51 200 51 200 51 250 56 300 56 300 56
D 365 415 267 367 466 566 464 456 557
Weight in kg
26.2 30.0 26.2 35.0 43.7 52.4 58.5 70.2 84.2
1.4
0.5
A D C
D B Available with flushing channels for spark erosion applications. SAV 243.01 - 500 x 200 SAV - No. - A x B www.sav-workholding.com Chapter 1 3
*without mounting slots, actuation with tie-bar on short side. Stainless execution see chapter 8, SAV 243.16 Ordering example: Permanent Magnetic Chuck Ordering key: Name SAV Workholding and Automation

With fine transverse pole pitch P = 1.9 mm Use: Very suitable for thin parts. Features: Extremely low height. ON-OFF switching from above. Laminations 0.5 mm brass / 1.4 mm steel. Flushing channel(s) available at a surcharge. Suitable for adaption on zero reference system on request (see chapter 8). Nominal holding force: Magnetic field height: Pole plate wearing limit:
Dimensions in mm
SAV 243.07
80 N/cm2 6 mm 6 mm
Weight in kg
A 175 255 150 250 300 350 450 400
B 100 130 150 150 150 150 150 200
C+0,5 2 32.0 32.0 34.5 34.5 34.5 34.5 34.5 35.0
D 185 265 160 260 310 360 460 410
E 12.0 11.5 11.5 11.5 11.5 11.5 11.5 11.5
F 122 200 96 194 246 295 396 344
4.5 8.5 6.0 10.0 12.5 14.0 18.0 23.0
1.4
0.5
F D SAV 243.07 - 450 x 150 SAV - No. - A x B
Ordering example: Permanent Magnetic Chuck Name Ordering key:

With pole pitch P = 1.9 mm, extremely low field height for spark erosion (EDM) Use: For small and medium size workpieces. Especially suitable for thin parts. Features: Aluminium body with St 37 / V4A pole plate. Threaded holes for side stops and angle stops possible. Magnetic field height: Pole plate wearing limit: Nominal holding force: Pole pitch: 4 mm 3 mm 2 80 N/cm 1.9 mm D
SAV 243.09
Suitable for adaption on zero reference system on request (see chapter 8).
Dimensions in mm Switching Weight sections in kg
B C B A
A 200 240 280 320 320 480 650
B C+0,5 2 200 46 240 46 280 50 320 58 160 58 280 62 340 65
D 204.5 204.5 246.0 246.0 204.5 246.0
1 2 2 2 1 4 4
15.0 19.0 25.0 32.0 16.0 40.0 65.0
1,4
0,5
Ordering example: Permanent Magnetic Chuck Ordering key: Name 4 Chapter 1
SAV 243.09 - 320 x 320 SAV - No. - A x B Technical data subject to change without prior notice
Neodymium Magnetic Chuck

Use: For workpieces that are particularly difficult to clamp, such as ferrotic and hard metals containing cobalt, as well as very small workpieces. Features: Extremely high holding force due to a specially developed construction. Stable all-steel body. ON-OFF control on both end faces. Larger models - with power-operated switching mechanism - available on request. Laminations 4 mm St and 2 mm cast resin with NdFeB magnets in the pole gaps. Nominal holding force: Magnetic field height: Pole plate wearing limit: 180 N/cm2 ca. 10 mm 3 mm
SAV 243.10
With transverse pole pitch P=6 mm neodymium-iron-boron magnets, extremely high holding force
Dimensions in mm
A 400
B 150
C+0,5 2 82
D 171
Weight in kg
35.0
Special sizes on request.
Ordering example: Neodymium Magnetic Chuck SAV 243.10 Ordering key: Name SAV - No. SAV Workholding and Automation www.sav-workholding.com Chapter 1 5

With transverse pole pitch, P = 15 mm, neodymium-magnets, enhanced holding force Use: Heavy machining, such as milling and planing. The dense, concentrated magnetic field enables it to be used for small, medium and large workpieces, including those with rough or uneven surfaces. The magnetic field is without any stray fields, preventing magnetization of the tool. Features: Exceptionally strong neodymium magnetic system. ON-OFF control by means of hand lever. In the OFF position, a weak opposing field eases the removal of the workpiece. The magnets are equipped with longitudinal and transverse stop rails. Laminations 3 mm brass / 12 mm steel. Suitable for use with laminated topplates: SAV 248.02 and SAV 248.03 (see Page 14/15). Nominal holding force: Magnetic field height: Pole plate wearing limit: 150 N/cm2 ca.12 mm 5 mm
SAV 243.11
Dimensions in mm
A 250 300 350 400 500 600 600
B 150 150 150 200 200 200 300
C 56 56 56 56 56 56 56
+0,5 2
D 199 244 289 349 439 544 544
Weight in kg
A D
17.0 20.0 24.0 35.0 44.0 52.0 67.0
Ordering example: Permanent Magnetic Chuck Ordering key: Name 6 Chapter 1
SAV 243.11 - 600 x 300 SAV - No. - A x B Technical data subject to change without prior notice

With transverse pole pitch, P = 13 mm, enhanced holding force Use: Heavy machining, such as milling and planing. The low magnetic field prevents the magnetization of the cutting tools. ON-OFF control by means of hand lever. Longitudinal and transverse end stops available on request. Suitable for use with laminated topplates: SAV 248.02 and SAV 248.03 (see Page 14/15). Features: Double magnet arrangement in stable cast iron housing. Laminations: 5 mm brass / 8 mm steel Nominal holding force: Magnetic field height: Pole plate wearing limit: 140 N/cm2 ca.10 mm 7 mm
SAV 243.12
Dimensions in mm
A 450 500 600 800 450 500 600 750 1000 400 500 600 800 900 1000
B 200 200 200 200 250 250 250 250 250 300 300 300 300 300 300
C+0,5 2 93 93 93 93 93 93 93 93 93 93 93 93 93 93 93
D 445 495 595 795 445 495 595 745 945 395 495 595 795 895 995
F 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20
Number Weight of levers in kg
1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 2 2 2
45.0 50.0 62.0 82.0 47.0 64.0 78.0 97.0 129.0 72.0 90.0 100.0 130.0 153.0 180.0
A C D F
5 8 5
Ordering example: Permanent Magnetic Chuck Ordering key: Name SAV Workholding and Automation
SAV 243.12 - 600 x 300 SAV - No. - A x B www.sav-workholding.com Chapter 1 7
Permanent Magnetic Circular Chuck

With parallel pole arrangement, enhanced magnetic system Use: Sizes A = 200 to 500 mm for turning and grinding, sizes 100 to 160 for grinding. Features: Exceptional strong magnetic field. Concentric grooves simplify the centring of the workpiece. A centre drilling of up to diameter E is permissible, depth of drilling must not exceed 8 mm for A = 100 to 200 mm and 15 mm for A = 250 to 500 mm. Also available with flange (SAV 248.90 to 248.94, see Page 14/15). For additional top plates see 248.01.
Dimensions in mm
SAV 244.02
Nominal holding force: 140 N/cm2 (A= 200 to 500 mm) 70 N/cm2 (A= 100 to 160 mm) Magnetic field height: 10 mm Pole plate wearing limit: 8 mm
Switching Weight positions in kg
A 100 130 160 200 250 300 350 400 450 500
B+0.5 2 62 62 75 80 80 85 85 100 100 100
C 70 90 125 150 200 250 300 300 350 400
D 2.5 2.5 3.0 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 5.0 5.0 5.0
E 20 20 20 20 20 20
F G 91 3 x M5 120 4 x M6 142 4 x M8 182 4 x M8 232 4 x M8 285 4 x M8 334 4 x M8 350 6 x M10 400 6 x M10 450 6 x M10
Pole pitch steel / brass
4/1.5 2/1.5 4/1.5 2/1.5 6/5 8/5 8/5 8/5 8/5 8/5 8/5 8/5
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2
3.0 5.0 8.0 13.0 20.0 29.0 40.0 59.0 70.0 90.0
A E
CH7 F
Ordering example: Permanent Magnetic Circular Chuck SAV 244.02 - 500 Ordering key: Name SAV - No. - A
Laminated Circular Top Plate

For use on circular chucks with parallel pole arrangement Use: Clamping of profiled workpieces on circular chucks with parallel pole arrangement. Only usable in conjunction with circular magnetic chuck SAV 244.02 and 244.05. Features: Silver brazed steel/brass construction. Can be machined to any required shape, or custom machined during manufacture. Connection to magnet to be agreed upon. Lamination must be parallel to magnetic chuck. Pole pitch: steel 3 mm, brass 1 mm
Dimensions in mm Weight in kg A B
SAV 248.01
155 200 250 300 350 400 450 500
25 25 25 25 25 30 30 30
4.0 6.0 10.0 14.0 19.0 30.0 37.5 46.0
1 3
Ordering example: Laminated Circular Top Plate SAV 248.01 - 500 Ordering key: Name SAV - No. - A 8 Chapter 1 Technical data subject to change without prior notice
D B

With parallel pole pitch P = 7 mm, flat edition Use: Small and medium-sized workpieces. Features: Special magnetic configuration enabling the maximum holding force to be reached with workpieces as thin as 1 mm. ON-OFF control by means of a detachable socket wrench (radial adjustment). Available with flange on request (SAV 248.90 to 248.94, see Page 14/15). Nominal holding force: Magnetic field height: Pole plate wearing limit: 100 N/cm2 6 mm 3 mm
SAV 244.03
CH7
A 100 150
B+0.5 1 32 32
C D 80 87.5 130 137.5
E 3 3
Weight in kg
1.1 2.6
7
M5 Ordering example: Permanent Magnetic Circular Chuck SAV 244.03 - 150 Ordering key: Name SAV - No. - A

With fine parallel pole pitch P = 2.5 mm Use: Clamping of small and thin to medium-sized workpieces. Features: Extremely low height due to use of neodymiumiron-boron magnets. Pole pitch P = 2.5 mm. Holding force continuously variable. Available with flange on request (SAV 248.90 to 248.94, see Page 14/15). Nominal holding force: Magnetic field height: Pole plate wearing limit: 80 N/cm2 8 mm 5 mm
SAV 244.04
G F
Dimensions in mm
A 160 200 250 300
B+0.5 2 43 43 43 45
C 125 160 200 230
D 2 2 2 3
E 140 180 224 260
F 4 x M8 4 x M8 4 x M10 4 x M10
G 14 14 14 14
Weight in kg
6.5 10.0 15.0 25.0
Other sizes on request. Ordering example: Permanent Magnetic Circular Chuck SAV 244.04 - 300 Name SAV - No. - A Ordering key: SAV Workholding and Automation www.sav-workholding.com
D B
Chapter 1
Dimensions in mm

With radial pole arrangement Use: For cylindrical and ring-shaped workpieces. Features: High holding force. Concentric grooves to simplify workpiece alignment. Through hole possible up to maximum diameter D. Supplied as standard without through hole in centre. Central region (diameter C) not magnetically active. Available with flange on request (SAV 248.90 to 248.94, see Page 14/15). For additional top plates see 248.05 Bigger diameters available with T-slots on request.
Dimensions in mm
SAV 244.06
Nominal holding force: 100 N/cm2 Pole plate wearing limit: 5 mm (for A = 150 to 300 mm) 10 mm (for A = 350 to 400 mm)
Number Weight of poles in kg
A C
A B+0.5 2 100 48 130 57 150 57 200 57 250 70 300 73 350 73 400 75
C 14 16 20 28 30 40 40 40
D 20 24 30 50 58 58 58
E 51 50 50 60 80 150 170 200
F 6 5 5 5 5 6 6 8
G 76 100 80 110 140 180 220 260
H 120 180 220 260 300 340
I M6 M6 M6 M6 M6 M8 M8 M8
J 8 10 8 8 8 10 12 12
6 10 10 12 16 16 20 20
3 6 8 14 27 41 55 75
D EH7 G H
Ordering example: Permanent Magnetic Circular Chuck SAV 244.06 - 400 Name SAV - No. - A Ordering key:
4 mounting holes per pitch circle

For use on circular chuck 244.06 with radial poles Features: Can be machined to any required shape, or custom machined during manufacture. Suitable for SAV 244.06. Mounting to be agreed upon. Machinable depth: max. 8 mm
SAV 248.05
For bigger profiling depth, available with size B up to 25 mm
B
Dimensions in mm Number Weight A B of poles in kg
150 200 250 300 350 400
20 20 20 25 25 25
10 12 16 16 20 20
3.0 5.0 8.0 14.0 19.0 24.5
Larger sizes available on request Ordering example: Laminated Circular Top Plate SAV 248.05 - 150 Name SAV - No. - A Ordering key: 10 Chapter 1 Technical data subject to change without prior notice

With parallel pole arrangement P = 5 / 10 mm, enhanced magnet system Use: For workpieces that are difficult to clamp. Features: Extremely high holding force combined with slim construction. Available with flange on request (SAV 248.90 to 248.94, see Page 14/15). Laminations 3 mm steel / 2 mm brass / 8 mm steel. Nominal holding force: Magnetic field height: Top plate wearing limit: 120 N/cm2 15 mm 10 mm
SAV 244.05
3
Weight
Dimensions in mm
A 125 160 200 250 315 400
B+0.5 2 55 55 55 55 55 55
C 100 125 160 200 250 315
in kg D E 112 M6 (4x) 4.5 140 M8 (4x) 7.5 180 M8 (4x) 12.0 224 M10 (4x) 18.0 280 M10 (4x) 29.0 355 M10 (4x) 47.0
15
CH7 D A

Switchable Use: As an auxiliary magnet to be used on a circular chuck for holding smaller, delicate workpieces. Also suitable for fixtures and as a holding magnet. Features: Switchable permanent magnet, holding surface on the upper face. Pole arrangement: 50 mm 1.5 mm brass / 6 mm steel, 80 mm 2 mm brass / 8 mm steel
A
SAV 244.10
Dimensions in mm
A B 50 50 80 65
+0.5 2
C 25 50
D 35 60
E 4 x M5 4 x M6
Nominal holding force Weight in N in kg
85 500
0.7 2.2
CH7 D
Ordering example: Permanent Magnetic Circular Chuck SAV 244.10 - 80 Ordering key: Name SAV - No. - A SAV Workholding and Automation www.sav-workholding.com Chapter 1 11
Neodymium Magnetic Circular Chuck

For difficult workpieces, with parallel pole arrangement, P=6 mm Use: For workpieces that are particularly difficult to clamp, such as ferrotic and hard metals containing cobalt, as well as very small workpieces. Features: Aluminium housing, pole plate made from tool steel. Extremely high holding force through a specially developed construction using neodymium-iron-boron magnets. Available with flange on request (see SAV 248.90 to 248.94). Nominal holding force on induced steel surface: Magnetic field height: Pole plate wearing limit: 180 N/cm2 4 mm 3 mm
SAV 244.07
Available with adapters for reference system (see chapter 8) Also suitable for small parts 6
10
0,8 mm thickness
Pole configuration
10 0
I H G
L K J
Dimensions in mm Weight in kg
A B+0.5 2 100 65 125 65 160 65 180 65 200 65
C 70 95 125 125 125
D 4 4 4 4 4
E 90 110 140 160 180
F G H M6 (4x) M8 (4x) 88 M10 (4x) - 104 M10 (4x) 124 84 M10 (4x) 134 104
I 48 54 54 64 74
J K 98 - 134 134 97 158 110
L 74 67 61 61 73
2.0 3.0 4.5 6.5 8.5
9,5
CH7 E
Ordering example: Neodymium Magnetic Circular Chuck SAV 244.07 - 160 Ordering key: Name SAV - No. - A 12 Chapter 1 Technical data subject to change without prior notice

With parallel pole arrangement Use: Clamping of medium and large workpieces. For light turning. Features: Robust construction. Holding force continuously variable. Concentric grooves to simplify alignment of the workpieces. Available with flange on request (SAV 248.90 to 248.94, see chapter 06). For additional top plates see 248.06. Nominal holding force 80 N/cm2 Magnetic field height: 15 mm Pole plate wearing limit: 10 mm
Dimensions in mm
SAV 244.08
A B+0.5 2 150 52 180 52 200 52 250 70 300 70 350 70 400 75 450 75 500 80 600 80
C 100 100 120 120 120 120 120 120 120 120
D 6 6 6 8 8 8 8 8 8 10
E 120 120 150 230 270 270 270 270 270 270
F 4 x M6 4 x M6 4 x M6 3 x M10 3 x M10 3 x M10 3 x M10 3 x M10 3 x M10 3 x M10
Weight in kg
6.0 8.0 11.0 19.0 27.0 46.0 63.0 112.0 150.0 200.0
3 resp. 4 mounting holes per pitch circle

With radial pole arrangement for chuck SAV 244.08 Features: Can be machined to any required shape, or custom machined during manufacture. The maximum machined depth must not exceed 12 mm. Suitable for SAV 244.08.
SAV 248.06
150 180 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 600
20 20 20 20 20 20 25 25 25 25
2.8 4.0 4.9 7.7 11.1 15.1 24.7 31.3 38.6 55.6
Ordering example: Laminated Circular Top Plate SAV 248.06 - 600 Name SAV - No. - A Ordering key: SAV Workholding and Automation www.sav-workholding.com Chapter 1 13
parallel pole arrangement
CH7
Short Taper Adapter
without mounting bolts
SAV 248.90
To fit circular magnetic chucks to spindle nose Use: Mounting of circular magnetic chucks or other clamping tools to short taper spindle noses of type DIN 55026 (55021) form A and B, ISO 702/I A1 and A2, ASA B5.9 A1 and A2. Features: Mild steel adapter in accordance with DIN, ISO and ASA-standards. Fully prepared on spindle-side. Preparations for chuck side carried out in accordance with customers requirements (please supply suitable drawing). Rotary magnets can be supplied ready fitted with adapter.
Spindle nose size Dimensions in mm
3 4* 4** 5 6 8 11 15
A 75.0 82.6 85.0 104.8 133.4 171.4 235.0 330.2
B 18 18 18 24 28 32 35 42
C 45 45 45 60 80 90 120 120
Sizes B, C, and D as well as mounting holes pitch circle according requirements or customer specification.
C * For spindle nose type DIN 55026 ** For spindle nose type DIN 55021
Ordering example: Short Taper Adapter SAV 248.90 - 4 - DIN 55026 Ordering key: Name SAV - No. - Spindle nose size - Standard
Short Taper Adapter
with bayonet ring fixing
SAV 248.91
To fit circular magnetic chucks to spindle nose Use: Mounting of circular magnetic chucks or other clamping tools to short taper spindle noses of type DIN 55027 (55022) and ISO 702/III Features: Mild steel adapter in accordance with DIN, ISO and ASA-standards with studs and bayonet ring fixing. Fully prepared on spindle-side. Preparations for chuck side carried out in accordance with customers requirements (please supply suitable drawing). Circular chucks can be supplied ready fitted with adapter.
Spindle nose size Dimensions in mm
3 4* 4** 5 6 8 11 15
A 75.0 82.6 85.0 104.8 133.4 171.4 235.0 330.2
B 18 18 18 24 28 32 35 42
C 40 45 45 60 80 90 120 120
Number of studs
3 3 3 4 4 4 6 6
* For spindle nose type DIN 55027 ** For spindle nose type DIN 55022
Ordering example: Short Taper Adapter SAV 248.91 - 15 - DIN 55027 Name SAV - No. - Spindle nose size - Standard Ordering key: 14 Chapter 1 Technical data subject to change without prior notice
Short Taper Adapter
with camlock fixing
SAV 248.92
To fit circular magnetic chucks in accordance with DIN 6353 Use: Mounting of circular magnetic chucks or other clamping tools to short taper spindle noses of type DIN 55029, ISO 702/II and ASA b5.9 D1. Features: Mild steel adapter in accordance with DIN, ISO and ASA-standards. Fully prepared on spindle-side. Preparations for chuck side carried out in accordance with customers requirements (please supply suitable drawing). Circular chucks can be supplied ready fitted with adapter. B
Spindle nose size
Dimensions in mm
3 4 5 6 8 11 15
A 70.6 82.6 104.8 133.4 171.4 235.0 330.2
B 28 28 30 35 40 45 50
C 45 45 60 80 90 120 120
Number of studs
3 3 6 6 6 6 6
Ordering example: Short Taper Adapter with camlock fixing SAV 248.92 - 15 Ordering key: Name SAV - No. - Spindle nose size
Morse Taper Adapter

To fit circular magnetic chucks to morse taper sockets Use: Mounting of circular magnetic chucks or other clamping tools to morse taper sockets of type DIN 228 Features: Mild steel adapter in accordance with DIN. Fully prepared on spindle-side. Preparations for chuck side carried out in accordance with customers requirements (please supply suitable drawing). Circular chucks can be supplied ready fitted with adapter. Hardened and ground version made from case hardening steel available on request.
Dimensions in mm
SAV 248.94
Taper size
MK 0 MK 1 MK 2 MK 3 MK 4 MK 5 MK 6
A 9.045 12.065 17.780 23.825 31.267 44.399 63.348
B 6.4 9.4 14.6 19.8 25.9 37.6 53.9
C M6 M 10 M 12 M 16 M 20 M 24
D 50.0 53.5 64.0 81.0 102.5 129.5 182.0
A B C
Sizes according requirements or customer application.
Ordering example: Morse Taper Adapter SAV 248.94 - MK 6 Ordering key: Name SAV - No. - Morse taper size SAV Workholding and Automation www.sav-workholding.com Chapter 1 15
Accessories for Magnetic Circular Chuck
Top plates
Flanges
Circular Magnetic Chucks are available with flanges and top plates.
16
Chapter 1
CHAPTER 2
Electro Magnetic Rectangular Chucks Electro Magnetic Workholding Systems Electro Magnetic Chuck Electro Magnetic Chuck Electro Magnetic Chuck Electro Magnetic Circular Chucks Electro Magnetic Circular Chuck Electro Magnetic Chuck Electrical connections to circular chucks Slip Ring Body Carbon Brush Holder Electro Magnetic Circular Chucks for circular magnetic chucks for circular magnetic chucks examples of electrical connections radial poles concentric poles Remarks information and application examples fine transverse poles fine logitudinal poles transverse poles Pole pitch P = 4 mm P = 4 mm
Page 17 - 32
SAV-No. -
Page 18-19
243.40 20-21 243.41 22-23
P = 13/18/25 mm 243.42 24-25
244.40 26-27
P = 4.5/9/18 mm 244.41 28-29
248.81 248.83 -
30 30 31-32
SAV Workholding and Automation
www.sav-workholding.com
Chapter 2
17
Electro Magnetic Circular Chuck Diameter 1500 mm with T-slots for mounting of pole raisers for 3-side machining of large rings.
Electro Magnetic Circular Chuck in segments Diameter 5400 mm for machining of toothed rings.
Special Electro Magnetic Chuck With 16 individual switchable magnetic segments, for automatic grinding of ferrite cores.
Production of housing for circular magnets, milled from one piece, tension-free annealed.
18
Chapter 2
Electro Magnetic Chucks

Clarifications and application examples Electro magnetic chucks The achievable magnetic holding forces of electro magnets are linear to the required direct current coils and because of that with the dimensions of the magnets and their thermal behaviour. Electrical power supply has to be ensured on the magnet while in operation. Consequently the use of slip ring systems and carbon brushes is necessary when using round magnets on turning machines. Similar to electro motors these are subject to wear and will have to be replaced after certain time of use. To supply these chucks electronic polarity reversing control units are used, which do not only supply the required energy but at the same time can demagnetize workpiece and chuck after operation.
Particularly for turning applications specific control features are required to ensure constant voltage supply, also at emergency stop. Since the supplied energy will transfer completely into heat, these chucks will show dimensional growth of several 0.01 mm, depending on chuck size. The indicated nominal holding forces per effective workpiece dimension relate to a test workpiece made of ST37, length100 mm x width 100 x thick 40 mm with ground surface. Clarifications to the function and influences on holding forces can be found in the applicable chapters and in more detail in the technical clarifications as presented in chapter 15.
Electro circular chuck in special execution Circular electro-permanent magnetic chuck for hard turning application diameter 4000 mm manufactured out of 2 pieces
Components for electro circular chucks In contrary to many other power actuated chucks, the electro magnetic and also the electro permanent chucks (Chapter 3) require only three components for the energy supply: Electronic Polarity-Reversing Control unit; hand control unit (remote) and the set of slip ring body and carbon brushes. The control unit converts the available mains alternating voltage into the required direct voltage and is used for demagnetizing. Any required interlocking to the machine can be made to customer specifications. Slip ring body and carbon brushes: see chapter 2/3 Electronic Polarity-Reversing Control units: see chapter 4
Chapter 2
19
Electro Magnetic Chuck

With fine transverse pole pitch P = 4 mm Electromagnetic system with very narrow pole pitch. Especially suitable for thin workpieces. Workpiece positioning in length direction of the chuck.
SAV 243.40
Use: Clamping of thin, plate shaped workpieces with form and positional tolerances of 0.01 to 0.02 mm.
Features: - especially fine, uninterrupted transverse pole pitch, 3 mm steel and 1 mm brass - glued lamination with additional pull anchors cross to lamination - fine grid pole plate to body connection - 8 mm pole plate wearing limit - low magnetic field height of only 4 mm - mounting slots in both short faces - through holes in sizes over 1000 mm length on specification - robust and waterproof
90
- for workpiece positioning cross to pole pitch - for thin workpieces of min. 2 mm thick - for flat workpieces with min. dimensions 40 x 40 mm 2
40
- sealed to IP 65 - suitable for continuous (100%) operation - for use with control unit type SAV 876.10 (see chapter 04) Auxiliary equipment: - sidestop rail on short and long face - connecting cable, 3 m, on the right-hand, short face - lifting bolts on larger models
Nominal holding force: 100 N/cm2, adjustable with control unit with encoded switch Nominal operating voltage: 24 V DC up to 118 W 110 V DC for all sizes
20
Chapter 2

With fine transverse pole pitch P = 4 mm
SAV 243.40
A D
1 3
Dimensions in mm
A 450 400 500 600 800 500 600 800 500 600 800 1000
B 175 200 200 200 200 250 250 250 300 300 300 300
C 87
0 -1
D 397 349 453 549 749 453 549 749 453 549 749 949
Power rating in W
Weight in kg
Dimensions in mm
106
51.0
87 87 87 87 87 87 87 87 87 87 87
118 52.0 140 64.0 162 77.0 206 103.0 150 81.0 180 97.0 233 129.0 175 97.0 206 116.0 268 155.0 330 193.0
A 600 800 1000 600 700 800 1000 1200 800 1000 1200
B 350 350 350 400 400 400 400 400 500 500 500
0 C -1 87 87 87
D 549 749 949 549 653 749 949 1149 749 949 1149
Power rating in W
C
Weight in kg
235 135.0 305 180.0 375 225.0 265 310 345 425 510 155.0 181.0 206.0 258.0 310.0
87 87 87 87 87 87 87 87
422 257.0 510 322.0 605 386.0
Other sizes and operating voltages available on request. Larger clamping surfaces can be made by flush mounting several units. Please refer to SAV 876.10 to SAV 876.06, for details regarding suitable control units, based on the power rating (chapter 04).
Ordering example: Electro Magnetic Chuck SAV 243.40 - 1200 x 500 - 110 V Ordering key: Name SAV - No. - A x B - Operating voltage SAV Workholding and Automation www.sav-workholding.com Chapter 2 21

With fine longitudinal pole pitch P = 4 mm Electromagnetic system with very narrow pole pitch. Especially suitable for thin workpieces. Workpiece positioning in cross direction of the chuck.
SAV 243.41
Use: Clamping of thin, plate shaped workpieces with form and positional tolerances of 0.01 to 0.02 mm. - for workpiece positioning cross to pole pitch
Features: - especially fine, uninterrupted longitudinal pole pitch, 3 mm steel and 1 mm brass - glued lamination with additional pull anchors cross to lamination - fine grid pole plate to body connection - 8 mm pole plate wearing limit
90
2
- low magnetic field height - mounting slots in both short faces - through holes for mounting in sizes over 1000 mm length on specification
- for thin workpieces of min. 2 mm thick
- for flat workpieces with min. dimensions 40 x 40 mm
40
- robust and waterproof - sealed to IP 65 - suitable for continuous (100%) operation - for use with control unit type SAV 876.10 (chapter 04) Auxiliary equipment: - sidestop rail on short and long face - connecting cable, 3 m, on the right-hand, short face - lifting bolts on larger models
Nominal holding force: 100 N/cm2, adjustable with control unit with encoded switch Nominal operating voltage: 24 V DC up to 118 W 110 V DC for all sizes
22
Chapter 2

With fine longitudinal pole pitch P = 4 mm
SAV 243.41
1
Dimensions in mm
A 200 300 300 400 450 400 500 600 800 500 600 800 500 600 800 1000
B 100 100 150 150 175 200 200 200 200 250 250 250 300 300 300 300
C 87 87
0 -1
D 53 53 101 101 125 149 149 149 149 197 197 197 253 253 253 253
Power rating in W
Weight in kg
Dimensions in mm
30 45 65 90 106
13.0 20.0 29.0 39.0 51.0
87 87 87 87 87 87 87 87 87 87 87 87 87 87
A 600 800 1000 600 700 800 1000 1200 800 1000 1200
B 350 350 350 400 400 400 400 400 500 500 500
C 87 87 87 87 87 87 87 87 87 87 87
0 -1
D 301 301 301 349 349 349 349 349 453 453 453
Power rating in W
Weight in kg
235 135.0 305 180.0 375 225.0 265 305 345 425 510 155.0 180.0 206.0 258.0 310.0
118 52.0 140 64.0 162 77.0 206 103.0 150 81.0 180 97.0 233 129.0 175 97.0 206 116.0 268 155.0 330 193.0
420 257.0 510 322.0 612 386.0
Other sizes and operating voltages available on request. Larger clamping surfaces can be made by flush mounting several units. Please refer to SAV 876.10 to SAV 876.06, for details regarding suitable control units, based on the power rating
Ordering example: Electro Magnetic Chuck SAV 243.41 - 300 x 150 - 110 V Ordering key: Name SAV - No. - A x B - Operating voltage SAV Workholding and Automation www.sav-workholding.com Chapter 2 23

With transverse pole pitch P = 13 mm, 18 mm and 25 mm This chuck is particularly notable for its high power, robust construction and long-life. The pole pitch gives real N and S-poles.
SAV 243.42
Use: For universal clamping of workpieces with form and positional tolerances of 0.01 to 0.02 mm.
Features: - solid contructed pole plate with either 13 mm, 18 mm or 25 mm pole pitch - real magnetic (N/S) poles - water cooling system on request - air pressure release system on request for P = 18 or 25 mm - gap free construction of pole plate - fine grid pole plate to body connection
90
- for workpiece positioning cross to pole pitch
- for workpieces with min. thickness = x: 4.5 mm at P = 13 mm 6.0 mm at P = 18 mm 8.5 mm at P = 25 mm
- 8 mm pole plate wearing limit - mounting slots in both short faces - through holes in sizes over 1000 mm length on specification - robust and waterproof - sealed to IP 65 - suitable for continuous (100%) operation - for use with control unit type SAV 876.10 (see chapter 04) Auxiliary equipment: - sidestop rail on short and long face - connecting cable, 3 m, on the right-hand, short face - lifting bolts on larger models
- for flat workpieces with min. dimensions = a: 25 mm x 25 mm at P = 13 mm 32 mm x 32 mm at P = 18 mm 45 mm x 45 mm at P = 25 mm Nominal holding force: 90 N/cm2, at pole pitch P = 13 mm 110 N/cm2, at pole pitch P = 18 mm 115 N/cm2, at pole pitch P = 25 mm adjustable with control unit with encoded switch Nominal operating voltage: 24 V DC up to 120 W 110 V DC for all sizes a 24 Chapter 2

With transverse pole pitch P = 13 mm, 18 mm and 25 mm
SAV 243.42
D Other sizes and operating voltages available on request. Larger clamping surfaces can be made by flush mounting several units. Please refer to chapter 04, SAV 876.10 to SAV 876.06, for details regarding suitable control units, based on the power rating (see chapter 04). P
Dimensions in mm
A 200 300 300 400 450 400 500 600 800 500 600 800 500 600 800 1000 600 800 1000
B 100 100 150 150 175 200 200 200 200 250 250 250 300 300 300 300 350 350 350
0 C -1 90 90
D 120 224 224 328 381 309 417 525 741 417 525 741 417 525 741 921 525 741 921
P 13 13 13 13 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18
Power rating in W
Weight in kg
Dimensions in mm
19 31 42 52 64 66 83 89 120 94 109 127 110 128 171 209 148 191 239
11.0 17.0 25.0 34.0 44.0 45.0 56.0 67.0 90.0 70.0 84.0 112.0 84.0 101.0 134.0 168.0 118.0 157.0 196.0
90 90 90 90 90 90 90 90 90 90 90 90 90 90 90 90 90
A 600 700 800 1000 1200 800 1000 1200 1250 1500 1600 2000 1000 1200 1250 1500 1600 2000 1500 1600 2000
B 400 400 400 400 400 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 600 600 600 600 600 600 800 800 800
0 C -1 90 90 90 90 90
D 525 697 741 921 1101 730 930 1130 1180 1430 1530 1930 930 1130 1180 1430 1530 1930 1430 1530 1930
P 18 18 18 18 18 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25
Power rating in W
Weight in kg
166 187 208 255 329 254 341 374 390 458 489 576 361 441 459 487 520 607
134.0 156.0 179.0 224.0 269.0 224.0 280.0 336.0 350.0 420.0 438.0 560.0 382.0 459.0 478.0 573.0 611.0 764.0
90 90 90 90 90 90 90 90 90 90 90 90 90 90 90 90
730 764.0 693 815.0 810 1018.0
Ordering example: Electro Magnetic Chuck SAV 243.42 - 2000 x 800 - 25 - 110 V Ordering key: Name SAV - No. - A x B - P - Operating voltage SAV Workholding and Automation www.sav-workholding.com Chapter 2 25
Electro Magnetic Circular Chuck

With radial pole arrangement These circular electro magnets are notable for their very high holding force. Radial T-slots can be provided in the pole plates for added flexibility.
SAV 244.40
Use: Grinding of circular and ring-shaped workpieces on carrousel internal and external grinding machines. Also suitable for turning with form and position tolerances of 0.01 to 0.02 mm. = - equal pole pitch within circle range; therefore very suitable for circular and ring shaped workpieces 0.35 x P - for ring-shaped workpieces the minimum height is 35% of the pole pitch at the given circle segment
Features: - solid designed pole plate - radial pole arrangement, especially suitable for the use of pole raisers. This is absolutely essential for the runout of the tool or the grinding wheel at three side operation. Therefore available with T-slots (T) according DIN 650-10H10 on request. - pole plate wearing limit 8 mm - sealed to IP 65 - suitable for continuous (100%) operation - for use with control unit type 876.10 (see chapter 04) - available with adapter flange on request (SAV 248.90 to 248.94, see chapter 01) Scope of supply: - Lifting bolts for transportation on larger models. - T-slots and pole extensions not included as standard. - Terminals for electrical connection in middle of back side in standard execution. - Optional with integrated slip ring body for the bigger diameters.
- also for thin rings
Nominal holding force: 120 N/cm2, adjustable by control unit with encoded switch Nominal operating voltage: 24 V DC up to 90 W 110 V DC all sizes
di do
<0.9
26
Chapter 2

With radial pole arrangement
SAV 244.40
G F I
number of pole pairs P
CH7
A 100 150 200 250 300 400 500 600 700 800 1000 1200 1400 1500 1600
B*0 -1 80 80 90 90 90 90 90 100 100 100 100 125 125 125 125
Dimensions in mm
C 60 90 110 140 160 210 280 350 400 450 550
D E F 3 80 M8 (3x) 3 120 M10 (3x) 3 140 M10 (4x) 3 170 M12 (4x) 3 190 M12 (4x) 4 250 M12 (6x) 4 320 M12 (6x) 4 390 M16 (6x) 4 450 M16 (6x) 4 500 M16 (6x) 4 620 M16 (8x) Rear detail as required Rear detail as required Rear detail as required Rear detail as required
G 12 14 14 16 16 16 16 18 18 18 18
H 30 30 40 50 60 70 100 100 120 150 200 300 300 300 300
I 10 10 10 10 10 15 15 15 15 18 18 25 25 25 25
P 3 3 4 4 6 6 8 8 8 12 12 18 18 18 18
Power in W
Weight in kg
16 30 48 66 90 150 190 265 350 440 660 960 1100 1440 1630
4 9 18 29 42 76 120 195 265 365 550 990 1350 1550 1760
Other sizes up to diameter A = 3100 mm available on request. Please refer to SAV 876.03 to SAV 876.10 (see chapter 04), for details regarding suitable control units, based on the power rating. Bigger sizes can be constructed out of several segments. *in execution with T-slots the height increases with 10 mm
Ordering example: Electro Magnetic Circular Chuck SAV 244.40 - 800 - T - 110 V Ordering key: Name SAV - No. - A - Execution - Operating voltage SAV Workholding and Automation www.sav-workholding.com Chapter 2 27

With concentric pole arrangement These circular electro magnets generate a strong, ring-shaped and low magnetic field.
SAV 244.41
Use: Mainly for grinding of disc shaped work pieces on internal and external grinders with rotary tables. Not suitable for thin rings. Because of the concentric pole arrangement it is also suitable for holding groups of randomly placed workpieces. Also suitable for turning with form and position tolerances of 0.01 to 0.02 mm. - for circular grinding - uniform holding force distribution due to concentric pole arrangement; therefore suitable for thin and flat workpieces (e.g. saw blades) - multiple workpiece operation on segments possible - for workpieces with min. thickness = x: 2 mm at P = 4.5 mm 4 mm at P = 9.0 mm 8 mm at P = 18.0 mm - for flat workpieces with min. dimensions 45 mm x 45 mm
Nominal holding force: P = 4.5 mm: 80 N/cm2 P = 9 mm: 100 N/cm2 P = 18 mm: 110 N/cm2 adjustable by control unit with encoded switch Nominal operating voltage: 24 V DC up to 90 W 110 V DC all sizes Features: - gap free construction of pole plate - fine grid poleplate to body connection - pole plate wearing limit 8 mm - sealed to IP 65 - suitable for continuous (100%) operation - for use with control unit type 876.10 (see chapter 04) - available with adapter flange on request (SAV 248.90 to 248.94, see chapter 01)
Scope of supply: - Lifting bolts for transportation on larger models. - Terminals for electrical connection in middle of backside in standard execution. 45 - Optional with integrated slip ring body for the bigger diameters.
28
Chapter 2

With concentric pole arrangement
SAV 244.41
G F
I P
CH7
Dimensions in mm
A 100 150 200 250 300 400 500 600 700 800 1000 400 500 600 700 800 1000 1200 1400 1500 1600
0 B -1 80 80 90 90 90
C 60 90 110 140 160 210 280 350 400 450 550 210 280 350 400 450 550
D 3 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
E 80 120 140 170 190 250 320 390 450 500 620 250 320 390 450 500 620
F M8 (3x) M10 (3x) M10 (4x) M12 (4x) M12 (4x) M12 (6x) M12 (6x) M12 (6x) M12 (6x) M16 (6x) M16 (8x) M12 (6x) M12 (6x) M12 (6x) M12 (6x) M16 (6x) M16 (8x)
G 12 14 14 16 16 16 16 18 18 18 18 16 16 18 18 18 18 22 22 22 22
H 22 30 40 45 55 46 74 66 76 129 131 46 74 66 76 138 140 131 136 101 129
I 9 12 16 16 16 21 21 21 21 22 22 21 21 21 21 22 22 23 26 26 26
P 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 9 9 9 9 9 9 18 18 18 18 18 18 9 9 9 9
Power in W
Weight in kg
16 30 48 66 90 150 190 264 350 440 660 150 190 264 350 440 660 960 1100 1440 1630
4 9 18 29 42 92 144 208 283 369 577 92 144 208 283 369 577 989 1346 1545 1760
105 105 105 105 105 105 105 105 105 105 105 105 125 125 125 125
Rear detail as required Rear detail as required Rear detail as required Rear detail as required
Rear detail as required 1200 125 22 140 23 18 960 989 Rear detail as required 1400 125 22 136 26 18 1100 1346 Rear detail as required 1500 125 22 128 26 18 1440 1545 Rear detail as required 1600 125 22 138 26 18 1630 1760 Other sizes available on request. Please refer to SAV 876.03 to SAV 876.10 (see chapter 04), for details regarding suitable control units, based on the power rating. Ordering example: Electro Magnetic Circular Chuck Ordering key: Name SAV Workholding and Automation SAV 244.41 - 800 x 18 - 110 V SAV - No. - A x P - Operating voltage Chapter 2 29
Slip-Ring Body
For electric power supply to circular electromagnetic chucks Use: Slip-ring bodies are used in combination with carbon brushes to supply power to circular electromagnetic chucks. The slip-ring body can be mounted separately to the hollow machine spindle. When installing it must be assured that the insulation components do not come into contact with coolant or other fluids. Suitable protection must be provided to prevent contact with live components. Mounting: - shrinking at 130 oC - pressing with 0.5 mm oversize - glueing Execution: The slip-ring body is supplied with a small through hole only. The required adapter through-bore is to be machined in accordance with the machine spindle dimensions and taking the maximum size E into account.
For circular magnet - Chuck voltage in V Number of contacts Dimensions in mm
SAV 248.81
to 300 to 900 to 1600
24 110 110
2 3 3
A B 80 40.0 90 61.5 120 84.0
C 20 22 25
D E M5 28 - 38 M6 30 - 45 M8 40 - 65
Max. Weight r.p.m. in kg
3600 3200 2500
1.1 2.0 3.5
Ordering example: Slip Ring Body SAV 248.81 - 1600 Ordering key: Name SAV - No. - Max. circular chuck diameter
Carbon Brush Holder

For electric power supply to circular electromagnetic chucks Use: These carbon brush holders are required to supply current to the slip-ring bodies SAV 248.81 for use with circular electromagnetic chucks. Available in three sizes, and supplied with terminals. Execution: Spring-loaded carbon brushes. Mounting on taps. G
SAV 248.83
Distance G to slip ring body

For circular magnet - Chuck voltage in V Number of contacts C Dimensions in mm Weight in kg
E
E 6.3 6.3 8.0 F 20 20 25 G 27.0 0.10 25.0 0.17 36.5 0.20
to 300 to 900 to 1600
24 110 110
2 3 3
A 140 140 140
B 40 40 60
C M8 M8 M8
D 12.5 12.5 20
A D
Ordering example: Carbon Brush Holder SAV 248.83 - 1600 - 110 V Ordering key: Name SAV - No. - Max. chuck size - Operating voltage 30 Chapter 2 Technical data subject to change without prior notice
Electro Magnetic Circular Chucks

Electric power supply with external slip ring unit
Slip Ring Body
Machine Spindle
Circular Chuck
E-Connection
Carbon Brush Holder
Flange
Chapter 2
31

Electric power supply with central flat slip ring unit with vertical mounting for larger magnetic chucks
Removable Cover Pole Plate
Axial Carbon Brush Holder
Magnetic Chuck Housing
Flat Slip-Ring Body
32
Chapter 2
CHAPTER 3
Electro-Permanent Magnetic Rectangular Chucks Electro-Permanent Magnetic Chuck Electro-Permanent Magnetic Chuck Electro-Permanent Magnetic Chuck Electro-Permanent Magnetic Chuck Electro-Permanent Magnetic Chuck Electro-Permanent Magnetic Chuck Electro-Permanent Magnetic Chuck Electro-Permanent Magnetic Chuck Pole raisers Pole raisers Pole raisers Electro-Permanent Circular Chucks Hard-turning applications Electro-Permanent Magnetic Circular Chuck Electro-Permanent Magnetic Circular Chuck Electro-Permanent Magnetic Circular Chuck Electro-Permanent Magnetic Circular Chuck Electrical connections to circular chucks Carbon Brush Holder Slip-Ring Body Electro-Permanent Magnetic Circular Chucks for circular magnetic chuck for circular magnetic chuck Examples of electrical connections Information and application examples radial poles radial poles, enhanced system concentric poles fine parallel poles P=4.5/9/18mm P = 4 mm fixed and flexible Information and application examples Remarks Transverse poles Fine longitudinal poles Fine longitudinal poles Fine transverse poles Modular poles Fine transverse poles In special execution for milling of rails Hexagonal poles Pole pitch P=13/18/25 mm P = 4 mm P = 4 mm P = 4 mm 140 x 105 mm P=27.5/55/85 60 mm
Page 33 - 78
SAV-No. 243.70 243.71 243.72 243.73 243.74 243.77 243.77 RAIL 243.79
Page 34-45 46-47 48-49 50-51 52-53 54-55 56-60 61 62-63
Electro-Permanent Magnetic Workholding Systems Information and application examples
248.70 -
64 64-65
244.70 244.71 244.72 244.73
66 68-69 70-71 72-73 74-75
248.84 248.85 -
76 76 77-78
Chapter 3
33
Milling of pole plates
Grinding application of magnetic chuck housing
Milling of train rails
Milling of prism beams of cast iron
Special magnetic fixture With enhanced holding force for laser cutting and welding of car parts
34
Chapter 3
Electro-permanent magnetic system in high energy execution with changeable pole beams for grinding of linear guides, lengh 4000 mm.
Electro permanent swivelling chuck, for machining of press brake tools, 4 separate switchable magnetic systems, changeable pole blocks, length 1000 mm, with NC indexer
Chapter 3
35
Electro permanent magnetic chucks for milling of press-top-plates with extreme air gaps. With mechanic swivelling side stops for 5 side machining
Electro permanent magnetic chuck with pole beams, for hard milling of tools
Electro-permanent magnetic chucks: With separate magnetizable side stops for workpiece positioning. Automatic 3 shift operation. Milling of thin steel sheets.
Electro permanent magnetic milling chuck: In special execution with separate magnetizable side stops for small workpieces. Extreme high holding forces through sideways magnetic coupling.
36
Chapter 3
Electro permanent magnetic chucks: For grinding of linear guides on changing fixtures. With integrated hydraulic side stop.
Electro permanent magnetic chucks as changing pallet for grinding of linear guides. Machining of 2 workpieces on top of each other; 4 slots are ground simultaneously.
Electro permanent magnetic chucks: For high precision, use for grinding of measuring foiles. Air-pressure holes integrated in the pole plate for easy removal of the workpieces.
Chapter 3
37
Electro-permanent magnetic chuck: for square grinding of linear guides. Length 2000 mm.
Electro-permanent magnetic chuck: for grinding of linear guides, with magnetic active side stops. Length 1300 mm.
Electro-permanent magnetic chuck: with transverse movable magnetic active side stops. Length 1300 mm, for grinding of linear guides.
Electro-permanent magnetic chuck: in precision execution with transverse poles, enhanced magnetic system. Total length 4322 mm; monoblock construction, for grinding of 2 linear guides clamped on top of each other.
38
Chapter 3
Electro-permanent magnetic chuck for parallel milling of plates. Combined pole pitch 27.5 mm and modular poles for machining of bigger plates and narrow strips.
Electro-permanent magnetic chucks: For precise grinding of cyclo-gear parts. Special long poles with enhanced holding force. 3 slots for mechanical centring elements.
Electro-permanent magnetic chuck with profiled top plate.
Chapter 3
39
according to your requirements Permanent-electro, as well as electro-permanent magnetic chucks provide versatile use for workpiece clamping.
SAV 095.34
Electro-permanent magnetic clamping fixture for machining of cast iron parts on machining centers in first and second clamping on pallet systems. 1st clamping Drilling and milling operation against fixed side stops. Positioning of workpieces on fixed and flexible pole raisers. Anti-rotation feature for circular milling through changeable side stops. 2nd clamping Drilling and milling operation. Workpiece holding over socket pins. Fixed positioning of ready-milled surfaces on pole raisers and bridges.
Technical advice and application examples for permanent, electro, and electro-permanent magnetic chucks (rectangular and circular) in standard execution can be derived from chapters 1, 2 and 3. Further details, especially regarding possible holding forces, are summarized in chapter 15.
40
Chapter 3
Electro-permanent magnetic fixture for hard milling of crank-shaft moulds. Clamping cube with 4 angular magnets. Dimensions 1400 x 1400 mm.
Electro permanent magnetic chucks: In precision execution for grinding of extreme thin foils.
Grinding of pole plates on electro permanent magnetic chucks.
Chapter 3
41
Electro-permanent magnetic milling fixture: Size 1900 x 750 mm, for heavy chip removal, including pole beams for 5-side machining and swivelling, position-monitored, side stops.
42
Chapter 3
Flexible pole raisers for 5 side machining of uneven workpieces
Electro permanent magnet: With mounted profiled special adapter plate for grinding of knives.
Electro-permanent magnetic beams in special executions. With Neodymium magnetic system for milling operation of linear guides.
Chapter 3
43
Product Applikation Electro-Permanent Magnetic Pallets

With magnetic, hydraulic, mechanical and vacuum workholding Special vacuum-magnetic cuck with hydraulics and grid system General requirements: The workholding system as designed to customer specifications is utilized on a horizontal/vertical milling machine as a replacement of 2 worn-out NC-machining centres. Relevant requirements: - high machining flexibility and quality for a wide range of workpieces - 4 to 5 side machining of complex parts of different sizes for drilling and milling - Short set-up times - Easy cleaning - Easy maintenance - To be modified to existing grid clamping system - Flatness and positioning accuracy 0.02 mm on 2.8 m. - Also thin parts shall be clamped free of tension - Combination of magnetic, mechanical, hydraulic and vacuum clamping principles. Execution: To be able to meet the requirements a special magnet was designed on basis of the SAV 243.77, with vacuum, hydraulics and with a grid system:
Hydraulic vices: The vices with a length of 1327 mm and 130 mm width provide a maximum clamping force of 38 kN. The clamping range can be set stepless using spindle and grid. The compact design can be cleaned easily due to the integrated hydraulic supplies. The hydraulic interface is realised using quick-connectorcouplings in magnet and vices. After positioning with ballbolts the vices are clamped magnetically.
Magnetic chuck: The total chuck in size of 2,800 x 1,030 mm consists of 5 magnets which can be controlled individually. The neodymium-high energy magnetic system provides a strong magnetig field over the entire width and with a high force depth suitable for milling. The electro-permanent principle allows for highest precision without heat related growth. Milling of uneven parts can be assured by using fixed and flexible pole extensions as top tooling.
Combined application with hydraulic and magnetic clamping using pole extension
Vacuum system: To be able to clamp also non-magnetic parts, the magnetic pole plate has a vacuum field integrated with a grid of 80 mm. Unused vacuum channels can be individually closed. In the last of the connected chucks a differential pressure switch will give machine release on sufficient vacuum pressure. The supply lines inside the chucks also provide additional vacuum capacity.
Ordering example: Ordering key: 44 Chapter 3
Grid system: The grid system allows for free positioning on tapped holes over the entire length of 2,800 mm with an accuracy of 0.02 mm.
Applications of Electro-Permanent Magnetic Chucks

With magnetic, hydraulic, mechanical and vacuum workholding
Milling operation on non-magnetic Aluminium-parts on hydraulic vices.

Display hydraulic pressure in Bar and holding force in kN Range setting for hydraulics
Milling machine with control panel
Holding force selector
10 step holding force selector switch for hydraulics Indicators for selected magnets Release for selected Hydraulic ranges Indicator choosen Chuck for hydraulics Presetting
Machine release
Vacuum display in %
Clamping type selector switch
Clamping control: With the conveniently arranged clamping control panel the 4 different clamping principles can be selected. A supervisory SPS releases the machine with clamped magnet, vacuum system or vices.
We manufacture magnets combined with other clamping principles on customer specification in any required size. For further questions, please do not hesitate to contact us. We are happy to give you our technical support.
Detailed view on grid clamping
Hydraulic vice
Chapter 3
45
Electro-Permanent Magnetic Chuck

With continuous transverse pole arrangement P = 13, 18 and 25 mm This range of magnetic chucks belongs to the new generation of electro-permanent magnetic chucks and is notable for its very robust, homogeneous design and its precision. The magnetic force is produced by permanent magnets that are magnetized and demagnetized by short electric current pulses. This chuck is particularly notable for its high power and longlife. The pole pitch gives real N and S-poles.
SAV 243.70
Use: For universal clamping of precision workpieces.
- for workpiece positioning cross to pole pitch - for workpiece with min. thickness = x 4.5 mm at P = 13 mm 6.0 mm at P = 18 mm 8.5 mm at P = 25 mm
Nominal holding force: 90 N/cm2, at pole pitch P = 13 mm 110 N/cm2, at pole pitch P = 18 mm 115 N/cm2, at pole pitch P = 25 mm adjustable with control unit with encoded switch Nominal operating voltage: 210 V DC up to size A x B = 600 x 400 360 V DC above size A x B = 450 x 175 Ordering example: Ordering key: 46 Chapter 3
- for flat workpieces with min. dimensions = a: 25 mm x 25 mm at P = 13 mm 32 mm x 32 mm at P = 18 mm 45 mm x 45 mm at P = 25 mm
Features: - solid contructed pole plate with either 13 mm, 18 mm or 25 mm transverse pole pitch - real magnetic (N/S) poles - switching off through demagnetizing cycle - heat treated tension free body - electro-permanent system, guaranteeing safe operation during power failure - air pressure release system on request for P = 18 or 25 mm - gap free construction of pole plate - fine grid pole plate to body connection - extra enhanced systems available on request - pole plate wearing limit 8 mm - pole plate exchangeable - mounting slots in both short faces - through holes for mounting in sizes over 1000 mm length on specification - robust and waterproof - sealed to IP 65 - for use with control unit type SAV 876.03 / SAV 876.10 (see chapter 04) Auxiliary equipment: - side stop rail on short and long face - connecting cable, 3 m, on the right-hand, short face - lifting bolts on larger models
90

With continuous transverse pole arrangement P = 13, 18 and 25 mm
SAV 243.70
D Other sizes and operating voltages available on request. Larger clamping surfaces can be made by flush mounting several units. Please refer to SAV 876.10 to SAV 876.03, for details regarding suitable control units, based on max. current or control voltage (see Chapter 04). P
Dimensions in mm
B C
0 -1
D P
Weight in kg
Chuck voltage in V
Control unit max. current in A
Suitable control unit
Dimensions in mm
B C
0 -1
Weight in kg
Chuck voltage in V
200 100 80 120 13 11.0 300 100 80 224 13 17.0 300 150 80 224 13 25.0 400 150 80 328 13 34.0
210 210 210 210
30 / 16 30 / 16 30 / 16 30 / 16 30 / 16 30 / 16 30 / 16 30 / 16 30 / 16 30 / 16 30 / 16 30 / 16 30 30 30 30 30 30 30
876.10 / 876.03 876.10 / 876.03 876.10 / 876.03 876.10 / 876.03 876.10 / 876.03 876.10 / 876.03 876.10 / 876.03 876.10 / 876.03 876.10 / 876.03 876.10 / 876.03 876.10 / 876.03 876.10 / 876.03 876.10 876.10 876.10 876.10 876.10 876.10 876.10
600 400 80 525 18 145.0 210 / 360 700 400 80 697 18 169.0 800 400 80 741 18 193.0 1000 400 80 921 18 240.0 1200 400 90 1101 18 289.0 800 500 80 730 25 241.0 1000 500 80 930 25 301.0 1200 500 90 1130 25 361.0 1250 500 90 1180 25 376.0 1500 500 90 1430 25 450.0 1600 500 90 1530 25 480.0 2000 500 90 1930 25 602.0 1000 600 80 930 25 361.0 1200 600 90 1130 25 433.0 1250 600 90 1180 25 451.0 1500 600 90 1430 25 542.0 1600 600 90 1530 25 578.0 2000 600 90 1930 25 722.0 1500 800 90 1430 25 723.0 1600 800 90 1530 25 771.0 2000 800 90 1930 25 963.0 360 360 360 360 360 360 360 360 360 360 360 360 360 360 360 360 360 360 360 360
30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 60 60 30 30 30 30 60 60 60 60 60
876.10 876.10 876.10 876.10 876.10 876.10 876.10 876.10 876.10 876.10 876.10 876.10 876.10 876.10 876.10 876.10 876.10 876.10 876.10 876.10 876.10
450 175 80 381 18 44.0 210 / 360 400 200 80 309 18 45.0 210 / 360 500 200 80 417 18 56.0 210 / 360 600 200 80 525 18 67.0 210 / 360 800 200 80 741 18 90.0 210 / 360 500 250 80 417 18 70.0 210 / 360 600 250 80 525 18 84.0 210 / 360 800 250 80 741 18 112.0 210 / 360 500 300 80 417 18 90.0 210 / 360 600 300 80 525 18 108.0 210 / 360 800 300 80 741 18 145.0 210 / 360 1000 300 80 921 18 180.0 210 / 360 600 350 80 525 18 126.0 210 / 360 800 350 80 741 18 168.0 210 / 360 1000 350 80 921 18 210.0 210 / 360
Ordering example: Electro-Permanent Magnetic Chuck SAV 243.70 - 2000 x 800 - 25 - 360 V Ordering key: Name SAV - No. - A x B - P - Operating voltage SAV Workholding and Automation www.sav-workholding.com Chapter 3 47

With fine longitudinal pole pitch P = 4 mm Electro-permanent magnetic system with very small pole pitch. The magnetic force is produced by permanent magnets that are magnetized and demagnetized by short electric current pulses. This chuck is particularly notable for its high power, robust construction and long-life. Especially suitable for thin parts; workpieces cross to length of chuck.
SAV 243.71
Use: For clamping of thin and flat high precision workpieces. - for workpiece positioning cross to pole pitch
90
- high precision due to fine grid poleplate to body connection - switching off through demagnetizing cycle - pole plate wearing limit 8 mm - low magnetic field height
- for thin workpieces of min. 2 mm thick - for flat workpieces with min. dimensions of 40 mm x 40 mm Nominal holding force: 100 N/cm2, adjustable with control unit with encoded switch Nominal operating voltage: 210 V DC up to size A x B = 600 x 250 360 V DC above size A x B = 600 x 250 Features: - pole plate with very small longitudinal pole pitch of 3 mm steel and 1 mm brass - glued lamination with additional pull anchors in length direction of chuck - gap free construction of pole plate 40
- heat treated tension-free body - electro-permanent system, guaranteeing safe operation during power failure - mounting slots in both short faces - extra enhanced systems available on request - through holes for mounting in sizes over 1000 mm length on specification - robust and waterproof - sealed to IP 65 - for use with control unit type SAV 876.03-SF0-EP up to size A x B= 400 x 150 / SAV 876.10 above size A x B= 400 x 150 (see chapter 04) Auxiliary equipment: - side stop rail on short and long face - connecting cable, 3 m, on the right-hand, short face - with industrial watertight plug-in type connector on request - lifting bolts on larger models
48
Chapter 3

With fine longitudinal pole pitch P = 4 mm
SAV 243.71
Other sizes and operating voltages available on request. Larger clamping surfaces can be made by flush mounting several units. Please refer to SAV 876.10 to SAV 876.03, for details regarding suitable control units, based on max. current or control voltage (see Chapter 04). 1
B D
Dimensions in mm
A 200 300 300 400 450 400 500 600 800 500 600 800 500 600 800 1000 600 800 1000 600 700 800 1000 1200 800 1000 1200
B 100 100 150 150 175 200 200 200 200 250 250 250 300 300 300 300 350 350 350 400 400 400 400 400 500 500 500
0 C -1 77 77
D 53 53 101 101 125 149 149 149 149
Weight in kg
Chuck voltage in V
12.0 18.0 26.0 34.0
210 210 210 210
30 / 16 876.10 / 876.03 30 / 16 876.10 / 876.03 30 / 16 876.10 / 876.03 30 / 16 876.10 / 876.03
77 77 77 77 77 77 77 77 77 77 77 77 77 77 77 77 77 77 77 77 77 87 77 77 87
44.0 210 / 360 30 / 16 876.10 / 876.03 45.0 56.0 67.0 90.0 210 / 360 30 / 16 876.10 / 876.03 210 / 360 30 / 16 876.10 / 876.03 210 / 360 30 876.10 210 / 360 30 876.10 30 30 30 30 30 60 60 30 60 60 30 30 30 60 60 60 60 60 876.10 876.10 876.10 876.10 876.10 876.10 876.10 876.10 876.10 876.10 876.10 876.10 876.10 876.10 876.10 876.10 876.10 876.10
197 70.0 210 / 360 197 84.0 210 / 360 197 112.0 360 253 86.0 253 103.0 253 137.0 253 172.0 301 120.0 301 160.0 301 200.0 349 349 349 349 349 137.0 160.0 183.0 229.0 275.0 360 360 360 360 360 360 360 360 360 360 360 360 360 360 360
453 229.0 453 286.0 453 344.0
Ordering example: Electro-Permanent Magnetic Chuck SAV 243.71 - 1200 x 500 - 360 V Ordering key: Name SAV - No. - A x B - Operating voltage SAV Workholding and Automation www.sav-workholding.com Chapter 3 49

With fine longitudinal pole pitch P = 4 mm and magnetizable stop rails This newly developed clamping system with magnetic stop rails provides a simple, reliable and secure method for positioning and clamping workpieces for machining. This helps to avoid positioning errors, particularly when used in multi-shift operation. The magnetic force is produced by permanent magnets that are magnetized and demagnetized by short electric current pulses. Especially suitable for thin parts. Use: Best suited for precision grinding of mass production components. For toolmaking, the system facilitates m-precise machining with respect to the datum edge. Also for light milling. - control of magnetizable side stops can be operated in time sequence - for thin workpieces of up to 12 mm thick. (depends on heigth of stoppers) - for flat workpieces with min. dimensions 40 mm x 40 mm. Nominal holding force: 100 N/cm2, adjustable with control unit with encoded switch Nominal operating voltage: 360 V DC Standard equipment: - 1 or 2 magnetizable stop rails - connecting cable, 3 m, on the right-hand, short face - with industrial watertight plug-in type connector on request - lifting bolts on larger models Features: - 2 strong bipolar magnets for the stop rails and 2 longitudinal pole magnets to provide accurate and secure alignment of the workpieces - the magnetization of the stop rails takes place prior to that of the main clamping surface, using a special control routine. The workpiece is thus pulled firmly into the lower edge of the stop rail. 12
SAV 243.72
40
- especially fine, uninterrupted longitudinal pole arrangement - glued lamination with additional pull anchors in length direction of chuck - gap free construction of pole plate - high precision due to fine grid pole plate to body connection - switching off through demagnetizing cycle - pole plate wearing limit 8 mm - low magnetic field height - heat treated tension free body - electro-permanent system, guaranteeing safe operation during power failure - mounting slots in both short faces - extra enhanced systems available on request - robust and waterproof - sealed to IP 65 - for use with control unit type SAV 876.10 (see chapter 04)
50
Chapter 3

With fine longitudinal pole pitch P = 4 mm and magnetizable stop rails
SAV 243.72
The magnetizing cycle starts with magnetizing just the stop rails. The workpiece is thus pulled with a force FA, at an angle of 45, into the corner between the stop rail and the chuck surface. Approximately 1 second later, the main chuck surface is switched on to generate the main clamping force FH.
FH
FH
FA
FA
1
Dimensions in mm
A 400 500 600 400 500 600 600 800
B 200 200 200 300 300 300 400 400
0 C -1 77 77 77
D* 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12
Number of Weight Control unit Suitable stop rails in kg max.current control unit in A
1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2
45.0 56.0 67.0 68.0 86.0 103.0 137.0 183.0
30 x 2 30 x 2 30 x 2 30 x 2 30 x 2 30 x 2 30 x 2 30 x 2
876.10 876.10 876.10 876.10 876.10 876.10 876.10 876.10
77 77 77 77 77
*Other heights on request. The table gives a summary of the standard sizes available. Custom-made versions are available on request. Please refer to SAV 876.10 for control unit details. Ordering example: Electro-Permanent Magnetic Chuck SAV 243.72 - 800 x 400 - 360 V Ordering key: Name SAV - No. - A x B - Operating voltage SAV Workholding and Automation www.sav-workholding.com Chapter 3 51

With fine transverse pole pitch P = 4 mm Electro-permanent magnetic system with very small pole pitch. The magnetic force is produced by permanent magnets that are magnetized and demagnetized by short electric current pulses. Especially suitable for thin parts; workpiece positioning in length direction of chuck.
SAV 243.73
Use: For clamping of thin and flat high precision workpieces.
- for workpiece positioning cross to pole pitch 2
- for thin workpieces of min. 2 mm thick.
Nominal holding force: 100 N/cm2, adjustable with control unit with encoded switch
40
- for flat workpieces with min. dimensions of 40 mm x 40 mm.
Features: - pole plate with very small longitudinal pole pitch of 3 mm steel and 1 mm brass - glued lamination with additional pull anchors in length direction of chuck - gap free construction of pole plate - high precision due to fine grid pole plate to body connection - switching off through demagnetizing cycle - pole plate wearing limit 8 mm - low magnetic field height - heat treated tension free body - electro-permanent system, guaranteeing safe operation during power failure - mounting slots in both short faces - extra enhanced systems available on request - through holes for mounting in sizes over 1000 mm length on specification - robust and waterproof - sealed to IP 65 - for use with control unit type SAV 876.03-SF0-EP up to size A x B = 600 x 300 SAV 876.10 above size A x B = 600 x 300 (see chapter 04) Auxiliary equipment: - side stop rail on short and long face - connecting cable, 3 m, on the right-hand, short face - with industrial watertight plug-in type connector on request - lifting bolts on larger models
Nominal operating voltage: 210 V DC up to size A x B = 600 x 250 360 V DC above size A x B = 600 x 250
90
52
Chapter 3

With fine transverse pole pitch P = 4 mm
SAV 243.73
A D
1 3
Dimensions in mm Weight in kg Chuck voltage in V Control unit max. current in A Suitable control unit
A 450 400 500 600 800 500 600 800 500 600 800 1000 600 800 1000 600 700 800 1000 1200 800 1000 1200
B 175 200 200 200 200 250 250 250 300 300 300 300 350 350 350 400 400 400 400 400 500 500 500
C 77 77 77 77 77 77 77 77 77 77 77 77 77 77 77 77 77 77 77 87 77 77 87
0 -1
D 397 349 453 549 749
44.0 45.0 56.0 67.0 90.0
210 / 360 210 / 360 210 / 360 210 / 360 360 210 / 360 210 / 360 360 210 / 360 210 / 360 360 360 360 360 360 360 360 360 360 360 360 360 360
30 / 16 876.10 / 876.03 30 / 16 876.10 / 876.03 30 / 16 876.10 / 876.03 30 876.10 30 876.10 30 30 30 30 30 30 60 30 30 60 30 30 30 60 60 30 60 60 876.10 876.10 876.10 876.10 876.10 876.10 876.10 876.10 876.10 876.10 876.10 876.10 876.10 876.10 876.10 876.10 876.10 876.10
453 70.0 549 84.0 749 112.0 453 90.0 549 108.0 749 145.0 949 180.0 549 126.0 749 168.0 949 210.0 549 653 749 949 1149 145.0 169.0 193.0 240.0 289.0
749 241.0 949 300.0 1149 361.0
Other sizes and operating voltages available on request. Larger clamping surfaces can be made by flush mounting several units. Please refer to SAV 876.10 to SAV 876.03, for details regarding suitable control units, based on max. current or control voltage (see Chapter 04). Ordering example: Electro-Permanent Magnetic Chuck SAV 243.73 - 1200 x 500 - 360 V Ordering key: Name SAV - No. - A x B - Operating voltage SAV Workholding and Automation www.sav-workholding.com Chapter 3 53

With modular pole arrangement for milling This clamping system with neodymium-ironboron magnets was developed in accordance with the most modern standards in magnet technology. Exceptionally high holding forces arise through the use of AlNiCo / Neodymium magnets in an electro-permanent magnetic configuration. Magnetization and demagnetization are achieved through short electric current pulses.
SAV 243.74
special fixed pole raisers on request
Use: For milling applications with coarse chip removal. Ideal for use on indexing pallet systems - for heavy duty milling 15
- for workpieces of min. 15 mm thick
- for workpieces with min. dimensions of 140 mm x 105 mm
Nominal holding force: 16.5 kN per module
105
140
Features: - optimized high energy magnetic system - holding forces in physically maximum range - modular pole arrangement 140 mm x 105 mm for universal use - cost efficient system, magnetically optimized - total chuck surface active, no "dead" zones - solid mono-block construction - real magnetic (N/S) poles - electro-permanent system, guaranteeing safe operation during power failure - pole separation with brass for optimal wear behaviour - pole plate wearing limit 8 mm - mounting slots in both short faces - through holes in sizes over 1000 mm length on specification - robust and waterproof - sealed to IP 65 - for use with control unit type SAV 876.10 (see chapter 04) Auxiliary equipment: - connecting cable, 3 m, on the right-hand, short face - with industrial watertight plug-in type connector on request - lifting bolts on larger models
Nominal operating voltage: 360 V DC
54
Chapter 3

With modular pole arrangement for milling
SAV 243.74
A 140 105 B
Dimensions in mm
A 560 560 840 1120 1680 1050 840 1120 1400 1680 1960 1400
B 315 420 420 420 420 560 630 630 630 630 630 840
0 C -1 80
Number of Weight in kg modules
12 16 24 32 48 40 36 48 60 72 84 80
107.0 140.0 209.0 280.0 420.0 348.0 316.0 417.0 520.0 620.0 729.0 693.0
30 60 60 60 x 2 60 x 2 60 x 2 60 x 2 60 x 2 60 x 3 60 x 3 60 x 4 60 x 4
876.10 876.10 876.10 876.10 876.10 876.10 876.10 876.10 876.10 876.10 876.10 876.10
80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80
Other sizes available on request. Larger clamping surfaces can be created by using two or more chucks adjacently. Please refer to SAV 876.10, for details regarding suitable control units, based on the power rating (see Chapter 04).
Ordering example: Electro-Permanent Magnetic Chuck Ordering key: Name SAV Workholding and Automation
SAV 243.74 - 1400 x 840 - 360 V SAV - No. - A x B - Operating voltage Chapter 3 55

With transverse pole arrangement, suitable for milling work Pole pitch P = 27.5, 55 and 85 mm This clamping system with neodymium-iron-boron magnets was developed in accordance with the most modern standards in magnet technology. Exceptionally high holding forces arise through the use of AlNiCo/ Neodymium magnets in an electro-permanent magnetic configuration. Magnetization and demagnetization are achieved through short electric current pulses.
SAV 243.77
special edition with total transversal pole-pitch and pole-beams
Use: For heavy milling work with coarse chip removal. Ideal for use on indexing palette systems - for workpiece with min. thickness = x: 8.0 mm at P = 27.5 mm 20.0 mm at P = 55.0 mm 35.0 mm at P = 85.0 mm - for flat workpieces with min. dimensions a: 45 x 45 mm2 at P = 27.5 mm 95 x 95 mm2 at P = 55.0 mm 150 x 150 mm2 at P = 85.0 mm Nominal holding force: 195 N/cm2 on full induceable steel load 110 N/cm2 at P = 27.5 mm 150 N/cm2 at P = 55.0 mm 170 N/cm2 at P = 85.0 mm adjustable with control unit with encoded switch Nominal operating voltage: 360 V DC x
Features: - optimized high energy magnetic system - holding forces in physically maximum range - due to transverse pole arrangement high flux concentration to the workpiece - due to deep magnetic field bigger air gaps can be bridged - total chuck surface active, no "dead" zones - solid mono-block construction - real magnetic (N/S) poles - electro-permanent system, guaranteeing safe operation during power failure - pole separation with brass for optimal wear behaviour - pole plate wearing limit 8 mm - tapped holes grid for fixed or flexible pole raisers on request (M) - T-slots possible on pole pitch P = 85 mm according DIN 650-10H10 (T) - mounting slots in both short faces - through holes for mounting in sizes over 1000 mm length on specification - robust and waterproof - sealed to IP 65 - for use with control unit type SAV 876.10 (see chapter 04) Auxiliary equipment: - connecting cable, 3 m, on the right-hand, short face - with industrial watertight plug-in type connector on request - lifting bolts on larger models
56
Chapter 3

Suitable for milling work
SAV 243.77-27.5
SAV 243.77 - 27.5
Small transverse pole arrangement

M8
(option M)
Use: Heavy milling of thin plates - min. thickness of workpiece: 5 - 8 mm - min. size of workpiece: 45 x 45 mm2 - nominal holding force: 110 N/cm2
A P
Dimensions in mm
A 410 520 630 520 630 800 630 800 1015 800 1015 1180
B 200 200 200 300 300 300 400 400 400 500 500 500
0 C -1 80 80 80
D 100 100 100 100 100 100 150 150 150 200 200 200
P 27.5 27.5 27.5 27.5 27.5 27.5 27.5 27.5 27.5 27.5 27.5 27.5
Optional number of threads per pole (M)
Number of poles (M)
Number of threads total (M)
Weight in kg
2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
15 19 23 19 23 29 23 29 37 29 37 43
30 38 46 57 69 87 69 87 111 87 111 129
46.0 58.0 71.0 87.0 107.0 135.0 143.0 180.0 228.0 225.0 285.0 331.0
30 30 30 60 60 60 60 x 2 60 x 2 60 x 2 60 x 2 60 x 2 60 x 3
876.10 876.10 876.10 876.10 876.10 876.10 876.10 876.10 876.10 876.10 876.10 876.10
80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80
Ordering example: Electro-Permanent Magnetic Chuck SAV 243.77 - 1180 x 500 - 27.5 - 360 V Ordering key: Name SAV - No. - A x B - P - Chuck voltage SAV Workholding and Automation www.sav-workholding.com Chapter 3 57

SAV 243.77-55
SAV 243.77 - 55
Middle transverse pole arrangement
Use: For universal maching and heavy milling. - min. thickness of workpiece: 20 mm - min. size of workpiece: 95 x 95 mm2 - nominal holding force: 150 N/cm2
M8
(option M)
A P
Dimensions in mm
A 480 590 810 1030 1140 810 1030 1140 1580 2020 1030 1140 1580 2020
B 300 300 300 300 300 400 400 400 400 400 500 500 500 500
0 C -1 97 97 97 97 97
D 60 60 60 60 60 80 80 80 80 80 70 70 70 70
P 55 55 55 55 55 55 55 55 55 55 55 55 55 55
Optional number of threads per pole (M)
Number of poles (M)
Number of threads total (M)
Weight in kg
4 4 4 4 4 5 5 5 5 5 7 7 7 7
9 11 15 19 23 15 19 23 29 37 19 23 29 37
36 44 60 76 92 75 95 115 145 185 133 161 203 259
94.0 116.0 159.0 202.0 224.0 212.0 270.0 299.0 414.0 529.0 337.0 373.0 517.0 661.0
30 30 30 30 30 x 2 30 60 60 60 60 x 2 60 60 60 x 2 60 x 2
876.10 876.10 876.10 876.10 876.10 876.10 876.10 876.10 876.10 876.10 876.10 876.10 876.10 876.10
97 97 97 97 97 97 97 97 97
Ordering example: Electro-Permanent Magnetic Chuck SAV 243.77 - 1580 x 500 - 55 - 360 V Ordering key: Name SAV - No. - A x B - P - Chuck voltage 58 Chapter 3 Technical data subject to change without prior notice

SAV 243.77-85
SAV 243.77 - 85
Large transverse pole arrangement
M8 10H10
(option T)
Use: For heavy milling of large and thick workpieces. For large air gaps. - min. thickness of workpiece: 35 mm - min. size of workpiece: 150 x 150 mm2 - nominal holding force: 170 N/cm2
(option M)
A P
Dimensions in mm
A 580 750 750 1090 1430 1600 750 1090 1430 1600 1090 1430 1600
B 300 300 400 400 400 400 500 500 500 500 600 600 600
0 C -1 110 110
D 90 90 90 90 90 90 90 90 90 90 90 90 90
P 85 85 85 85 85 85 85 85 85 85 85 85 85
Optional number of Number of poles Number of threads threads per pole (M) (M) / T-slots (T) total (M)
Weight in kg
3 3 4 4 4 4 5 5 5 5 6 6 6
7 9 9 13 17 19 9 13 17 19 13 17 19
21 27 36 52 68 76 45 65 85 95 78 102 114
129.0 167.0 203.0 294.0 386.0 432.0 278.0 405.0 531.0 594.0 486.0 637.0 713.0
30 30 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 x 2 60 60 x 2 60 x 2
876.10 876.10 876.10 876.10 876.10 876.10 876.10 876.10 876.10 876.10 876.10 876.10 876.10
100 100 100 100 110 110 110 110 110 110 110
Ordering example: Electro-Permanent Magnetic Chuck SAV 243.77 - 1600 x 600 - 85 - 360 V Ordering key: Name SAV - No. - A x B - P - Chuck voltage SAV Workholding and Automation www.sav-workholding.com Chapter 3 59
Rail milling fixture, 12 m, hydraulic centering, magnetic changeable pole plates
60
Chapter 3

Special execution for milling of rails. This clamping system with neodymium-ironboron magnets was designed specifically to clamp rail sections for milling operations. This multiple section system is used in such a way that in the first stage the side support is activated after which the main magnetic base is activated, thus ensuring optimal alignment and support of the rail section. Use: For heavy milling work with coarse chip removal. Milling of rails according to customers requirements. Nominal holding force: 195 N/cm2, on full induceable steel load Nominal operating voltage: 360 V DC
SAV 243.77 RAIL
Features: - optimized high energy magnetic system - holding forces in physically maximum range - due to deep magnetic field bigger air gaps can be bridged - solid mono-block construction - real magnetic (N/S) poles - electro-permanent-magnetic system, guaranteeing safe operation during power failure - robust and waterproof - sealed to IP 65 - for use with control unit type SAV 876.10 (see chapter 04) Standard equipment: - connecting cable - with industrial watertight plug-in type connector on request
FA
FH
- FA is for alignment of rail. This is done normally with a transvers-pole pitch of 120 mm. This magnet creates a deep magnetic field to handle large air gaps. - FH is generated in the second step to provide the main force at the base of rail.
Ordering example: Electro-Permanent Magnetic Chuck SAV 243.77 - 1960 x 315 - 360 V - Rail Ordering key: Name SAV - No. - Length x Width - Operating voltage SAV Workholding and Automation www.sav-workholding.com Chapter 3 61

With hexagonal poles for milling Developed especially for universal use on milling machines. Double, enhanced magnetic system for extreme high holding forces at low magnetic field height. Use: For heavy milling operation with high chip removal. Ideal for use on pallet changing systems. - for milling operations, high chip removal - for workpieces min. 16 mm thick - for workpieces with min. dimensions of 100 x 100 mm Execution: - optimized high energy magnetic system - low design - holding forces in physically possible maximum - multidimensional flux lines - low stray losses high efficiency - equally spread holding forces - hexagonal pole configuration allows a universal application - the magnetic system with high intensity also bridges bigger air gaps - total chuck surface active, no dead zones - low magnetic field height - electro-permanent magnetic system for absolute safe operation during power failure - pole separation with brass for optimal wear behaviour - tapped holes M8 for optional pole raisers - pole surface wearing limit 8 mm - clamping edges on both longitudinal sides - robust und waterproof - sealed to IP 65 - for use with control unit type SAV 876.10 Nominal operating voltage: - 360 V DC - Control unit 400 V AC Nominal holding force: - 150 N/cm - 450 daN per pole - adjustable with control unit with encoded switch Application:
SAV 243.79
For heavy milling with high feed. Ideal for application on pallet exchange systems.
- for work pieces with

min. thickness of X = 16 mm
- for flat work pieces with

min. a = 100 x 100 mm2 a
Scope of supply: - connecting cable, 3 m, on right-hand short side, back - clamps - on request available with industrial watertight plug-in type connector - lifting bolts on larger models.
62
Chapter 3

With hexagonal poles for milling
SAV 243.79
Accessory pole raisers:
full pole raiser

SAV 248.70-55PVS-RV
half pole raiser

SAV 248.70-55PVS-RH
flexible pole raiser

SAV 248.70-60PVF-RV
A
Dimension in mm
A 360 500 630 770
B 250 350 450 500
0 C -1 68 68 68 68
Number of poles
Chuck voltage in V
Weight in kg
Control unit max. imp. current in A
12 30 48 56
360 360 360 360
45 88 143 194
30 60 60 60 x 2
876.10 876.10 876.10 876.10
Ordering example: Electro-Permanent Magnetic Chuck SAV 243.79 - 770 x 500 - 360 V Ordering key: Name SAV - No. - A x B - Chuck voltage Ordering example: Full pole-raiser Ordering key: Name SAV Workholding and Automation SAV 248.70 - 55-PVS-RV SAV - No. - Execution www.sav-workholding.com Chapter 3 63
Pole Raisers fixed and flexible

To accommodate workpiece geometry and allow 5-side machining Use: As a raised support for workpieces on a magnetic chuck. Only useable on magnetic chucks SAV 243.77-55 and SAV 243.77-85. Features: Made of cold-drawn steel, the pole raisers can be machined to any shape. The table shows an extract from our standard range. Can be supplied with specific machined dimensions, prepared for costumers workpiece dimension. Restoring force per pole raiser about 10 N. Custom designs available on request. C
SAV 248.70
stroke 5 mm
8,5
8,5
Type
PVS 3 PVS 4 PVF 3 PVF 4
A 48 70 48 70
B 40 70 40 70
C 53.5 86.5 56.0 89.0
0.8 3.3 0.8 3.5
A Type PVS 3 and PVS 4: Rigid, for fixed support.
A Type PVF 3 and PVF 4: Mechanically flexible, for light components.
Ordering example: Pole Raisers SAV 248.70 - 70 - PVS 3 Ordering key: Name SAV - No. - A - Type
Application of Pole Raisers

Advantages for use: - 5-side-access possible - free space for tools and through holes - reduction of air-gaps - even manufacturing of bended blanks - mechanical stopper or negative pattern of workpiece for increased shearing forces and easy set up workpiece flexible pole raisers fixed pole raisers
Flexible Pole Raisers Spring loaded in axial direction. For clamping of rugged workpieces with bended shapes. Suitable for reaching evenness in a first set up. workpiece Directions for use: - magnetic short cuts between N- and S-pole are to be avoided - pole raisers shall not cross the pole gaps (brass) - holding force increases with the number of pole raisers (contact surface) - to select the number of pole raisers, the restoring force of flexible pole raisers shall be less than the weight of workpiece Ordering example: Ordering key: 64 Chapter 3 fixed pole raisers
Fixed Pole Raisers Profiled shapes possible. Workpiece is pulled down by magnetic forces. Suitable for reaching high parallelity.
Dimensions in mm
Weight in kg
Product Application for Pole raisers

For turning and milling operations Pole raisers for face milling: - Tool steel - Dimensions 400 x 400 x 80 mm Tool: - Tipped face mill - Diameter D = 150 mm Cutting parameters - Number of cuts 6 x 150 mm - Speed n = 450 1/min - Feed f = 540 mm/min Machine- and cutting power - Machine power P = 23 kW - Cutting rate Q = 486 cm3/min
Pole raisers for contour milling Obective is to reduce the air-gap at uneven workpieces and to prevent deformation of workpiece. Workpiece - Tool steel - Dimensions 1000 x 1000 x 200 mm Tool - Tipped face mill - Diameter D = 315 mm Cutting parameters - Number of cuts 6 x 300 mm - Speed n = 130 1/min - Feed f = 390 mm/min Machine- and cutting power - Machine power P = 22,6 kW - Cutting rate Q = 702 cm3/min Pole raisers for the welding chamfer preparation Workpiece - Low carbon steel - Dimensions Tool - End mill - Diameter Cutting parameters - Number of cuts - Speed - Feed
2000 x 800 x 15 mm
D = 30 mm 12 x 15 mm cutting depth n = 2000 min-1 f = 1200 mm/min
Machine- and cutting power - Machine power P = 8.7 kW - Cutting rate Q = 216 cm3/min Pole raisers for turning applications Hard turning of thin roller bearings on 3 sides with fixed and flexibel pole raisers. The pole raisers for circular magnets must the adjusted individually. We design and produce pole raisers for special applications on request. Please inform us of your application in order to give a good solution for your clamping needs.
Chapter 3
65
Hard Turning Applications

Advice and application examples
Electro-permanent magnetic chucks:

Electro-permanent magnetic chucks combine the advantages of the reliablility and minimum maintenance needs with ease of operation and automation comfort. The magnetizing of the system is realized through a short current impulse. From that moment a permanent magnetic holding force is available. The electric supply can be removed during operation, which does not only give handling advantages (especially in use as changing pallet), but also a high safety standard can be guaranteed. Special developed electro-permanent magnetic systems allow for an uncomplicated use of Neodymium magnets for the design of very strong systems, which mark the present state of magnetic technology. For activation of the electro-permanent magnets, electronic polarity reversing control units are available, which do not only used for current supply, but also for demagnetizing of workpiece and pole plate. By magnetizing through current impulse no heat is generated so that no deformation of the pole plate takes place. Thereby the highest demands in terms of dimensional, form and surface tolerances can be accomplished. Under certain circumstances, the pole plate of the magnetic chucks can give a (functional dependant) deformation of some m due to the holding force. We therefore advice that the surface of the pole plate will be slightly turned-off or ground in switched-on position. To guarantee the maximum available holding forces one should, in all circumstances, take the maximum consumption of the top plate into account. The indicated holding forces per workpiece surface are based on a test workpiece made from St 37 (mild steel), 100 x 100 x 40 mm (l x w x h) with ground surfaces. Further influences on the holding forces can be derived from the applicable chapters and the detailed technical information in chapter 15.
Hard turning on electro-permanent circular magnet Studies performed on hard turning of roller bearings resulted in excellent results with the use of SAV magnetic workholding technology. In the picture a similar circular magnetic chuck with large diameter is shown. The clamping was made on fixed pole raisers, so that one face, as well as inner- and outer diameter can be machined in one set-up. Conventional clamping tools only allow for the machining of only 2 sides. The surface conditions, dimensional and form tolerances of competitive workholding solutions such as radial mandrel, axial clamping chuck and pendle-jaw chucks could be reduced and reproduced significantly with the use of magnetic clamping technology. See table on right. Despite the unfavourable roller bearing material (100CrMo73 with 15% rest-austenite), at virtually static load a magnetic holding forces of 6 kN could be realized. The magnetic chuck could withstand the process parameters, ap = 25 mm cutting depth and f = 0.8 mm/turn feed, without problems (passive force approx. 1 kN). Circular magnetic chuck with electro-permanent magnetic switchable, enhanced system: SAV 244.71. Test results
Form- resp. surface quality Arith. Middle roughness Circular form difference Cylindrical form failure Wall thickness variation Reproducable quality magnetic chuck Potential improvement *
0,3 m 0,5 m 10 m 25 m
0 % to 25 % 75 % to 90 % 80 % to 85 % 60 % to 80 %
* potential improvement of reproducable qualities with use the electro-permanent magnetic chuck SAV 244.71 in comparison with conventional methods, such as radial mandrel, axial clamping chuck and pendle-jaw chucks, under the described conditions.
66
Chapter 3
Electro-Permanent Magnetic Circular Chuck for grinding of bearing rings, diameter 2800 mm
Electro-Permanent Magnetic Circular Chuck for hard-turning, diameter 1200 mm
Electro-Permanent Magnetic Circular Chuck for hard-turning, including mechanical centering system
More application examples on page 78
Chapter 3
67
Electro-Permanent Magnetic Circular Chuck

With radial pole arrangement These circular electro magnets are not able for their very strong, evenly distributed holding force. The magnetic force is produced by permanent magnets which are magnetized and demagnetized by short electric current pulses.
SAV 244.70
Use: Mainly for precision grinding of small to large workpieces on rotary tables and circular grinders.
- equal pole pitch within circle range; therefore very suitable for circular workpieces 0.35 x P
- the minimum workpiece height; 35% of the pole pitch at the given circle segment
di do
<0.9
Nominal holding force: 120 N/cm2, adjustable by control unit. Nominal operating voltage: 210 V DC up to 250 mm diameter 360 V DC above 250 mm diameter
68
Chapter 3
- for circular grinding and turning
Features: - solid designed pole plate - switching off through demagnetizing cycle - electro-permanent magnetic system, guaranteeing safe operation during power failure - high precision due to fine grid pole-plate-to-body connection - pole separation with brass in-lays for optimal wear behaviour - pole plate exchangeable - radial pole arrangement, especially suitable for the use of pole raisers. This is absolutely essential for the runout of the tool or the grinding wheel at three side operation. Therefore available with T-slots (T) according DIN 650-10H10 on request. - pole plate wearing limit 8mm - sealed to IP 65 - suitable for use with control unit type 876.10 (see chapter 04) - available with adapter flange on request (SAV 248.90 to 248.94, see chapter 06) Scope of supply: - Lifting bolts for transportation on larger models. - T-slots and pole extensions not included as standard. - Terminals for electrical connection in middle of back side in standard execution. - Optional with integrated slip ring body for the bigger diameters. - with industrial watertight plug-in type connector on request

With radial pole arrangement
SAV 244.70
G F I
CH7
Dimensions in mm
A 100 150 200 250 300 400 500 600 700 800 1000 1200 1400 1500 1600
0 B -1 100 100 100 100 100 100 110 110 110 110 125 125 150 150 150
C 60 90 110 140 160 210 280 350 400 450 550
D E F 3 80 M8 (3x) 3 120 M10 (3x) 3 140 M10 (4x) 3 170 M12 (4x) 3 190 M12 (4x) 4 250 M12 (6x) 4 320 M12 (6x) 4 390 M16 (6x) 4 450 M16 (6x) 4 500 M16 (6x) 4 620 M16 (8x) Rear detail as required Rear detail as required Rear detail as required Rear detail as required
G 12 14 14 16 16 16 16 18 18 18 18
H 35 35 45 45 60 70 100 100 120 150 200 300 300 300 300
I 10 10 10 10 10 15 15 15 15 18 18 25 25 25 25
P 3 3 4 4 6 6 8 8 8 12 12 18 18 18 18
Weight in kg
Chuck voltage in Vdc
4 9 18 29 42 76 120 195 265 365 550 990 1350 1550 1760
210 210 210 210 210 / 360 210 / 360 360 360 360 360 360 360 360 360 360
30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 60 60 x 2 60 x 2 60 x 2 60 x 2
876.10 / 876.03 876.10 / 876.03 876.10 / 876.03 876.10 876.10 876.10 876.10 876.10 876.10 876.10 876.10 876.10 876.10 876.10 876.10
Bigger sizes up to A = 5400 available on request. Please refer to SAV 876.03 to SAV 876.10 (see chapter 04), for details regarding suitable control units, based on the power rating. For execution with T-slots, the height increases with 10 mm.
Ordering example: Electro-Permanent Magnetic Circular Chuck Ordering key: Name SAV Workholding and Automation
SAV 244.70 - 1600 - T - 360 V SAV - No. - A - Execution - Operating voltage Chapter 3 69

Enhanced magnetic system with radial pole arrangement and exceptional holding force This new design of circular magnet, using high-energy magnetic materials, provides extremely high holding forces. Magnetization and demagnetization through a short electric direct current pulse. The homogeneous nature and precision of this circular magnet makes it suitable for turning hardened steels as well as general heavy cutting.
SAV 244.71
Use: Turning of hardened steel and heavy cutting of small to large workpieces. Also for highest precision grinding.
- equal pole pitch within circle range; therefore very suitable for circular and ring-shaped workpieces 0.35 x P
- the minimum workpiece height is 35% of the pole pitch at the given circle segment
di do
<0.9
Nominal holding force: 160 N/cm2, adjustable by control unit with encoded switch. Nominal operating voltage: 360 V DC
70
Chapter 3
- for turning and hard turning
Features: - evenly distributed strong magnetic field - solid constructed pole plate - switching off through demagnetizing cycle - electro-permanent magnetic system, guaranteeing safe operation during power failure - high precision due to fine grid pole-plate-to-body connection - pole separation with brass in-lays for optimal wear behaviour - pole plate exchangeable - radial pole arrangement, especially suitable for the use of pole raisers. This is absolutely essential for the runout of the tool or the grinding wheel at three side operation. Therefore available with T-slots (T) according DIN 650-10H10 on request. - pole plate wearing limit 8mm - sealed to IP 65 - suitable for use with control unit type 876.10 (see chapter 04) - available with adapter flange on request (SAV 248.90 to 248.94, see chapter 06) Scope of supply: - Lifting bolts for transportation on larger models. - T-slots and pole extensions not included as standard. - Terminals for electrical connection in middle of back side in standard execution. - Optional with integrated slip ring body for the bigger diameters. - with industrial watertight plug-in type connector on request

Enhanced magnetic system with radial pole arrangement and exceptional holding force
SAV 244.71
tool
Segment-shaped pole raisers ensure an undisturbed tool path during 3-side machining. A solid axial mounting face is provided by 3 rigid pole extensions, the remainder being floating types. For workpieces with differing diameters, the pole raisers can be repositioned along the radial milled slots (available on request).
workpiece pole raisers magnetic chuck

G F I
CH7
Dimensions in mm
A 200 250 300 400 500 600 700 800 1000 1200 1400 1500 1600
0 B -1 100 100 100 100 110 110 110 110 125 125 150 150 150
C 110 140 160 210 280 350 400 450 550
D E F 3 140 M10 (4x) 3 170 M12 (4x) 3 190 M12 (4x) 4 250 M12 (6x) 4 320 M12 (6x) 4 390 M16 (6x) 4 450 M16 (6x) 4 500 M16 (6x) 4 620 M16 (8x) Rear detail as required Rear detail as required Rear detail as required Rear detail as required
G 14 16 16 16 16 18 18 18 18
H 45 45 60 70 100 100 120 150 200 300 300 300 300
I 10 10 10 15 15 15 15 18 18 25 25 25 25
P 4 4 6 6 8 8 8 12 12 18 18 18 18
Weight in kg
24 39 54 85 150 210 280 380 680 975 1600 1850 2105
360 360 360 360 360 360 360 360 360 360 360 360 360
30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 60 60 x 2 60 x 2 60 x 2 60 x 2
876.10 876.10 876.10 876.10 876.10 876.10 876.10 876.10 876.10 876.10 876.10 876.10 876.10
Bigger sizes up to A = 5400 available on request. Please refer to SAV 876.10 (see chapter 04), for details regarding suitable control units, based on the power rating.
For execution with T-slots, the height increases with 10 mm.

Ordering example: Electro-Permanent Magnetic Circular Chuck Ordering key: Name SAV Workholding and Automation SAV 244.71 - 1600 - T - 360 V SAV - No. - A - Execution - Operating voltage Chapter 3 71

With concentric pole arrangement These circular magnets with concentric magnetic poles permit the clamping of several workpieces outside the central region. The strong magnetic field is distributed evenly over the entire surface.
SAV 244.72
Use: Mainly for precision grinding of small to large workpieces on rotary tables and cylindrical grinders. Because of the concentric pole arrangement it is also suitable for holding groups of randomly placed mass-production pieces. - for circular grinding - uniform holding force distribution due to concentric pole arrangement; therefore suitable for thin and flat workpieces (e.g. saw blades) - multiple workpiece operation on segments possible - for workpieces with min. thickness = x: 2 mm at P = 4.5 mm 4 mm at P = 9.0 mm 8 mm at P = 18.0 mm - for flat workpieces with min. dimensions 45 mm x 45 mm
Nominal holding force: P = 4.5 mm: 80 N/cm2 P = 9 mm: 100 N/cm2 P = 18 mm: 110 N/cm2 adjustable by control unit with encoded switch Nominal operating voltage: 210 V DC up to 500 mm diameter 360 V DC above 500 mm diameter Features: - gap free construction of pole plate - evenly distributed, strong magnetic field - solid constructed pole plate - switching off through demagnetizing cycle - electro-permanent system, guaranteeing safe operation during power failure - high precision due to fine grid pole-plate-to-body connection - pole separation with brass in-lays for optimal wear behaviour - pole plate exchangeable - pole plate wearing limit 8 mm - sealed to IP 65 - suitable for use with control unit type 876.10 (see chapter 04) - available with adapter flange on request (SAV 248.90 to 248.94, see chapter 06) Scope of supply: - Lifting bolts for transportation on larger models. - Terminals for electrical connection in middle of backside in standard execution. - Optional with integrated slip ring body for the bigger diameters.
x 45
72
Chapter 3

With concentric pole arrangement
SAV 244.72
G F
I P
H7
Dimensions in mm
A 300 400 500 600 700 800 1000 400 500 600 700 800 1000 1200 1400 1500 1600 1200 1400 1500 1600
0 B -1 105
C 160 210 280 350 400 450 550 210 280 350 400 450 550
D 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
E 190 250 320 390 450 500 620 250 320 390 450 500 620
F M12 (4x) M12 (6x) M12 (6x) M12 (6x) M12 (6x) M16 (6x) M16 (8x) M12 (6x) M12 (6x) M12 (6x) M12 (6x) M16 (6x) M16 (8x)
G 16 16 16 18 18 18 18 16 16 18 18 18 18 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22
H 76 90 96 80 96 96 96 66 92 70 92 92 92 80 166 166 166 70 166 166 166
I 16 21 21 21 21 22 22 21 21 21 21 22 22 23 26 26 26 23 26 26 26
P 4.5 9 9 9 9 9 9 18 18 18 18 18 18 9 9 9 9 18 18 18 18
Weight in kg
Control unit Suitable max. current control unit in A
52 89 141 204 278 383 578 89 141 204 278 383 578 990 1350 1550 1765 990 1350 1550 1765
210 210 210 360 360 360 360 210 210 360 360 360 360 360 360 360 360 360 360 360 360
30 30 30 30 30 30 60 30 30 30 30 30 60 60 x 2 60 x 2 60 x 2 60 x 2 60 x 2 60 x 2 60 x 2 60 x 2
876.10 876.10 876.10 876.10 876.10 876.10 876.10 876.10 876.10 876.10 876.10 876.10 876.10 876.10 876.10 876.10 876.10 876.10 876.10 876.10 876.10
105 105 105 105 105 105 105 105 105 105 105 105 125 125 125 125 125 125 125 125
Rear detail as required Rear detail as required Rear detail as required Rear detail as required Rear detail as required Rear detail as required Rear detail as required Rear detail as required
Larger sizes on request. Please refer to SAV 876.03 to SAV 876.10 (see chapter 04), for details regarding suitable control units, based on the power rating. Ordering example: Electro-Permanent Magnetic Circular Chuck Ordering key: Name SAV Workholding and Automation SAV 244.72 - 1600 x 18 - 360 V SAV - No. - A x P - Operating voltage Chapter 3 73

With parallel pole pitch P=4 mm Fine pole pitch for thin workpieces. Developed especially for universal use on circular grinding machines. Double, enhanced magnetic system for extreme high holding forces at low magnetic field height.
SAV 244.73
Use: For grinding of thin, plate-shaped workpieces. - Grinding of thin plates, wide rings with small thickness and minimum width of 40 mm - for workpieces with minimum thickness X = 2 mm
40
Nominal operating voltage - 360 V DC Nominal holding force - 100 N/cm - adjustable with control unit with encoded switch Scope of supply: - lifting bolts on larger models. - electrical connection with terminals in centre of backside - on request available with industrial watertight plug-in type connector
- for flat workpieces with min. dimensions of a = 40 x 40 mm Execution: - pole plate with very small pole pitch, 3 mm steel and 1 mm brass - low height - laminations glued and reinforced with tie bars - high precision due to fine grid pole plate to body connection - low magnetic field height - switching off through demagnetizing cycle - heat treated tension free body - threaded mounting holes in backside. Through holes on request. - electro-permanent magnetic system for absolute safe operation during power failure - pole plate surface wearing limit 8 mm - robust und waterproof - sealed to IP 65 - for use with control unit type SAV 876.10 (see chapter 4)
74
Chapter 3

With parallel pole pitch P=4 mm
SAV 244.73
G F
H7
Dimensions in mm
A 300 400 500 600 700 800
B 100 100 100 100 100 100
C 160 210 280 350 400 450
D 3 4 4 4 4 4
E 190 250 320 390 450 500
F M12 (4x) M12 (6x) M12 (6x) M12 (6x) M12 (6x) M16 (6x)
G 16 16 16 18 18 18
H 213 231 391 481 581 681
I 16 21 21 21 21 22
Weight in kg
55 98 153 220 300 392
360 V 360 V 360 V 360 V 360 V 360 V
30 30 30 60 60 60
876.10 876.10 876.10 876.10 876.10 876.10
Other dimensions available on request.
Ordering example: Electro-Permanent Magnetic Circular Chuck Ordering key: Name SAV Workholding and Automation
SAV 244.73 - 800 - 360 V SAV - No. - Diam.- chuck voltage Chapter 3 75
Carbon Brush Holder

For electric power supply to Electro-Magnetic Circular Chucks Use: Slip-ring bodies are used in combination with carbon brushes to supply power to circular electromagnetic chucks. The slip-ring body can be mounted separately to the hollow machine spindle. When installing it must be assured that the insulation components do not come into contact with coolant or other fluids. Suitable protection must be provided to prevent contact with live components. Execution: The slip-ring body is supplied with a small through hole only. The required adapter through-bore is to be machined in accordance with the machine spindle dimensions and taking the maximum size E into account.
SAV 248.84
Distance G to slip-ring body
E
C
A F
For circular magnet- Chuck voltage in V
Number of contacts
Dimensions in mm
Weight in kg
to 800 210 / 360 to 1000 360 to 1600 360
30 60 60 x 2
3 3 4
140 140 140
40 40 50
M8 12,5 6,3 M8 12,5 6,3 M8 20,0 8,0
20 27,0 0,17 20 25,0 0,17 25 33,5 0,23
Ordering example: Carbon Brush Holder SAV 248.84 - 1600 Ordering key: Name SAV - No. - Max. circular chuck diameter
Slip-Ring Body
For electric power supply to Electro-Magnetic Circular Chucks Use: Slip-ring bodies are used in connection with carbon brushes to supply power to circular electro-permanent magnets. The slip-ring body can be mounted separately to the hollow machine spindle. While installing it must be assured that the insulation components do not come into contact with coolant or other fluids. Suitable protection must be provided to prevent contact with live components. Mounting method: - shrinking at 130 oC - pressing with 0.5 mm oversize - gluing Features: The slip-ring bodies are delivered with only one small centre-drilling. This has to be machined to suit the spindle of the machine, within range E.
For circular magnet - Chuck voltage in V Control unit Number max. current of in A contacts Dimensions in mm Max. r.p.m.
SAV 248.85
to 800 210 / 360 to 1000 360 to 1600 360
30 60 60 x 2
3 3 4
A B 70 61.5 100 65.5 100 79.0
C 20 25 25
D E M5 25 - 34 M8 30 - 52 M8 42 - 55
4100 3000 3000
1.1 2.5 3.0
Ordering example: Slip Ring Holder SAV 248.85 - 1600 Ordering key: Name SAV - No. - Max. circular chuck diameter 76 Chapter 3 Technical data subject to change without prior notice

Possible electrical connections Power Supply to Circular Magnets with external Slip-Ring Body and carbon brushes
Machine Spindle Circular Magnet Slip-Ring Body
E-Connection Carbon Brush Holder Flange
Power Supply to Circular Magnets with integrated flat Slip-Ring Body for vertical spindles
Pole Plate Removable Cover Axial Carbon Brushes
Flat Slip-Ring Body
Power Supply to Circular Magnets with industrial watertight connector; for magnetizing and demagnetizing, removed during operation (for Electro Permanent Magnets only).
Pole Plate Connector
Chapter 3
77
Hard Turning of thin Rings: Higher Productivity realized by substitution of grinding process. 3-side-access in one set up. Easy automation. Adequate holding force. Better Quality realized by distributed magnetic force. Drastically improved roughness and roundness-tolerances.
Electro-Permanent Circular Magnetic Chuck: For hard turning application, execution in 2 segments, high maximum rotation speed 200 r.p.m. Diameter 3100 mm
78
Chapter 3
CHAPTER 4
Demagnetizers Demagnetizing devices and control units Table demagnetizers Table demagnetizers Tunnel demagnetizers Tunnel demagnetizers Manual demagnetizers Manual demagnetizers Remarks information and application examples for continuous duty with conveyor for continuous duty with conveyor for universal use for tools
Page 79 - 92
SAV-No. 890.01 890.03 890.40 890.41 890.70 890.71
Page 80 81 81 82 82 83 83
Gauss meter, holding force tester, Tesla-meter Mini-Gauss meter Holding force tester Tesla meter Mini magnetic field meter measurement of fields with small flux density comparison of magnetic clamping systems compact device with large measurment range with digital reading 486.04 486.40 878.05 878.06 84 84 85 85
Polarity reversing units, control units, compact controls Electronic polarity reversing control units Remote control unit Electronic compact control Rectifier unit for holding force regulation and demagnetizing for manual control for electro (permanent) magnetic chucks for general purpose and clamping magnets 876.10 876.02 876.03 876.06 86-88 89 90 91
Chapter 4
79
Demagnetizers and controls

For safe operation Principle of demagnetizing: To demagnetize a workpiece it must be moved through an alternating and reducing magnetic field. The repetitive polarity changes of such a magnetic field makes it possible to reduce the induction and eventually bring this to practically zero. The lined orientation of the elementary magnets in the material are brought to a chaotic disorientation. Reducing alternating magnetic fields follow with applied magnetic field H (in A/m) practically parallel to the hysteresis curve. When reducing the field step by step the remanence Br of almost 0 mT (Gauss) can be reached. Further clarifications to the magnetic principles can be found in chapter 15. B
The elimination of the field is reached as follows:
- Automatically by a polarity-reversing control unit with degressive magnetic circuits. - By slowly and constantly moving the workpiece over the pole surface of a table demagnetizer. - By slowly moving the piece through a tunnel-demagnetizer at a constant speed. At the tunnel exit, the piece must be brought far away enough from the alternating field.
Choosing a demagnetizer:
Generally it is necessary to give the exact details regarding the problems that need to be solved: Shape, dimensions and steel composition for the pieces to be magnetized as well as the necessary type of function of the device. The length of the workpiece is not important. It is enough when they are narrower than the plate-demagnetizer or the pieces go through the opening of the tunnel device. Tables consist of several standard plates. Arranged beside one another on a base plate, they facilitate the demagnetizing of wide pieces. Attention should be paid to the occurring holding forces, which must be overcome when handling the parts and this limits the surface which can be achieved. When choosing between plate and tunnel device, It is very important to take the thickness of the workpiece into consideration. For demagnetizing of massive workpieces, we recommend tunnel-demagnetizers, which operate on all sides and in as far as the metallic inner part of the piece. The type of operation is given as a percentage of the total cycle length. Example: Device in operation Length of cycle: relative duty cycle:
ton = 1 minute tcycle= ton + toff = 4 minutes
device not in operation: toff = 3 minutes
Duty cycle= 100 % x ton / tcycle = 25 %
Operation mode:
It is very important to carry out the demagnetizing with a slow and constant speed, and at the same time the piece should be moved rectangutar to the poles. After the demagnetization the workpiece should be moved as far away as possible from the device, or else the demagnetization is incomplete. Besides that, the supply current must never be turned off during the cycle. The process should be repeated several times in one direction for massive pieces. Versions with degressive magnetic circuits need only to be pushed through once.
80
Chapter 4
Table demagnetizer
For continuous duty Use: For demagnetizing of workpieces after magnetic holding. The robust type of construction allows the use of demagnetizers also in rough applications. Design: Pole plate made of laminated silicon plate with low loss of power caused by eddy currents. Electrical supply: 230 V / 50 Hz Protection: IP 21 Duty cycle: 100% Application: The demagnetizing is realized by moving the workpiece, either once or several times, in the same direction over the pole plate. The best results are obtained when, after each move, the workpiece is completely moved away from the alternating magnetic field. A
Dimensions in mm
SAV 890.01
A 180 260 300
B 180 250 400
C 115 135 145
Weight in kg
Power in VA
11.5 32.0 57.0
375 990 2000
Ordering example: Table Demagnetizer SAV 890.01 - 300 Ordering key: Name SAV No. - A
Table demagnetizers
With conveyor Use: For automatic demagnetization on the conveyor belt with continuous plastic conveyor belt and AC-motor. The workpieces are moved over the pole plate at a speed of approx. 0.15 m/sec. Belt operation and demagnetizer are separately switchable. For workpieces that are difficult to demagnetize, a low-frequency generator can be used (optional). Nominal voltage: Demagnetizer: 230 V, 50 60 Hz Driving motor: 230/400 V, 50-60 Hz, 3-phase E = A
Dimensions in mm
SAV 890.03
C = B D
Ordering example: Table demagnetizer SAV 890.03 - 300 Ordering key: Name SAV No. - A SAV Workholding and Automation www.sav-workholding.com Chapter 4 81
ca. 850
A 260 300
B 250 400
C 350 400
D 240 300
E 1200 1800
Weight in kg
Power in VA
97.0 130.0
990 2000
Tunnel-Demagnetizers
For continuous duty Application SAV 890.40 After operation, steel and casted workpieces can have restmagnetism, which can be quite disturbing. When these parts need to be demagnetized prior to further usage, this can in most cases easily be achieved with tunnel demagnetizers. The tunnels are especially suitable for demagnetizing of bigger parts with smaller wall thickness. It is particularly advantageous, when series of workpieces in continous operation have to be demagnetized. Construction The demagnetizing coils are casted in plastic and are provided with M8 mounting holes and on/off switch with signal lamp.
SAV 890.40 / SAV 890.41

Application SAV 890.41 For automatic demagnetizing with continous plastic conveyor belt and driving motor. The workpieces are moved through the tunnel with a speed of approx. 0.2 m/sec. For parts which are difficult to demagnetize, a (optional) low frequency generator can be used. C A F D
ca. 1800 E 1200 600
Type SAV 890.41 Type SAV 890.40 C A 75 E
105
Dimensions in mm
20
M8
30
A 150 260 250 400 550 260 250 400 550
B 100 130 250 350 550 130 250 350 550
C 320 430 420 570 720 430 420 570 720
D 270 300 420 520 720 70 190 290 490
E 140 140 230 350 350 140 230 350 350
F 180 290 280 430 580 200 200 350 450
G 70 70 160 270 270 -
Power in VA
Weight in kg
Protection: IP 65 Duty cycle: 100% Supply voltage: 230 V Frequency: 50 60 Hz Other voltages available on request
SAV 890.40 stand alone unit
1500 1800 2300 4500 6500 1800 2300 4500 6500
25.0 35.0 66.0 137.0 190.0 -
SAV 890.41 with conveyor belt and table
Ordering example: Tunnel demagnetizer SAV 890.41 - 550 x 550 Ordering key: Name SAV No. - A x B 82 Chapter 4 Technical data subject to change without prior notice
ca. 850
Manual demagnetizer
For individual use Application: For demagnetizing the surfaces of bigger workpieces. Mobile use. Execution: Light-weight housing for easy use. Nom. voltage: 230 V, 50 Hz Weight: 2.8 kg Active surface: 150 x 95 mm Penetration: ca 40 mm Rating: 220 VA
SAV 890.70
Ordering example: Hand demagnetizer SAV 890.70 Ordering key: Name SAV No.
Manual demagnetizer
For bar material and tools Application: For demagnetizing of workpieces, tools, punches, cutters, etc. Execution: Stable, plastic housing, with high power. Usage also in rough environment. Not suitable for continuous duty! Including thermo-fuse and LED for operation mode. Hole diameter: 40 mm Nominal voltage: 230 V / 50 Hz Duty cycle: 10% Max. operation time: 10 seconds
SAV 890.71
Ordering example: Hand demagnetizer SAV 890.71 Ordering key: Name SAV No. SAV Workholding and Automation www.sav-workholding.com Chapter 4 83
Mini Gauss-Meter
For measurement of fields with small flux density Use: For residual remanence measurement on workpieces and tools. Attention: The device is only to be used for residual field measurement and not for concentrated magnetic fields. Measurement range: 50 Gauss ( 5 mT) Diameter: 65 mm Weight: 0.14 kg
SAV 486.04
Ordering example: Mini Gauss-Meter SAV 486.04 Ordering key: Name SAV No.
Holding Force Tester

For comparison of magnetic clamping systems Use: For measuring the holding force of: - permanent magnetic chucks - electro magnetic chucks - electro permanent magnetic chucks Application: By turning the screw clockwise with an Allen key, the necessary pressure is built up. The built-in piston is displaced until the holding force limit is reached and the measuring cylinder is lifted from the magnetic plate. The indicated pressure given in Bar corresponds to the comparative break-away force in daN/cm2. Measurement range: 0 25 Bar equals 0 25 daN/cm2 Weight: 2.0 kg
SAV 486.40
Ordering example: Holding Force Tester SAV 486.40 Name SAV No. Ordering key: 84 Chapter 4 Technical data subject to change without prior notice
Tesla Meter
Compact device with large measurement range Use: For residual remanence measurement on workpieces and tools, in drillings and fixtures. Suitable for both micro-magnetic and very strong magnetic fields. Also for measuring magnetic flux and field structure on magnetic chucks. Design: Light and compact design. Dirt protective housing. Economized energy use for long battery life. Liquid-crystal display with digital reading. Sensor can easily be exchanged and ordered separately (SAV 876.05 S) Features: - automatic ranging - display is either Tesla (T) of Gauss (G) - static and dynamic measurement - max. indication for dynamic measurement - pole indication (N/S) - zero setting Range for static fields: 0 1500 mT Range for dynamic fields: 0 750 mT Accuracy: 5% Ambient Temperature: 0 40 oC Dimensions: 150 x 150 x 25 mm Weight: 0.25 kg Ordering example: Tesla Meter SAV 878.05 Name SAV No. Ordering key:
SAV 878.05
Mini magnetic field meter

With display for digital measurement value reading Application: For magnetic field and remanence measurement on workpieces and tools. Handy, quick and simple in use. The measurement value information is very useful for employees in measuring rooms, warehouse, control, engineering and laboratorium and further in many production processes. Execution: Light-weight and compact execution. Self-calibrating for each use and therefore very precise and realistic measurement values. Indication: selection 0-200 Gs / 0-2000 Gs Accuracy: +/- 1% Resolution: +/- 0.1 Gs (0 200 Gs) +/- 1 Gs (0 2000 Gs) Application temperature: 17 - 23C Delivery with 3LR50 battery. Battery lifetime 40.000 measurements with duration of 2 seconds.
Dimensions in mm Length Width Height Weight in kg
SAV 878.06
138
48
17
0.07
Ordering example: Mini magnetic field meter SAV 878.06 Ordering key: Name SAV No. SAV Workholding and Automation www.sav-workholding.com Chapter 4 85
Electronic Polarity-Reversing Control Unit

With integrated microprocessor and holding force control Use: State-of-the-art control unit with up-to-date technology and electronics for magnetizing, demagnetizing and holding force regulation of electromagnetic and electropermanent magnetic chucks and systems. Suitable for integration in existing machine control cabinet. Application: Electronic polarity-reversing control units supply continuous DC-current to electro-magnetic chucks. For electro-permanent magnetic chucks this control unit is supplying the current impulse for switching the chuck on and off. The integrated, microprocessor controlled, pole reversing function demagnetizes the magnetic system and also eliminates the remanence magnetism in the workpiece. Due to this the workpieces can easily be released from the chuck, any chips are easy to remove, and, even more important, separate demagnetization of the workpiece is no longer required. Additional pole reversing programs are available for workpieces which are extremely difficult to (de)magnetize. When control unit and magnetic chuck are ordered as a set, it will be programmed with the most optimum settings in time and function. The control unit continuously monitors the main supply voltage / current, its outputs, all connecting cables and magnet coils. Status indications are presented on the LCD-display. Functional description: The control units comply with the following standards/ guidelines: - Accident prevention law VBG 7 n6 11.08 11/01.01.59 - Machine guideline 93/68/EWG ABI. No. L220 - Low voltage guideline 93/68/EWG ABI. No. L220126220 - EMC guideline 92/31/EWG ABI.Nr. L126 A safety contact in the control unit can be used to prevent accidental machining of a workpiece when the magnetic chuck is not magnetized. Manual operation through illuminated push-buttons (control unit SAV 876.02). Optional connection to CNC-controls through 24 Vdc signalling voltage. An 8-step holding force regulation function is standard built-in and operated through a coded switch. Note: When using the lowest holding force settings, the safety according VBG 7 n6 can no longer be guaranteed.
SAV 876.10
Build-in version E
Technical data: Maximum ambient temperature: Input voltage: Frequency: Duty cycle for electro magnets: (electromagnetic chucks) Cycle time for electropermanent magnets: Smaller cycles on request.
45 C 230 / 400 Vac 50 / 60 Hz 100 %
> 3 min.
Features: - small and compact - fully closed (IP 54 with Box version S) and shock-proof - operator-friendly LCD display, indicating operation status and fault messages in text - foil covered keys for simple and easy setting of parameters - universal use for all magnet types and voltages - safe and reliable For use on pallet changers or circular magnets, a heavy industrial quick connector in combination with a parking station is possible. This is to prevent movement of the magnetic chuck and damaging of the supply cable during loading and unloading of the machine.
86
Chapter 4

With integrated microprocessor and holding force control Magnet terminals
SAV 876.10
LCD-Display: Indicates operation status and fault messages in text Foil covered keys: For simple setting of parameters - Magnet type and voltage - Demagnetizing cycle (coarse) - Demagnetizing cycle (fine) - Holding force characteristic (1-16 steps) - Number of voltage impulses - Impulse length - Holding force value for machine clearance
Control signal Terminals (plugable)
Mains terminals
Inverse BCD-coding For holding force control on terminals 15 to 18 (see terminal plan). In 8 step control terminal 18 remains unused. Terminal closed or on 24V-signal: 1, Terminal open: 0. Please refer to BCD-coding table! Only apply proper control unit SAV 876.02 SE2-1. Special programs on request.
8 steps Terminal 15 Terminal 16 Terminal 17 Terminal 18 16 steps Terminal 15 Terminal 16 Terminal 17 Terminal 18
1 1 1 1 1
1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 0
3 1 1 0 1
2 1 1 0 4 1 1 0 0
5 1 0 1 1
3 1 0 1 6 1 0 1 0
7 1 0 0 1
4 1 0 0 8 1 0 0 0
0 1 1 1
5 0 1 1 0 1 1 0
0 1 0 1
6 0 1 0 0 1 0 0
0 0 1 1
7 0 0 1 0 0 1 0
0 0 0 1
8 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
5 signal light red 6 free 7 machine clearance 8 machine clearance 9 free 10 signal light green 11 signal voltage 24 V 12 free 13 push button magnetize 14 push button demagn. 15 holding force switch bit 3 16 holding force switch bit 2 17 holding force switch bit 1 18 holding force switch bit 0
Terminal plan * = NC connection for ground terminal 12. Machine interlocking possible over terminals 6, 7 and 8 (normally use jumper between terminals 7 and 8). For magnets with a required current of 60 A x 2 a double control unit is available with double terminal set. In case the unit is connected to a control unit SAV 876.02-SE1, Terminal 9 remains unused.
Chapter 4
87
Mains 230 V / 400 V Transformer may be required for E-magnet
Magnet + Magnet

With integrated microprocessor and holding force control
E L E C T R I C A L D E TA I L S For Electro-Permanent Magnetic Chucks
Ordering no. Magnet Magnet Mains Max. Mains voltage current voltage magnet Fuse transDC max. AC rating DC in A former in V in A in V in kW required Ordering no.
SAV 876.10
For Electro Magnetic Chucks

Magnet Magnet Mains voltage current voltage DC max. AC in V in A in V Max. magnet rating DC in W Fuse in A Mains transformer required
876.10 -_-O-210/30/230 876.10 -_-O-210/30/400 876.10 -_-O-360/30/400 876.10 -_-O-360/30x2/400 876.10 -_-O-360/30x3/400 876.10 -_-O-360/30x4/400 876.10 -_-O-360/60/400 876.10 -_-O-360/60x2/400 876.10 -_-O-360/60x3/400 876.10 -_-O-360/60x4/400
210 210
30 30
230 400
6.3 6.3
16 16 16 16 16 16 32 32 32 32
no (O) no (O) no (O) no (O) no (O) no (O) no (O) no (O) no (O) no (O)
876.10 -_- T-24 / 7 /230 876.10 -_- T-24 /15/ 230 876.10 -_- T-24 /25 /230
24 24 24
7 15 25 6 16 30 6 16 30
230 230 230 230 230 230 400 400 400
168 360 600 660 1760 3300 660 1760 3300
4 6.3 6.3 4 16 25 4 16 25
yes (T) yes (T) yes (T) no (O) no (O) no (O) yes (T) yes (T) yes (T)
360 30 360 30x2 360 30x3 360 30x4 360 60 360 60x2 360 60x3 360 60x4
400 10.8 400 10.8 x 2 400 10.8 x 3 400 10.8 x 4 400 400 400 400 21.6 21.6 x 2 21.6 x 3 21.6 x 4
876.10 -_- O-110/ 6 /230 110 876.10 -_- O-110/16/230 110 876.10 -_ -O-110/30/230 110 876.10 -_- T-110/ 6 /400 876.10 -_- T-110/16/400 876.10 -_- T-110/30/400 110 110 110
DIMENSIONS Box version (S) with protection IP54 Build-in version (E) with protection IP00 E 355 10 14.0 455 10 20.0 355 10 32.0
Ordering no.
for Electro Magnetic Chucks
Ordering no.
876.10-S-T-24 / 7 / 230 876.10-S-T-24 / 15 / 230 876.10-S-T-24 / 25 / 230 876.10-S-O-110 / 6 / 230 876.10-S-O-110 / 16 / 230 876.10-S-O-110 / 30 / 230 876.10-S-T-110 / 6 / 400 876.10-S-T-110 / 16 / 400 876.10-S-T-110 / 30 / 400
A 250 250 500
B 400 500 400
C 150 150 250
D 205 205 455
876.10-E-T-24 / 7 / 230 876.10-E-T-24 / 15 / 230 876.10-E-T-24 / 25 / 230 876.10-E-O-110 / 6 / 230 876.10-E-O-110 / 16 / 230 876.10-E-O-110 / 30 / 230 876.10-E-T-110 / 6 / 400 876.10-E-T-110 / 16 / 400 876.10-E-T-110 / 30 / 400
A 220 260 320
B 120 120 120
C D E F 95 210 85 5 95 250 85 5 95 310 85 5
2.0 3.0 6.0
300 250 155 260 210 8 10.0 250 400 150 205 355 10 14.0 250 400 150 205 355 10 16.0 500 400 250 455 355 10 28.0 500 400 250 455 355 10 38.0 600 400 250 555 355 10 54.0
220 120 95 210 85 5 2.0 260 120 95 250 85 5 3.0 350 250 100 325 225 8 8.0 220 120 95 210 85 5 2.0 260 120 95 250 85 5 3.0 350 120 100 325 225 8 6.0
B E F
E
A D
B for Electro-Permanent Magnetic Chucks
C
Build-in version (E) with protection IP00
Weight F in kg Ordering no.
A D
Box version (S) with protection IP54

Ordering no.
876.10-S-O-210 / 30 / 230 876.10-S-O-210 / 30 / 400 876.10-S-O-360 / 30 / 400 876.10-S-O-360 / 30 x 2 / 400 876.10-S-O-360 / 30 x 3 / 400 876.10-S-O-360 / 30 x 4 / 400 876.10-S-O-360 / 60 / 400 876.10-S-O-360 / 60 x 2 / 400 876.10-S-O-360 / 60 x 3 / 400 876.10-S-O-360 / 60 x 4 / 400
A B C D E 300 250 155 260 210 8 10.0 876.10-E-O-210 / 30 / 230 300 250 155 260 210 8 10.0 876.10-E-O-210 / 30 / 400 300 300 250 250 300 250 250 300 250 300 400 400 300 400 500 600 155 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 260 255 205 205 255 205 205 245 210 255 355 355 255 355 455 555 8 8 10 10 8 10 10 10 10.0 10.0 11.0 12.0 10.0 14.0 16.0 19.0 876.10-E-O-360 / 30 / 400 876.10-E-O-360 / 30 x 2 / 400 876.10-E-O-360 / 30 x 3 / 400 876.10-E-O-360 / 30 x 4 / 400 876.10-E-O-360 / 60 / 400 876.10-E-O-360 / 60 x 2 / 400 876.10-E-O-360 / 60 x 3 / 400 876.10-E-O-360 / 60 x 4 / 400
A B C D E F in kg 220 120 95 210 85 5 2.0 220 120 95 210 85 5 2.0 220 260 320 320 260 320 400 540 120 120 120 120 120 120 120 120 95 95 95 95 95 95 95 95 210 250 310 310 250 310 350 530 85 85 85 85 85 85 85 85 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 2.0 3.0 3.0 4.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0
Weight
Ordering example: Electronic Polarity-Reversing Control Unit SAV 876.10 - E - O - 360 / 60 x 4 / 400 Ordering key: Name SAV No. - Version - Transformer - Magn. nom. voltage / Max. current / Mains voltage 88 Chapter 4 Technical data subject to change without prior notice
for Electro-Permanent Magnetic Chucks
for Electro Magnetic Chucks
Weight F in kg
Weight in kg
Control Unit
Application: For switching of direct current magnets in connection with electronic polarity-reversing control unit SAV 876.10. The control unit is switched on by pushing the green and yellow keys. The polarity-reversing process is initiated by a red and yellow key. Possible fault indications as monitored by the polarityreversing unit are also presented to the red illuminated key by means of a coded blinking signal. Required holding force can set to 8 levels. (16 levels on request).
SAV 876.02
Execution: In order to comply with accident prevention regulations for machine tools, the release of the machine feed through auxiliary contacts can only be authorised when magnet is switched on and when the on position is indicated by a signal light. This control unit complies with these regulations. The signal lamp is integrated into the foil covered keys of the control unit. The auxiliary contacts (interlock) for the machine feed are integrated in the polarity-reversing control unit.
For switching of direct current magnets in connection with polarity reversing unit type SAV 876.10
130 clamping / unclamping
60
60
holding force regulation
Control unit type SE3 With coding switch for holding force setting in 8 levels using inverse BCD-coding, including 2 integrated signal lamps and 2 m coded cable, 9 pole. Additional coded cable against price adder.
M10 23
36
30
36
15
15
30
40 Illuminated push button, green SE2-2 Illuminated push button, red SE2-3
Coding switch SE2-1
Build-in version type SE2-1 to SE2-3 Consisting of 2 signal push buttons and coding switch for holding force setting in 8 levels using inverse BCDcoding. Complete set can be ordered under type SE2-S.
Ordering example: Control Unit SAV 876.02 - SE2-1 Ordering key: Name SAV No. - Type SAV Workholding and Automation www.sav-workholding.com Chapter 4 89
Electronic Compact Control

For electro and electro-permanent magnets Use: For complete direct current supply as well as demagnetizing and holding-force control of clamping and holding magnets. Execution: The compact control unit SF0 contains the complete direct current supply and demagnetizing facilities in a small housing. All control elements are integrated in the front panel. The control is directly connected to the mains supply (230 V 50 Hz) and the magnet with a multicore cable. A floating relay contact can be used as machine interlock. This contact is closed at energized magnet. The power to the magnet is continuously monitored. The status of the magnet is indicated on the front panel with signal light. (green=energized, red=off, red blinking=demagnetizing). The holding-force control is stepless. The demagnetizing function is microprocessor controlled utilizing electric pulses with alternating polarity.
SAV 876.03
ON OFF mass
signal red signal green 24 V
Pot. meter holding force
Power supply 230 V AC Magnet current Output Relay contact for Machine interlock
6 core no. 6 5 core no. 5 4 core no. 4 3 core no. 3 2 core no. 2 1 core no. 1
Following models are available: SF0-110: Output voltage: Output current: SF0-EP: Output voltage: Output current: 110 V DC 4 Amp. max. (440 VA) 210 V pulse 16 Amp. max. Technical data: Housing dimension: 240 x 80 x 80 mm Protection: Supply voltage: IP65 230 V / 50 Hz
SF0-24*: Output voltage: 24 V DC Output current: 4 Amp. max. (96 VA) * With this option a separate power transformer is required.
Other models on request.
Ordering example: Electronic Compact Control SAV 876.03 - SF0-24 Ordering key: Name SAV No. - Type 90 Chapter 4 Technical data subject to change without prior notice
clearance 1 2
magnet 3 4
230 V 5 6
control unit
power supply unit
coded cable, 6 core
Rectifier Unit
For general purpose and clamping magnets Use: For power supply of general purpose and clamping magnets. For electro magnets as low-cost alternative for polarity-reversing controls in case holding force control and demagnetizing are not required. Execution: With silicon bridge rectifier and transformer with insulated separate windings. Version in switching box for wall assembly (S) protection class IP54. Also available in build-in version (E) protection class IP00. In standard version switching by mains supply. Optional available with control element in box door (B). The dimensions for build-in version differ slightly from table. Ambient temp. max: Power supply, switchable: Frequency: 35 C 230 V AC / 400 V AC 50 / 60 Hz
SAV 876.06
build-in version (E)
F box version (S)
Magnetic nom. Max. magnet voltage DC current in V in A
Mains voltage in AC
Max. power at the magnet DC Weight in kg in W
Dimensions in mm
24 24 24 24 110 110 110 110
4.5 7 15 30 1.5 6 16 30
230 / 400 230 / 400 230 / 400 230 / 400 230 / 400 230 / 400 230 / 400 230 / 400
108 168 360 720 165 660 1760 3300
4.0 9.0 17.0 34.0 9.0 22.0 34.0 65.0
A 210 318 418 618 318 418 618 818
B 140 140 210 210 140 210 210 260
C 144 218 318 418 218 318 418 618
D 150 187 287 487 187 287 487 687
E 120 194 294 394 194 294 394 594
F 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9
Ordering example: Rectifier Unit SAV 876.06 - E / 110 / 30 / 230 Ordering key: Name SAV No. - Box. / Nom. Magnet voltage / Max. current / Mains voltage SAV Workholding and Automation www.sav-workholding.com Chapter 4 91
SAV is present on most important exhibitions worldwide
92
Chapter 4
CHAPTER 5
Quick die and mould clamping systems Quick die and mould clamping systems Electro-permanent magnetic quick clamping systems Magnetic separators Magnetic separators MA10 & 20 separation of parts Remarks information and application examples for clamping of moulds
Page 93 - 100
SAV-No. 243.78
Page 94-97 98-99
511.02 / 03
100
Chapter 5
93
Advantages for the plastic industry

When using Electro-Permanent Magnetic Quick Change Systems on plastic injection moulding machines
Optimized system for Injection Moulding Machines

- Solid construction and mounting - Low magnet height - Centre ring hardened and exchangeable - Due to modular pole design optional ejector preparation without loss of holding force - Pole separation with brass ensuring slit free and wearing resistant surface - Robust and safe air gap monitoring without additional sensors - Modular magnet approach ensures optimal surface coverage; no dead zones - Designed for maximum holding force (1600 daN per module)
Maximum flexibility
- Tool change in just a few minutes - No modification on tool/mould required - Universal clamping of different moulds - Optimal utilization of clamping surface; - no surface loss for mechanical or hydraulic clamping elements
Productivity
- Clear tool change savings and reduced machine down time - Automatic tool change possible - Reduced stocks - Smaller batches
Quality
- Force distribution over total clamping surface - Reduced stresses in moulds - Improved product quality, reduced waste
EP magnetic quick change system for 300 tons machine.
POWERFUL SAFE RELIABLE

94 Chapter 5 Technical data subject to change without prior notice
Applications
For electro-permanent magnetic quick change systems on plastic injection moulding machines. EP magnetic quick change system for 240 tons machine
Nominal break-away force at full coverage 570 kN. Pole gap with full-brass inlays, highest protection against wearing.
Electro-Permanent quick change system for Electro-Permanent quick change system for 2300 tons machine, 750 tons machine, in special execution with in special execution with parallel pole pitch. Prepared for rolling parallel pole pitch system for automatic tool change.
Chapter 5
95
Applications quick change system

For clamping of tools in the plastic industry
Electro-Permanent quick change system for 150 tons machine With rolling system for tool change.
Left: Fixed clamping plate with gantry and rolling system Right: Moving clamping plate with loading platform and falling bar Below: Sliding table with pre-heating station for warming-up of tools parallel to operation.
Magnetic quick clamping system with horizontal tool change machine - high process safety - limited tool-wearing, reduced maintenance costs - minimum change times - pre-heating parallel to operation - automatable - for workpieces up to 1000 kg
96
Chapter 5
Application deep pulling press

For electro-permanent magnetic quick clamping systems
Electro-Permanent quick clamping system for deep pulling press Top plate: with modular poles, nominal break-away load 64 tons, including air gap monitoring, water cooled execution Bottom plate: execution as top plate, with integrated hydraulic rolling bar
Magnetic tool clamping on presses - deep pulling and concealing tools for car roofs - minimum changing time - pre-heating parallel to operation - safety switch for vertical presses - hydraulic rolling bars for easier tool change - for workpiece weights up to 8000 kg
Chapter 5
97
Electro-Permanent Magnetic Quick Clamping System

For clamping of moulds or tools on presses Smaller batches, quicker delivery times and Just in Time delivery force the supplier to more frequent tool/mould change. Using the magnetic system SAV 243.78 tool change times of just a few minutes can be achieved.
SAV 243.78
THE INNOVATIVE SOLUTION FOR TOOL CHANGE
Use Clamping of moulds on injection moulding machines. Clamping of tools on presses (deforming) Execution of control unit The control unit is used for magnetizing and demagnetizing of the magnetic plates. Further safety features: - Storage of magnetic state of the magnetic plates - inductive air gap monitoring - safety switch The control unit is equipped with an integrated communication-interface to the machine. Interface options are: Euromap 70.0 for retrofitting Euromap 70.1 for integration in machine Nominal voltage: 400 V, 50 Hz Other voltages on request. Scope of supply - magnetic plates - centre rings, hardened - mounting and lifting bolts - control unit with steel box - connection cable - remote control unit (only with Euromap 70.0)
Execution of magnetic systems - solid construction and mounting - mounting according Euromap or SPI - optional ejector holes according Euromap or SPI - limited height - pole gap closed by brass inlays and protected against wearing - flexible design due to modular poles, also for optional ejector holes, without loss of holding force - additional threads in pole plate possible without loss of holding force - optimum surface utilization due to modular system, no dead zones - design for maximum holding force (1600 daN per module) - maximum operating temperature 100C - electro-permanent magnetic system for absolute safety during power failure - low magnetic field - robust, reliable inductive air gap monitoring - centre ring hardened and exchangeable
98
Chapter 5
Electro-Permanent Magnetic Quick Clamping System

For clamping of moulds or tools on presses
SAV 243.78
Quick clamping system SAV 243.78 1940 x 1660 250 - M24 01 for 1000 tons injection moulding machine.
Machine size in tons
Dimensions in mm
A 460 530 680 740 740 940 1290 1440 1610 1940 2140 2140 2590 2790 2780
B 460 530 650 740 740 940 1190 1440 1490 1660 1870 1870 2390 2390 2380
C 56 56 56 56 56 56 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60
D 125 125H8 125H8 160H8 160H8 160H8 200H8 200H8 250H8 250H8 250H8 250H8 250H8 315H8 350H8 350H8
H8
E M 12 M 16 M 16 M 16 M 16 M 20 M 20 M 20 M 24 M 24 M 24 M 24 M 24 M 30 M 30 M 30
Nominal break-away force in kN
C E
50 100 125 150 200 300 500 650 800 1000 1300 1500 2000 2500 3000 4000
on request on request
50 114 128 160 224 320 512 640 832 1024 1344 1536 2048 2560 3072 4000
A Because the technical execution is depending on the construction of the machine, these data should be interpreted as examples. On request we offer you the most relevant system required up to a machine size of 5400 tons.
Ordering example: Electro-Permanent Quick Clamping System SAV 243.78 - 1610 x 1490 - 250 - M 24 Ordering key: Name SAV No. - A x B - D - E SAV Workholding and Automation www.sav-workholding.com Chapter 5 99
DH8
Magnetic separators MA10 / MA20

Application - for separation of ferro-magnetic particles from fluids. - for granulate on plastic injection moulding machines. Executions: SAV 511.01, Type MA10: in bar shape, cross section circular:
SAV 511.01 / SAV 511.02
In normal, strong and extra strong executions.
SAV 511.02, Type MA20: in window, circular and square:
Tube cross-section C A
For round tube sections In normal and strong execution
For square tube sections In normal and strong execution. Also in switchable, Easy-clean, execution.
active
clean
DETAILED INFORMATION AND TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ON REQUEST
active
clean
100
Chapter 5
CHAPTER 6
Precision sine tables Special sine tables Precision sine table (also stainless execution) Precision sine table Precision sine tables (extreme low height) Precision sine table Precision sine table (enhanced holding force) Precision sine table Precision sine tables with lifting mechanism Magnetic tilting block with scale Precision sine table (also stainless execution) Precision sine table (without magnet) Precision sine tables (without magnet) Remarks Application examples Swivel on longitudinal axis Swivel on long./transv. axis Swivel on longitudinal axis Swivel on middle axis Swivel on longitudinal axis Swivel on longitudinal axis Swivel on longitudinal axis Swivel on middle axis Swivel on longitudinal axis Swivel on longitudinal axis Swivel on long./transv. axis Pole pitch P=1.9 mm P=1.9 mm P=1.9 mm P=1.9 mm P=15 mm P=4 /13 mm P=13/18/25 mm P=15 mm
Page 101 - 116
SAV-No. 245.01 245.02 245.04 245.06 245.07 245.09 245.10 245.44 235.21 235.71 235.72
Page 102-105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116
Chapter 6
101
Special Sine Table size 1200 x 300 mm with hydraulic drive
Motor driven swivelling table, length 12,000 mm, high precision with resolver, hydro-static axles, special pole-beams and hydraulic clamping, for combined machine milling and grinding
Sine Table with electro-permanent magnetic chuck and mechanical angle setting device.
102
Chapter 6
Special Sine Table with electro permanent magnet swivelling over 2 axis
Special Sine Table for high accuracy grinding (tolerance 0.01 at 1000 mm x 600 mm) including mechanical drive, measurement system and rigid hydraulic clamping system
rigid hydraulical clamping beams
optimized top plate with respect to rigidity and weight
inductive measurement system and display, resolution 0.5 m
Chapter 6
103
Special Sine Table for grinding of gas turbine parts
Circular sine table with Ceramic-Vacuum top plate, Diameter: 800 mm
Special Sine Table swivelling -90 to +90
Special Sine Table size 1000 x 150 mm, swivelling from -90 to +90
104
Chapter 6
3-Axis Sine Table for grinding of turbine parts
Special Sine Table with hydraulic fixure
Special Sine Table with hydraulic fixure for automotive parts
Special Sine Table for segment grinding machines, hydraulic driven, with rigid clamping Clamping surface 1000 x 500 mm
Chapter 6
105
Precision Sine Table

Swivel on longitudinal axis, with fine pole chuck Design: Swivel on the longitudinal axis. The base plate of the sine table is made of hardened steel (HRC 60), black-finished and precision ground. High accuracy due to extreme flat construction. Standard execution with permanent magnetic chuck. The sine tables are supplied in wooden storage cases up to and including size 450 x 150. With sine chart degrees / minutes in mm, precision long side stop and short side stop. Sine table and magnetic chuck also available in stainless steel execution (RF) in sizes 150 x 100 / 200 x 100 / 250 x 150 / 300 x 150. Angle precision: Planar parallelism: Shimming measure at 0: Angle range: Nominal holding force: Pole pitch: Magnetic field height: Pole plate wearing limit: 5 sec. 0.005 / 100 mm 3 mm 0 to 45 80 N/cm2 1.9 mm 6 mm 8 mm
SAV 245.01
Application: The angle is set according the sine principle, using an end-gauge. Fixation is achieved by side mounted pincers and by tightening the upper bearing clamps. B A
F D
Dimensions in mm in kg F 55 5.5 135 12.0 85 10.0 85 16.0 115 19.0 135 20.5 135 26.5 185 35.0 135 35.0 185 52.0 135 44.0 235 84.0 275 121.0 Weight
E at 0
A 140 150 175 250 255 250 300 300 350 400 450 500 600
B 70 150 100 100 130 150 150 200 150 200 150 250 300
C 170 190 215 290 295 290 340 340 390 440 490 560 660
D 100 165 115 115 145 165 165 215 165 215 165 270 320
0 E -2 68 79 77 77 77 79 79 79 87 87 87 94 94
Execution with flushing holes available against price adder. Other dimensions and executions also with electro magnetic or other magnetic system and all sizes of permanent magnetic chucks SAV 243.01 are available as sine table. With mechanical adjustment SAV 245.10 the overall height is increased by approx. 40 mm at 0 setting.
Ordering example: Precision Sine Table SAV 245.01 - 300 x 150 - RF Ordering key: Name SAV - No. - A x B - Execution 106 Chapter 6 Technical data subject to change without prior notice

Swivel on longitudinal and transverse axis, with fine pole chuck Design: Swivel on the longitudinal and transverse axis. The base plate of the sine table is made of hardened steel (HRC 60), black-finished and precision ground. High accuracy due to extreme flat type construction. Standard execution with permanent magnetic chuck. The sine tables are supplied in wooden storage cases with 2 sine charts degrees / minutes in mm, precision long side stop and short side stop. Angle precision: 5 sec. Planar parallelism: 0.005 / 100 mm Shimming measure at 0: 3 mm Angle range longitudinal axis: 0 to 45 Angle range transversal axis: 0 to 30 Nominal holding force: 80 N/cm2 Pole pitch: 1.9 mm Magnetic field height: 6 mm Pole plate wearing limit: 8 mm Application: The angle is set according the sine principle, using an end-gauge. Fixation is achieved by side mounted pincers and by tightening the upper bearing clamps.
SAV 245.02
E at 0
F D
F C
Dimensions in mm
A 175 255 300 350 400
B 100 130 150 150 200
C 210 290 335 385 435
D 140 170 190 190 240
0 E -2 108 119 121 121 117
F 160 / 115 240 / 145 285 / 160 335 / 160 385 / 210
Weight in kg
15.0 32.0 43.5 49.5 73.0
Execution with flushing holes available against price adder. Other dimensions and executions also with electro magnetic or other magnetic system and all sizes of permanent magnetic chucks SAV 243.01 are available as sine table.
Ordering example: Precision Sine Table SAV 245.02 - 400 Ordering key: Name SAV - No. - A SAV Workholding and Automation www.sav-workholding.com Chapter 6 107

Swivel on longitudinal axis, with extreme low height Design: Swivel on the longitudinal axis. The base plate of the sine table is made of hardened steel (HRC 60), black-finished and precision ground. High accuracy due to extreme flat construction. Standard execution with permanent magnetic chuck. ON/OFF-switching on top. The sine tables are supplied in wooden storage cases, with sine chart degrees / minutes in mm, precision long side stop and short side stop. Angle precision: 5 sec. Planar parallelism: 0.005 / 100 mm Shimming measure at 0: 3 mm Angle range: 0 to 45 Nominal holding force: 80 N/cm2 Pole pitch: 1.9 mm Magnetic field height: 6 mm Pole plate wearing limit: 6 mm Application: The angle is set according the sine principle, using an end-gauge. Fixation is achieved by side mounted pincers and by tightening the upper bearing clamps.
SAV 245.04
F D
E at 0
Dimensions in mm
A 175 150 255 300 350 400 450
B 100 150 130 150 150 200 150
C 215 190 295 340 390 440 490
D 115 165 145 165 165 215 165
0 E -2 60.0 62.5 60.0 62.5 70.5 71.0 70.5
F 85 135 115 135 135 185 135
Weight in kg
8.5 10.0 14.0 20.0 26.5 41.0 33.5
Execution with flushing holes available against price adder.
Precision Sine Table SAV 245.04 - 450 Name SAV No. - A 108 Chapter 6 Technical data subject to change without prior notice

Swivel on middle-axis to both sides Design Swivel on longitudinal axis. Sine table base plate and other parts made from tool steel. Hardened to HRC 60, black finished and precision ground. Standard execution with permanent magnetic chuck 243.01 Highest accuracy and stability in every position. Delivery in wooden storage case up to dimension 350 x 150 mm With sine table in of degrees / minutes in mm, precision long side stop and transverse side stop. Angle precision: 5 sec. Planar parallelism: 0.005 / 100 mm Angle range: -90 to +90 Nom. holding force: 80 N/cm2 Pole pitch: 1.9 mm Magnetic field height: 6 mm Pole plate wearing limit: 8 mm Application Setting of angles according sine principle, using an end-gauge up to 90.
SAV 245.06
AxB F F
E1
E2
E3
CxD Swivel 45 right
CxD 0 - position
CxD Swivel 90 left
Dimensions in mm
A 255 350 400 500 600
B 130 150 200 200 200
C 365 460 500 600 700
D 150 160 200 200 200
E1 160 175 220 220 220
E2 125 130 150 150 150
E3 160 175 220 220 220
F 60 70 95 95 95
Weight in kg
30.0 46.0 64.0 78.0 92.0
Other dimensions and executions also available with electro-magnet or other magnetic systems.
Ordering example: High precision sine table SAV 245.06 - 600 Name SAV No. - A Ordering key: SAV Workholding and Automation www.sav-workholding.com Chapter 6 109
Precision sine table with enhanced holding force

Swivel on longitudinal axis Design Swivel over middle axis. Sine table base plate and other parts made from tool steel. Hardened to HRC 60, black finished and precision ground. Highest accuracy at extreme flat construction. Standard execution with permanent magnetic chuck 243.11. Delivery with attached sine bar (SL) for angle setting in pole plate plane possible against price adder (SAV 487.40). Delivery in wooden storage case up to dimension 350 x 150 mm. With sine table in of degrees / minutes in mm, precision long side stop and transverse side stop. Angle precision: 5 sec. Planar parallelism: 0.005 / 100 mm End gauge in 0 3 mm Angle range: 0 to 45 Nom. holding force: 150 N/cm2 Pole pitch: 15 mm Pole plate wearing limit: 5 mm Application Setting of angles according the sine principle, using an end-gauge. Fixation is achieved by side mounted pincers and by tightening the upper bearing clamps.
SAV 245.07
not in standard supply order nr. SAV 487.40 A B
E at 0
F D
Dimensions in mm
A 250 300 350 400
B 150 150 150 200
C 290 340 390 440
D 165 165 165 215
0 E -2 84 84 84 84
F 135 135 135 185
Weight in kg
20.5 27.0 36.0 52.0
Other dimensions and executions on request. Also available with electro-magnet or other magnetic systems. All standard sizes of permanent magnetic chuck SAV 243.11 (chapter 1) are available as sine table.
Ordering example: High precision sine table SAV 245.07 - 400 Name SAV No. - A Ordering key: 110 Chapter 6 Technical data subject to change without prior notice

Swivel on longitudinal axis, with electro or electro-permanent chuck Design: Swivel on the longitudinal axis. The base plate of the sine table is made of hardened steel (HRC 60), black-finished and precision ground. Magnetic chuck housing stress-free annealed. High accuracy due to extreme flat construction. 4-point support for optimal security. The delivery includes a lifting support and setting table degrees / minutes in mm. Fluting stones for fixing on the machine table on bottom side of base plate. Side stops on back and side face sides. This sine table is executed either with electromagnetic with integrated water cooling (EM) or electro-permanent chuck (EP). Angle precision: 5 sec. Planar parallelism: 0.005 / 100 mm Shimming measure at 0: 3 mm Angle range: 0 to 45 Nominal holding force: 100 N/cm2 Pole pitch: 4 mm for Electro Permanent Chuck SAV 243.73 13 mm for Electro Magnetic Chuck SAV 243.42 Application: The angle is set according the sine principle, using an end-gauge.
SAV 245.09
F D
E at 0
Dimensions in mm
A 450 500 500
B 175 175 200
C 448 498 498
0 D E -1 F 203 125.5 175 203 125.5 175 228 125.5 200
Weight in kg
55.0 61.0 70.0
Suitable control unit SAV 876.10 (chapter 4) Other dimensions on request.
Ordering example: Precision Sine Table SAV 245.09 - 500 x 200 - EP Ordering key: Name SAV No. - A x B - Execution SAV Workholding and Automation www.sav-workholding.com Chapter 6 111
Precision Sine Table with lifting mechanism

Swivel on longitudinal axis, firmly attached on the machine table Design: Swivel on the longitudinal axis. The base plate of the sine table is made of steel, stress-free annealed. All built-on parts are hardened (HRC 60) and precision ground. Stable construction with high accuracy. Depending on size fitted with mechanical adjusting gear or hydraulic swivel support. High accuracy due to extreme flat construction. 4-point support for optimal security. Available with angle gauge and additional fixation on request. This sine table is standard executed with electro-permanent chuck SAV 243.70. Delivery with sine chart with degrees / minutes in mm, precision long side stop and short side stop, 3 m connecting cable, lacquered magnet body. Shimming measure at 0: 5 mm Angle range: 0 to 45 Angle precision: 5 sec. Planar parallelism: 0.005 / 100 mm Application: The angle is set according the sine principle, using an end-gauge.
SAV 245.10
E at 0
F D
Dimensions in mm
A 400 500 600 800
B 200 250 300 300
C 440 560 660 860
D 215 270 320 320
0 E -1* 157 159 159 159
F 175 86.0 225 138.0 275 199.5 270 250.0
Weight in kg
Suitable control units SAV 876.10 (chapter 04). Other sizes and executions on request. Also available with electro-magnet (E) or other magnetic systems. Please specify type of magnet when ordering. (see chapter 1, 2, 3)
*Depending on magnet type. The given heights refer to electro-permanent (EP) magnetic chuck SAV 243.70 (chapter 3)
Ordering example: Precision Sine Table SAV 245.10 - 800 - EP Ordering key: Name SAV No. - A - Magnet type 112 Chapter 6 Technical data subject to change without prior notice
Swivelling Magnetic Chuck with scale

Swivel on middle axis to both sides Design Stabile construction. Reading by means of degree-scale. Swivel with hand-lever. Switchable magnetic chuck with fine pole pitch 1.9 mm, can completely be swivelled. Angle range: Planar parallelism: -90 to +90 0.005 / 100 mm
SAV 245.44
Application Easy reading from degree-scale or with sine bar.
A C
G L
Dimensions in mm
A 130 175 250 250 300 350 450
B 70 100 100 125 150 150 150
C 52 146 206 209 256 306 406
D 50 50 50 50 50 50 50
E 100 100 100 100 100 100 100
F 52 92 52 56 56 92 92
G 25 25 25 25 25 25 25
H 14 14 14 14 14 14 14
I 95 95 95 95 95 95 95
K 15 15 15 15 15 15 15
L 225 293 365 365 418 468 568
M 125 145 125 128 128 145 145
Weight in kg
7.5 18.0 23.0 28.0 36.0 40.0 50.0
Ordering example: High precision sine table SAV 245.44 - 450 x 150 Ordering key: Name SAV No. - A x B SAV Workholding and Automation www.sav-workholding.com Chapter 6 113
Precision Sine Table also in stainless execution

With precision pull down vice SAV 231.06 Design: Swivel on the transverse axis to max. 45 degrees. The base plate of the sine table is made of hardened steel (HRC 60), black-finished and precision ground. Vice and sine table are also available in stainless steel execution (RF), for wire EDM. Delivery in wooden storage case. Angle precision: 5 sec. Planar parallelism: 0.005 / 100 mm Shimming measure at 0: 3 mm Swivel range: 0 - 45 Application: The angle is set according the sine principle, using an end-gauge. The precision pull down vice can be set in either X or Y direction. Standard accessories: 1 fixed end stop, 1 adjustable end stop, 1 wrench 1 sine chart in degrees / minute
SAV 235.21
F D
Mounted on pallet and zero reference system
Dimensions in mm
A 75 100 125
B 100 120 160
C 120 130 143
D 195 220 245
E 115 140 165
F 165 190 215
Weight in kg
15.0 20.0 30.0
Ordering example: Precision Sine Table SAV 235.21 - 100 - RF Ordering key: Name SAV No. - A - Execution 114 Chapter 6 Technical data subject to change without prior notice

Swivel on longitudinal axis, with tapped holes or T-slots Design: Swivel on the longitudinal axis. The base plate of the sine table is made of hardened steel (HRC 60), black-finished and precision ground. Swivelling table available with tapped holes M8 (G) or with T-slots (from size 400 x 200) against price adder (T). Mechanical angle setting available against price adder; however, total height will increase with approx. 40 mm at 0 setting. The sine tables are supplied in wooden storage cases up to and including size 450 x 150. With sine chart degrees / minutes in mm. Angle precision: 5 sec. Planar parallelism: 0.005 / 100 mm Shimming measure at 0: 3 mm Angle range: 0 to 45 Application: The angle is set according the sine principle, using an end-gauge. Depending on workpiece, a precision grinding vice or alternatively a switchable permanent magnetic chuck can be mounted on the swivel plate. Fixation is archieved by side mounted pincers and by tightening the upper bearing clamps. Swivel plate with T-slots (T) N number of slots B E at 0
SAV 235.71
F D 18 9 Swivel plate with tapped holes (G)
6,8
16
11
G H
Dimension in mm Weight in kg
A 100 160 175 250 350 400 450 500 600
B 50 160 100 150 150 200 150 200 300
C 100 160 175 250 350 400 450 500 600
D 95 205 145 195 195 245 195 245 345
E 47 47 47 52 60 60 60 65 70
F 65 175 115 165 165 215 165 215 315
G 12.5 20 20 25 25 25 25 25 25
H 12.5 20 22.5 25 25 25 25 25 25
I 25 20 20 25 25 25 25 25 25
J 12.5 20 30 25 25 25 25 25 25
L 50 35 50 50
M 100 80 100 100
N 2 2 2 3
3.0 9.0 7.5 14.0 26.0 37.0 33.5 48.5 90.0
Ordering example: Precision Sine Table SAV 235.71 - 600 - G Ordering key: Name SAV - No. - A - Execution SAV Workholding and Automation www.sav-workholding.com Chapter 6 115
M8

Swivel on longitudinal and transverse axis, with tapped holes Design: Swivel on the longitudinal and transverse axis. The base plate of the sine table is made of hardened steel (HRC 60), black-finished and precision ground. Swivelling table available with tapped holes M8 (G) or with T-slots (from size 400 x 200) against price adder (T). Mechanical angle setting available against price adder; however, total height will increase with approx. 40 mm at 0 setting. The sine tables are supplied in wooden storage cases up to and including size 400 x 200. With sine chart degrees / minutes in mm. Angle precision: 5 sec. Planar parallelism: 0.005 / 100 mm Shimming measure at 0: 3 mm Angle range longitudinal axis: 0 to 45 Angle range transversal axis: 0 to 30 Application: The angle is set according the sine principle, using an end-gauge. Very suitable for workpieces with 2 working planes. Fixation is achieved by side mounted pincers and by tightening the upper bearing clamp. A
SAV 235.72
E C
F D
Swivel plate with T-slots (T) N number of slots 18 9
Swivel plate with tapped holes (G) 6,8
16
11
G H
Dimension in mm
A 160 250 350 400 450
B 160 150 150 200 300
C 160 250 350 400 450
D 205 195 195 245 345
0 E -1 75 80 96 96 96
F 175 / 145 165 / 220 165 / 315 215 / 365 315 / 415
G 20 25 25 25 25
H 20 25 25 25 25
I 20 25 25 25 25
J 20 25 25 25 25
L 50 50
M 100 100
N 2 3
Weight in kg
12.0 17.5 36.0 52.0 84.0
Ordering example: Precision Sine Table SAV 235.72 - 450 - G Ordering key: Name SAV - No. - A - Execution 116 Chapter 6 Technical data subject to change without prior notice
M8
E at 0
CHAPTER 7
Lifting magnets Lifting magnets and handling devices Universal permanent lifting magnets Lifting magnets and handling devices Electro and electro-permanent lifting magnets Permanent magnetic plate lifters, hand lifters Permanent magnetic claw with lifting eye Permanent magnetic hand lifter Permanent magnetic plate lifter compact, with eye for crane use for transporting and holding by hand with high lifting force Remarks info and application examples compact execution for quick fixing custom designed executions
Page 117 - 124
SAV-No. 531.01 531.02
Page 118-120 121 122 123
531.20 531.90 531.92
124 124 124
Chapter 7
117
Lifting magnets and handling devices
Permanent lifting magnets type 531.01-500 for lifting of thick and large steel plates.
Application of 2 lifing magnets SAV 531.71 on a transverse beam.
Application of modified permanent lifting magnet; switching through an hydraulic cylinder. For use in ground drilling equipment.
118
Chapter 7

For quick fixing and secure lifting.
Lifting magnets and handling devices:

The rational transport of workpieces without further fixing equipment like ropes, loops, carabines and eyes is facilitated by the use of magnetic lifting magnets and handling devices. In view of the given nominal holding forces and workpiece characteristics, a secure lifting is guaranteed when the accident prevention regulations are observed (see technical advice and operation instructions). Depending on the type of application, the influences of material composition, state of heat treatment and surface condition on the nominal holding force should be observed. Advice: Magnetic chucks especially chucks with AlNiCo magnets should never be transported with lifting magnets, as a demagnetizing effect then occurs. When required, we can carry out repairs and service work on lifting magnets for our customers. The lifting magnets are tested according to the required safety regulations.
Electro lifting magnets in special execution With pole cones for withdrawing of small ferro-magnetic parts (chaoticly stocked)
Electro lifting magnet SAV 531.41 In use for transport of tubes. The tubes are thin-walled and therefore magnetically difficult to lift. (special execution with prism).
Technical advice and application examples of permanent, electro- and electro-permanent lifting magnets can be found in the following pages. Further details, especially regarding the possible lifting forces, are summarized in chapter 15.
Chapter 7
119

Special executions Lifting system in special execution with electro-permanent holding magnets for automated handling of steel sheets.
Permanent-lifting magnets for heavy large plates (special devices on request).
120
Chapter 7
Universal Permanent Lifting Magnet

Compact execution with high lifting power Use: Compact and light lifting tool for safe, easy and quick transport of heavy workpieces, equipment and ferromagnetic materials in workshop and warehouse. Design: Robust design with smooth ON/OFF switching by turning the lever 120o. Equipped with security lock. The contact surface of the magnet consists of two longitudinal poles with prism. Due to the use of neodymium magnetic material these lift magnets have an enormous lifting capacity related to their size and weight. The break-away-force of e.g. the 250 kg version is at least 60 times its own weight. The lifting magnets can easily be switched by hand in case its magnetic circuit is closed; so when the magnet is placed on the workpiece. Suitable for flat- and round material. For indoor use only. For outdoor use special sealed executions are available on request Delivery includes certificate and operating manual.
Nom. capacity in daN
SAV 531.01
Break-away force in daN
Airgap in mm
102
Nominal capacity on flat material * Nominal capacity on round material Min. workpiece diameter Max. workpiece diameter Length Width Height to crane hook Weight
in daN in daN in mm in mm in mm in mm in mm in kg
125 40 50 100 93 60 110 2.6
250 125 60 200 152 100 164 10.0
500 1000 2000 250 500 1000 65 100 150 270 300 350 246 305 480 120 140 165 164 216 251 20.0 40.0 90.0
* The nominal lifting capacity is based on a safety factor of at least 3, assuming ground poles and a 50 mm thick St 37 workpiece. Ordering example: Universal Permanent Lifting Magnet SAV 531.01 - 2000 Ordering key: Name SAV No. - Nominal capacity SAV Workholding and Automation www.sav-workholding.com Chapter 7 121
Lifting Magnets and Handling Devices

For lifting and swivelling of plates and discs by 90 0 Use: As Universal Permanent Lifting Magnet SAV 531.01, equipped with additional lifting arm for horizontal to vertical manipulation and vice versa, allowing vertical transportation of workpieces, plates and discs. Design: Robust design with smooth ON/OFF switching by turning the lever 120o. Equipped with security lock. The contact surface of the magnet consists of two longitudinal poles. Lifting arm can easily and quickly be (dis-)mounted. With two-step end-stop and adjustable magnet position. A secure end-stop of the workpiece is important for vertical transport. Variable lifting eye for adjusting the centre of gravity during vertical transport dependant on the workpiece. Delivery including certificates and operating manual.
SAV 531.02
workpiece center of gravity
adjustable to center of gravity
diameter max. 800/1000 mm
Nominal capacity on flat material * Max. break away force Length Height with lift eye Width Min./ max. workpiece width/diameter Min./ max. workpiece length For workpiece thickness Weight
in daN 250 500 in daN 800 1600 in mm 958 1158 in mm 255 255 in mm 210 275 in mm 300 - 800 300 - 1000 in mm 200 - 2000 250 - 2000 in mm 4 6 in kg 27.0 39.0
* The nominal lifting capacity is based on a safety factor of at least 3, assuming ground poles and a 50 mm thick St 37 workpiece.
Ordering example: Universal Lifting Arm with Permanent Magnet SAV 531.02 - 500 Ordering key: Name SAV No. - Nominal holding force 122 Chapter 7 Technical data subject to change without prior notice
Electro- and Electro-Permanent Lifting Magnets

Custom designed executions Use: Special lifting magnets and systems made to customer specifications. Required information: - application - dimensions and shape of workpiece - material - surface and airgaps - hardness - weight - duty cycle Design: Electro-Lifting Magnets with integrated rectifier and connector for 230 V / 50/60 Hz possible.
Chapter 7
123
Permanent Magnetic Claw with lifting eye

Compact, with eye for crane use Use: For lifting of workpieces by crane, which are too heavy to transport by hand. Execution: Stable construction with lever for easy release of workpieces (sheets etc.) Safety according GS standard. Nominal holding force Nominal drag force Break-away force Length Height with grip Weight daN daN daN mm mm kg 250 100 750 290 125 7.5 300 125 900 290 180 10.5
SAV 531.20
Both types are for horizontal and vertical handling. Especially suitable for lifting of sheets of 4 mm thickness and up. SAV 531.20 - 300 SAV - No. - Nominal holding force
Ordering example: Permanent Magnetic Claw with lifting eye Ordering key: Name
Permanent Magnetic Hand Lifter

For transporting and holding by hand Use: This magnet is used to lift, transport and move workpieces. Especially suitable for sharp edged, oily, dirty and hot parts. Design: High lifting / sliding force, stable housing, workpiece is released with lever. Max. ambient temperature: 150 oC Nominal lifting force: 18 daN Length Width Height Height with grip Weight in mm in mm in mm in mm in kg 92 50 32 122 1.0
SAV 531.90
Ordering example: Permanent Magnetic Hand Lifter SAV 531.90 Ordering key: Name SAV - No.
Permanent Magnetic Plate Lifter

With high lifting force Use: This magnet is used to lift, transport and move sheet metal plates. Design: Very high lifting force, approx. 85 times own weight. Stable housing. Safety according GS standard. Nominal lifting force* Break-away force Drag force Length Width Weight daN daN daN mm mm kg 120* 170* 300* 240* 340* 600* 70 100 180 140 140 160 84 116 180 1.4 1.8 3.5
SAV 531.92
* measured with safety factor 2 on bright drawn material St 37 K
Ordering example: Permanent Magnetic Plate Lifter SAV 531.92 - 300 Name SAV - No. Ordering key: 124 Chapter 7 Technical data subject to change without prior notice
CHAPTER 8
Pallets, Circular Pallets Electro-Permanent Magnetic Pallets System overview pallets Screw threaded pallet Sectioned T-slot pallet T-slot pallet Uni pallet Magnet pallet Power magnet pallet Multi-Pallet Screw threaded circular pallet T-slot circular pallet Uni circular pallet Circular magnet integrated in ball Power magnet circular pallet Permanent magnetic chucks Magnetic chucks for EDM applications Magnets for erosion work Permanent Magnetic Chuck Permanent Magnetic Chuck Information and application examples Remarks and application examples extreme low height stainless execution Remarks on request system 150, 200, 240, 280, 320, 480, 650 stainless steel top plate with threads hardened stainless steel sections from aluminium universal use with pole plate steel / stainless steel (V4A) with pole plate steel / stainless steel (V4A) for clamping of electrodes, aluminum housing Stainless steel plate with threaded screw holes stainless tool steel univeral use execution in permanent- and power magnet aluminium housing with steel top plate Pole pitch P = 1.9 mm P = 1.9 mm
Page 125 - 170
SAV-No. 220.73 220.10 220.20 220.21 220.40 220.30 220.31 220.50 220.15 220.25 220.45 220.39 244.07
Page 126 128-129 130 130 132 132 134 134 136 138 138 139 140 141
243.07 243.16
144 144 145 145
more magnetic chucks can be found in chapter 1 Precision pull-down vices, inserts, 3-jaw chuck T-slot mechanical clamp, single T-slot mechanical clamp, double Precision pull-down vice Precision mini pull-down vice Precision pull-down vice Precision 3-jaw chuck Holding block Precision sine tables Precision sine table (also stainless exec.) Precision sine table (also stainless exec.) Precision sine table (also stainless exec.) Precision sine table, extreme low height more sine tables in chapter 6 swivel on longitudinal axis swivel on transverse axis swivel on longitudinal and transverse axis swivel on longitudinal axis 235.20 235.21 235.22 245.04 149 150 149 151 stainless tool steel stainless tool steel stainless tool steel stainless tool steel also in stainless execution with holding block with quick clamp 3-jaw chuck 204.04 204.04 231.01 231.02 231.06 260.11 260.11 - B 142 142 146 146 147 148 148
Chapter 8
125
Elektro-Permanent-Magnetic Pallets
on request
SAV 220.73
EP-magnet pallet SAV 220.73-320x320-210V with industrial connector
EP-magnet pallet SAV 220.73-150x150-210V with angular side stops and automatic docking
AUTOMATION SOLUTIONS
PALLETIZING SYSTEMS
126 Chapter 8 Technical data subject to change without prior notice
CHAPTER 8
Neodymium magnetic blocks, clamping block Multiple-prism clamping block Permanent magnetic block Permanent magnetic switchable block Permanent magnetic block Neodym magnetic block Coolant-hose holders, holding magnets Coolant-hose holder, single Coolant-hose holder, multiple Holding magnets with permanent holding magnet with permanent holding magnet for reliable flushing stainless execution Pole pitch -
Page 125 - 170
SAV-No. 207.01 242.01 242.02 242.11 242.12
Page 152 153 153 154 155
fine and super-fine transverse poles P = 1.3/4 mm with 3 magnetic clamping surfaces P = 0.5/1 mm 4 magnetic sides with extreme high holding force P = 2/2 mm P = 2/4 mm
581.01 581.02 581.03
156 156 156
Electrode holders, collets and collet holders Electrode uni fixture Set electrode fixtures Adapter flange Exchange set Gasket Collet electrode fixture Electrode fixture Collet electrode fixture Precision Rotary Indexers Precision rotary indexer NC Rot. indexers, indexers w. direct drive Transport systems and pallet changers Rolling transporter Lifting device with fork Lifting device, changeable Automatic pallet changers for transport of pallets for loading and unloading for loading and unloading on request 228.01 228.01 - KP 228.01 - GP 228.20 166-167 168 168 169-170 suitable for eroding frames examples and possibilities of SAV 434.50 162-163 164-165 stainless tool steel in 2 basic variants stainless tool steel stainless tool steel aluminum / plastic stainless tool steel stainless tool steel stainless tool steel 581.07 -UEH 581.07 -SET 581.07 -FA 581.07 -W 581.07 -DS 581.07 -ZEH 581.07 -WEH 439.67 157 158-159 160 160 160 161 161 161
Chapter 8
127
PRODUCT RANGE OVERVIEW PALLETS

System 150
Dimensions: 150 and up Magnet
SAV 220.30
System 200
Dimensions: 200 x 200
SAV 220.30
System 240
SAV 220.30
System 280
SAV 220.30
On request
Power Magnet
SAV 220.36
SAV 220.31
SAV 220.31
SAV 220.31
On request
Sectioned T-slot On request
SAV 220.20
SAV 220.20
SAV 220.20
Screw threaded
SAV 220.15
SAV 220.10
SAV 220.10
SAV 220.10
T-slot
SAV 220.25
SAV 220.21
SAV 220.21
SAV 220.21
Universal
SAV 220.45
SAV 220.40
SAV 220.40
SAV 220.40
ADAPTABLE TO ALL AVAILABLE REFERE

grinding sinker EDM wire EDM
128
Chapter 8
PRODUCT RANGE OVERVIEW PALLETS

System 320
Dimensions: 320 x 320 and 320 x 160
SAV 220.30
System 480
SAV 243.70 only as EP-magnet
System 650
SAV 243.70 only as EP-magnet
on request SAV 220.31 SAV 220.31 SAV 220.31
on request
on request SAV 220.20 SAV 220.20 SAV 220.20
on request
SAV 220.10
SAV 220.10
SAV 220.10
SAV 220.21
SAV 220.21
SAV 220.21
SAV 220.40
SAV 220.40
SAV 220.40
NCE SYSTEMS FOR THE APPLICATIONS:

measuring milling turning
Chapter 8
129
Screw-Threaded Pallet
Material: Aluminium base with screwed-on hardened and stainless steel top plate with threaded screw holes. Technical Specifications: - Parallelism: < 0.02 mm - Top plate: hardened - Holding elements SAV 204.04 available on request (page 22)
SAV 220.10
Dimensions (mm) System
200 240 280 320 320 480 650
A 200 240 280 320 320 480 650
B 200 240 280 320 160 280 340
C 42 42 44 52 52 50 57
D M8 M8 M8 M8 M8 M8 M8
E 25 25 25 25 25 50 50
F 25 25 25 25 25 50 50
49 81 81 121 55 162 242
7.8 11.0 15.0 22.0 10.5 29.0 43.0
Threaded Threaded holes holes (mm) grid (mm) Threaded Weight holes (kg)
Ordering example: Screw threaded pallet SAV 220.10 - 320 x 320 - Reference system* - Adaptation* Ordering key: Name SAV-No. - A x B - Reference system* - Adaptation*
Sectioned T-Slot Pallet

Material: Aluminium base with screwed-on hardened and stainless steel section top plates.
SAV 220.20
Technical Specifications: - Parallelism: < 0.02 mm - Top plate: section plates hardened - Holding elements SAV 204.04 available on request (page 22) - Threaded holes grid 50 x 50 mm (F and G)
D C H
System
200 240 280 320 320 480 650
A 200 240 280 320 320 480 650
Dimensions (mm) Dimensions T-slots (mm) Threaded Threaded holes T-slots grid (mm) holes (mm) grid (mm)
B 200 240 280 320 160 280 340
C 40 43 45 52 52 50 57
6 6 6 6 6 6 6
D H8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8
10 10 10 10 10 10 10
E M8 M8 M8 M8 M8 M8 M8
F 50 50 50 50 50 50 50
G 50 50 50 50 50 50 50
H 90 70 70 75 75 70 85
Weight Sections (kg)
A G E
3 4 5 5 5 8 10
8.0 9.5 14.1 22.0 9.5 25.0 46.5
Ordering example: Sectioned T-Slot Pallet SAV 220.20 - 320 x 320 - 6 - Reference system* - Adaptation* Ordering key: Name SAV - No. - A x B - D - Reference system* - Adaptation* 130 Chapter 8 Technical data subject to change without prior notice
Application Examples
Pallet type: Screw Threaded Pallet SAV 220.10 - 320 x 320 Reference system* with SAV 581.07 - UEH
Pallet type: Screw Threaded Pallet SAV 220.10 - 320 x 320 Reference system*
Pallet type: Sectioned Pallet SAV 220.20 - 280 x 280 Reference system*
*Please specify reference system and robot adaption; we can advice!
Pallet type: Sectioned Pallet SAV 220.20 - 240 x 240 Reference system* SAV Workholding and Automation www.sav-workholding.com Chapter 8 131
T-Slot Pallet
Material: Aluminium
SAV 220.21
Technical Specifications: - Parallelism: < 0.02 mm - Holding elements SAV 204.04 available on request (page 22)
D C
200 240 280 320 320 480 650
A 200 240 280 320 320 480 650
B 200 240 280 320 160 280 340
C 26 26 28 30 30 48 50
Dimensions T-slots (mm)
6 6 6 6 6 6 6
D H8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8
T-slots grid Weight (mm) T-Slots (kg)
10 10 10 10 10 10 10
E 90 70 70 75 75 70 85
3 3.0 4 5.2 5 6.5 5 9.5 5 4.7 8 16.5 10 29.0
Ordering example: T-Slot Pallet SAV 220.21 - 320 x 320 - 6 - Reference system* - Adaptation* Ordering key: Name SAV - No - A x B - D - Reference system* - Adaptation*
Uni Pallet
Material: Aluminium
SAV 220.40
Technical Specifications: - Parallelism: < 0.02 mm - Universal application
A
System Dimensions (mm)
200 240 280 320 320 480 650
A 200 240 280 320 320 480 650
B 200 240 280 320 160 280 340
C 26 2.8 26 5.0 28 6.3 40 12.6 40 6.3 40 20.0 40 40.0
Weight (kg)
Ordering example: Uni Pallet SAV 220.40 - 320 x 320 - Reference system* - Adaptation* Ordering key: Name SAV - No. - A x B - Reference system* - Adaptation* 132 Chapter 8 Technical data subject to change without prior notice
Pallet type: T-Slot Pallet SAV 220.21 - 240 x 240 Reference system*
Pallet type: Screw Threaded Pallet SAV 220.10 - 240 x 240 Reference system*
Pallet type: Magnet Pallet SAV 220.30 - 320 x 320 Reference system*
Pallet type: Screw Threaded Pallet SAV 220.10 - 240 x 240 Reference system* SAV Workholding and Automation www.sav-workholding.com Chapter 8 133
Magnet Pallet
Material: Aluminium base with St 37 / stainless steel (V4A) Pole pate Technical Specifications: - Parallelism: < 0.01 mm - Can be executed with threaded holes for side or angled stops - Magnetic field height: 4 mm - Pole plate wearing limit: 3 mm - Holding force: 80 N/cm2 - Pole pitch: 1.9 mm
SAV 220.30
C*
B
0,5 Dimensions (mm) System 1,5 St 37
200 240 280 320 320
A 200 240 280 320 320
B 200 240 280 320 160
C 46 46 67 58 58
sections D 1 204.5 1 alt.2 204.5 2 246.0 2 alt.1 246.0 1
Switchable Weight (kg)
15.0 19.0 25.0 32.0 16.0
V4A
V4A
Ordering example: Magnet Pallet SAV 220.30 - 320 x 320 - Reference system* - Adaptation* Ordering key: Name SAV-No. - A x B - Reference system* - Adaptation*
Power Magnet Pallet

Material: Aluminium base with St 37 / stainless steel (V4A) Pole plate
SAV 220.31
Technical Specifications: - Low weight with high holding force - Parallelism: < 0.01 mm - Pole plate wearing limit: 2 mm - Holding force: 140 N/cm2 - Also available in stainless steel - Can be executed with threaded holes for side or angled stops - Low magnetic field height
and High Speed Cutting (HSC)
Important: Workpiece does not require full magnetic surface!
A E F
A B 240 240 240 280 280 280 320 320 320
sections (kg) C* D E F 60 126.0 1 18.0 60 166.0 80.0 80.0 2 21.5 67 206.0 80.0 80.0 2 alt.1 25.0
Switchable Weight
* is determine by reference systems
Ordering example: Power Magnet Pallet SAV 220.31 - 320 x 320 - Reference system* - Adaptation* Ordering key: Name SAV - No - A x B - Reference system* - Adaptation* 134 Chapter 8 Technical data subject to change without prior notice
Accuracy: 0.001 mm
Pallet type: POWER Magnet Pallet SAV 220.31 - 320 x 320 Reference system*
Pallet type: POWER Magnet Pallet for HSC-Milling SAV 220.31 - 320 x 320 Reference system* SAV Workholding and Automation www.sav-workholding.com Chapter 8 135
Multi Pallet
Material: Housing out of aluminium and electrode fixtures out of stainless and hardened steel. Application: For milling of electrodes directly in its typical clamping fixture.
SAV 220.50
Technical Specifications: - repeatability: 0.002 mm - Indexing: 4 x 90 - Holding force: 12000 N - simple mechanical operation - only 1/2 turn to lock or unlock Electrode clamping system
A E
4-positions
6-positions
Reference system
240 280 320 280 320
A 240 280 320 280 320
B 240 280 320 280 320
clamping positions
C 4 4 4 6 6
D 140 180 180 180 180
E 140 180 180 90 90
Weight (kg)
15.0 17.0 19.0 26.0 28.0
Ordering example: Multi Pallet SAV 220.50 - 320 x 320 - 4 - Reference system - electrode fixture Name SAV - No. - A x B - C - Reference system - electrode fixture Ordering key: 136 Chapter 8 Technical data subject to change without prior notice
Special application: 4-positions fixture Dimensions: 280 x 280 - 4
Electrode clamping system Pallet type: Multi Pallet SAV 220.50 - 280 x 280 Reference system*
*Please specify reference system and adaption. We can advice! Electrode clamping system Special application: 6-positions fixture Dimensions: 380 x 320 - 6
Electrode clamping system Special application: 4-positions fixture Dimensions: 280 x 280 - 4 Reference system
Electrode clamping system Special application: 6-positions fixture Dimensions: 320 x 320 - 6
Reference system SAV Workholding and Automation www.sav-workholding.com Chapter 8 137
Screw Threaded Circular Pallet

Material: Aluminium base with screwed-on hardened and stainless steel top plate with threaded screw holes. Technical Specifications: - Parallelism: < 0.02 mm - Top plate: hardened - Holding elements SAV 204.04 available on request (page 22)
SAV 220.15
E C
Diameter Thickness Threaded Threaded holes (mm) (mm) holes (mm) grid (mm) Threaded Weight holes (kg)
System
150
A 150
B 40
C M8
D 25
E 25
24
3.5
Ordering example: Screw Threaded Circular Pallet SAV 220.15 - 150 - Reference system Ordering key: Name SAV - No - A - Reference system
T-Slot Circular Pallet

Material: Stainless tool steel, hardened Technical Specifications: - Parallelism: < 0.02 mm - Clamping elements SAV 204.04 available on request (page 22)
SAV 220.25
System
Diameter Thickness Dimensions T-slots grid Weight (mm) (mm) (mm) T-slots (mm) T-Slots (kg)
Ordering example: T-Slot Circular Pallet SAV 220.25 - 150 - 6 - Reference system* Ordering key: Name SAV - No. - A - C - Reference system* 138 Chapter 8 Technical data subject to change without prior notice
150
A 150
B 40
C H8 6
D 40
5.0
Uni Circular Pallet

Material: Aluminium Technical Specifications: - Parallelism: < 0.02 mm - Clamping elements available on request
SAV 220.45
System
Diameter Thickness Weight (mm) (mm) (kg)
150
A 150
B 40
1.8
Ordering example: Uni Circular Pallet SAV 220.45 - 150 - Reference system* Ordering key: Name SAV - No. - A - Reference system*
Alternative Excutions
Workpiece Excenter nut SAV 204.39
Pallet type: Screw-threaded Circular Pallet SAV 220.15 - 150 - Reference system* Workpiece End stop T-slot mech. clamp, single SAV 204.04 Pallet type: T-Slot Circular Pallet SAV 220.25 - 150 - Reference system*
End stop Workpiece Pallet type: Magnet Circular Pallet SAV 220.36 - 160 - Reference system* Ordering example: Ordering key: SAV Workholding and Automation www.sav-workholding.com Chapter 8 139
Circular Magnet integrated in Ball

Material: Ball hard plastic / housing aluminium Execution of permanent magnet (PE): - Pole plate St 37 / Brass Execution of power magnet (PO): - Pole plate St 37 / stainless steel (V4A) Application: Polishing, measuring, assembling, laserwelding. Technical Specifications: Optimal approach to workpiece by setting in desired position.
SAV 220.39
B A
System
Dimensions (mm)
PE PO
A B C 100 140 110 100 140 110
Weight Holding power Pole pitch (kg) (N/cm) (mm)
Magnet field height (mm)
3 3
80 140
11 6
10 10
Execution: Circular magnet PE Application: Measuring
Execution: Circular magnet PE Application: For polishing and laser welding
Ordering example: Magnet Circular Pallet SAV 220.39 - PE Ordering key: Name SAV - No. - Type 140 Chapter 8 Technical data subject to change without prior notice
Power-Magnet Circular Pallet

Use: For workpieces that are particularly difficult to clamp, such as ferrotic and hard metals containing cobalt, as well as very small workpieces. Features: Aluminium housing, pole plate made from tool steel. Extremely high holding force through a specially developed construction using neodymium-iron-boron magnets. Available with flange on request (SAV 248.90 to 248.94, see chapter 06). Technical Specifications: - Holding force: - Magnetic field height: - Pole plate wearing limit: 140 N/cm2 4 mm 3 mm
SAV 244.07
pole picture
L K J
I H G
A B+0.5 2 100 65 125 65 160 65 180 65 200 65
C 70 95 125 125 125
D 4 4 4 4 4
E 90 110 140 160 180
F G H M6 (4x) M8 (4x) 88 M10 (4x) - 104 M10 (4x) 124 84 M10 (4x) 134 104
I 48 54 54 64 74
J K 98 - 134 134 97 158 110
L 74 67 61 61 73
2.0 3.0 4.5 6.5 8.5
CH7
F
E
Also suitable for small parts 6 10
thickness 0.8 mm *Please indicate reference system and adapters, we are glad to advices you!
Execution: Circular power magnet pallet SAV 244.07 - 160 - Reference system*
Ordering example: Power-Magnet Circular Pallet SAV 244.07 - 160 - Reference system* Ordering key: Name SAV - No. - A - Reference system* SAV Workholding and Automation www.sav-workholding.com Chapter 8 141
10 0
T-Slot Mechanical Clamp Single

Material: Stainless tool steel, hardened Application: For single sideways clamping of very low workpieces for EDM Technical Specifications: Complete with nut and clamping piece
SAV 204.04
A
Width (mm) Length (mm) F1 (kN) F2 (kN) Weight (kg)
System
F1 F2
6-E 8-E 10 - E
5.6 7.6 9.6
ca. 32 ca. 36 ca. 40
2.5 3.2 4.0
0.3 0.4 0.5
0.3 0.5 0.7
Ordering example: T-Slot Mechanical Clamp SAV 204.04 - 10 - E Name SAV-No. - System - Single Ordering key:
T-Slot Mechanical Clamp Double

Material: Stainless tool steel, hardened Application: For double sideways clamping of very low workpieces for EDM Technical Specifications: Complete with nuts and clamping pieces
SAV 204.04
A
System Width (mm) Length (mm) F1 (kN) F2 (kN) Weight (kg)
F1 F2
F1 F2
6-D 8-D 10 - D
5.6 7.6 9.6
ca. 50 ca. 54 ca. 58
2.5 3.2 4.0
0.3 0.4 0.5
0.5 0.7 0.9
B Ordering example: T-Slot Mechanical Clamp SAV 204.04 - 10 - D Name SAV-No. - System - Double Ordering key: 142 Chapter 8 Technical data subject to change without prior notice
Reference System*
SAV workholding section, suitable for T-Slot Mechanical Clamps
Workpiece T-Slot Mechanical Clamp, single SAV 204.04 - 10 - E
Workpiece
* Please specify reference system and robot adaption; we can advice! T-Slot Mechanical Clamp, single SAV 204.04 - 10 - E
T-Slot Mechanical Clamp, double SAV 204.04 - 10 - D
Execution: T-Slot Mechanical Clamp, single SAV 204.04 - 10 - E Application of SAV workholding section in wire EDM
Execution: T-Slot Mechanical Clamp, single Ordering example: Ordering key: SAV 204.04 - 10 - E SAV Workholding and Automation www.sav-workholding.com Chapter 8 143
Magnets for erosion work

Remarks and application examples
Magnets and clamping devices for spark erosion work

When using magnets and mechanical clamping devices on erosion machines, there are some details to be taken into account. Especially the use in aggressive dielectric of the wire erosion machines ask for the highest requirements regarding corrosion resistency of the clamping devices. Important objective is also the sealing of the magnets. In order to prevent sticking of the removed material to the workpiece, and thereby the danger for short-circuit, mostly magnets with a low magnetic field are used. Independent to this, one should see to an adequate flushing with e.g. top magnets. As magnetic chucks have an unavoidable deformation of some m due to the holding force, it is adviced to grind the pole plate in switched-on position. In order not to endanger the available holding forces, one should take into account the maximum consumption and allowable machining of these pole plates. The nominal holding forces indicated per workpiece surface, are based on a testing workpiece from St37 (mild steel), length 100 mm, width 100 mm and thickness 40 mm with ground surface. Further influences on the holding forces can be derived from the applicable chapters and in the detailed technical advice given in chapter 15 of this catalogue. Precision sine table Magnetic chuck Permanent magetic beam Magnetic suction top Holding magnets SAV 245.40 SAV 243.07 SAV 243.15 SAV 581.04 SAV 581.03
Magnetic pallet SAV 220.30 Spark erosion with permanent magnetic chucks Execution with longitudinal poles and 2 separated switchable clamping zones. The magnet is especially suitable due to its low magnetic field of approx. 4 mm.
Magnetic clamping tools for spark erosion Magnetic chucks and blocks with sinetable make a rational workholding and angle setting possible. The permanent magnetic beams in front hold the workpiece available for the use of magnetic suction top. In combination with the holding magnets for closing of holes this gives a reliable flushing.
Permanent magnetic chucks With reference system and flushing holes. On request SAV supplies their erosion workholding tools with all common adapters. Magnetic chuck SAV 243.07
Precision sine tables with magnetic chuck and precision pull-down vice For machining of ferro-magnetic workpieces with tilting over longitudinal and transverse axis and for clamping of non-magnetic materials. Precision sine table: SAV 245.02 Precision pull-down vice: SAV 231.06
Permanent magnetic chucks With reference system for use in dielectric fluid. On / off switching from top. The workpieces are applied outside the machine and their position is measured and set. Permanent magnetic chuck: SAV 243.07
144
Chapter 8

With fine transverse pole pitch P = 1,9 mm Use: Very suitable for thin parts. Features: Extremely low height. ON-OFF switching from above. Laminations 0.5 mm brass / 1.4 mm steel. Flushing channel(s) available at a surcharge. Suitable for adaption on zero reference system on request. Nominal holding force: 80 N/cm2 Magnetic field height: 6 mm Pole plate wearing limit: 6 mm
Dimension in mm
SAV 243.07
A 175 255 150 250 300 350 450 400
B 100 130 150 150 150 150 150 200
C+0,5 2 32.0 32.0 34.5 34.5 34.5 34.5 34.5 35.0
D 185 265 160 260 310 360 460 410
E 11.5 11.5 11.5 11.5 11.5 11.5 11.5 11.5
F 122 200 96 194 246 295 396 344
Weight in kg
4.5 8.5 6.0 10.0 12.5 14.0 18.0 23.0
1,4
0,5
F D SAV 243.07 - 450 x 150 SAV - No. - A x B
Ordering example: Permanent Magnetic Chuck Ordering key: Name

With fine pole pitch P = 1.9 mm Use: For small, medium and large workpieces. Adaptable to zero-reference systems Features: Uninterrupted transverse pole arrangement. Constant holding force over the entire pole surface area and along the side faces. Laminations 0.5 mm brass / 1.4 mm stainless steel Also available in combination with stainless sine table SAV 245.01-RF (see chapter 6). Non-stainless execution SAV 243.01 can be found in chapter 1 Nominal holding force: Magnetic field height: Pole plate wearing limit:
Dimensions in mm
stainless execution
SAV 243.16
55 N/cm2 6 mm 8 mm
1,4
0,5
A 150 200 250 300
B 100 100 150 150
C 50 50 50 50
D 114 164 215 265
Weight in kg
6.0 8.0 14.2 19.7
A D C
C B
Ordering example: Permanent Magnetic Chuck SAV 243.16 - 300 - RF Ordering key: Name SAV - No. - A - stainless execution SAV Workholding and Automation www.sav-workholding.com Chapter 8 145
Precision Pull Down Vice

Material: Chromium steel through hardened to HRC 58 and ground on all sides Technical Specifications: - large capacity - pull-down-system - clamp-nuts on 4 sides - quick adjustment - stainless type for A=35 and A=48 Square-accuracy: 0.005 / 100 mm Parallel-accuracy: 0.003 / 100 mm Scope of supply: - hexagon key - wooden case optional
SAV 231.01
light milling
Dimensions in mm
A 35 48 63 73 98 125 150
B 170 170 172 190 230 300 350
C D 90 50 90 50 90 60 100 70 125 80 160 98 210 100
E in kg optional ord.no. 25 1.4 SAV 539.03 25 1.9 SAV 539.03 30 3.7 SAV 539.03 35 4.6 SAV 539.03 40 11.4 SAV 539.05 48 18.5 SAV 539.09 50 24.9 SAV 539.09
Weight
Wooden case
C E
Ordering example: Precisions Pull Down Vice SAV 231.01 - 35 - RF Name SAV - No. - A - Execution Ordering key:
Precision Mini Pull Down Vice

Material: Chromium steel through hardened to HRC 55 and ground on all sides For precision grinding and EDM applications on small workpieces. Can also be used as electrode holding device for spark erosion SAV 581.05 Type EH 25. Technical Specifications: - pull-down-system - mounting threads for use as electrode holder - stainless type on request (RF) Square-accuracy: 0.005 / 100 mm Parallel-accuracy: 0.003 / 100 mm Scope of supply: - hexagon key - wooden case optional
Dimensions in mm Weight Wooden case in kg optional ord.no.
SAV 231.02
A 25
B 65
C 20
D 30
E 10
0.3 SAV 539.01 B A
Ordering example: Precisions Mini Pull Down Vice SAV 231.02 - RF Name SAV-No. - Execution Ordering key: 146 Chapter 8 Technical data subject to change without prior notice

For precise clamping Product specification: - chromium steel through hardened HRC 60 and ground on all sides - pull-down-system - quick adjustment with socket pin - clamp-nuts on 4 sides - mounting threads for use with workpiece-stop - workpiece-stop fixed and moveable - prism in moveable jaw optional - stainless type on request (RF) Technical data: Square-accuracy: 0.005 / 100 mm Parallel-accuracy: 0.003 / 100 mm
Dimensions in mm
SAV 231.06
Scope of supply: - hexagon key - workpiece-stop fix and moveable - 4 clamps - wooden case optional
light milling
A 60 75 100 125 125 125 125 160
B 175 220 260 330 350 370 430 370
C 80 100 120 160 180 200 260 200
D 56 75 87 100 100 100 100 126
E 28 40 45 50 50 50 50 60
F 40 50 55 65 65 65 65 70
Clamping Weight force in Wooden case in kg optional ord.no. daN
2.8 5.8 10.9 19.8 20.4 21.0 27.0 38.0
1000 2000 3000 4000 4000 3500 3000 5000
SAV 539.03 SAV 539.03 SAV 539.07 SAV 539.09 SAV 539.16 SAV 539.16 SAV 539.16 SAV 539.16
C
optional
fixed workpiece stop moveable workpiece stop
Ordering example: Precision Pull Down Vice SAV 231.06 - 60 - RF Ordering key: Name SAV-No. - A - Edition (optional)
Execution: Precision Pull Down Vice SAV 231.01 - 35 Execution: Precision Mini Pull Down Vice SAV 231.02
Ordering example: Ordering key: SAV Workholding and Automation www.sav-workholding.com Chapter 8 147
Precision 3-Jaw-Chuck
Material: Stainless steel, jaws and chuck hardened Technical Specifications: - Precision ground - High rotation accuracy and repeatability at low holding force - Rotation accuracy with testing pin of 10 mm diameter; < 0.03 mm - Suitable for thin ring shaped workpieces - Workpiece clamping by manual rotation of the setting ring, without key - Clamping repeatability < 0.02 mm - When ordering replacement Jaws, these will be supplied in pre-manufactured accuracy. B 11
SAV 260.11
Inside clamping 11 B A
Outside clamping A
Dimensions (mm)
58 100
9 9
12 25.0 18 37.5
min. 0.5 max. 10 min. 1.0 max. 29
min. 16 max. 49 min. 21 max. 86
0.25 1.70
Ordering example: Precision 3-Jaw-Chuck SAV 260.11 - 100 Ordering key: Name SAV - No. - Diameter
Holding Block
Material: Compact holding block made of stainless steel, precision ground and with hardened surfaces. - Used on EDM frames and for grinding Technical Specifications: - Clamping repeatability < 0.05 mm - Can be used in combination with Precision 3-Jaw-Chuck SAV 260.11 sizes 58 and 100
SAV 260.11 B
Execution: Holding block SAV 260.11 - B with Precision 3-Jaw-Chuck SAV 260.11
Dimensions (mm)
A 58 100
B 58 100
C 48 65
Weight (kg)
Z=0
1.2 4.8
Ordering example: Holding Block SAV 260.11 - B - 100 Ordering key: Name SAV - No. - B - Execution 148 Chapter 8 Technical data subject to change without prior notice
Z=0
Clamping range (mm) Weight Inside clamping Outside clamping (kg)
also stainless execution
SAV 235.20
With precision pull down vice SAV 231.06 Design: Swivel on the longitudinal axis to max. 45 The base plate of the sine table is made of hardened steel (HRC 60) black-finished and precision ground. Vice and sine table are also available in stainless execution (RF). Delivery in wooden storage case. Angle precision: 5 sec. Planar parallelism: 0.005 / 100 mm Shimming measure at 0: 3 mm Swivel range: 0 to 45 Application: The angle is set according the sine principle, using an end-gauge. The precision pull down vice can be set in either X or Y direction. Standard accessories: 1 fixed end stop, 1 adjustable end stop 1 allen key 1 sine table in degrees / minute
Dimensions in mm
C B
A 60
B 28
C 80
0 D E -2 F G H 102 45 140 130 100
Weight in kg
6.5
H G
Ordering example: Precision sine table SAV 235.20 - RF Ordering key: Name SAV - No. - Execution
also stainless execution
SAV 235.22
Swivel over longitudinal and transverse axis with precision pull down vice SAV 231.06 Design: Swivel over longitudinal and transverse axis. With precision pull down vice. The base plate of the sine table is made of hardened steel (HRC 60) black-finished and precision ground. Vice and sine table are also available in stainless execution (RF). Delivery in wooden storage case. Angle precision: 5 sec. Planar parallelism: 0.005 / 100 mm Shimming measure at 0: 3 mm Swivel range: 0 to 45 Application: The angle is set according the sine principle, using an end-gauge. The precision pull down vice can be set in either X or Y direction. Standard accessories: 1 fixed end stop, 1 adjustable end stop 1 allen key 1 sine table in degrees / minute
Dimensions in mm
A 60
B 80
C 132
D 140
E 130
F 100
Weight in kg
9.5
Ordering example: Precision Sine Table SAV 235.22 - RF Ordering key: Name SAV - No. - Execution SAV Workholding and Automation www.sav-workholding.com
F D
F E
Chapter 8
149

With precision pull down vice Design: Swivel on the transverse axis to max. 45 degrees. The base plate of the sine table is made of hardened steel (HRC 60), black-finished and precision ground. Vice and sine table are also available in stainless steel execution (RF), for wire EDM. Delivery in wooden storage case. Angle precision: 5 sec. Planar parallelism: 0.005 / 100 mm Shimming measure at 0: 3 mm Application: The angle is set according the sine principle, using an end-gauge. The precision pull down vice can be set in either X or Y direction. Standard accessories: 1 fixed end stop, 1 adjustable end stop, 1 chucking wrench
SAV 235.21
F D Mounted on pallet and zero reference system
Dimensions in mm
A 75 100 125
B 100 120 160
C 120 130 143
D 195 220 245
E 115 140 165
F 165 190 215
Weight in kg
15.0 20.0 30.0
Ordering example: Precision Sine Table SAV 235.21 - 100 - RF Ordering key: Name SAV - No. - A - Execution 150 Chapter 8 Technical data subject to change without prior notice

Swivel on longitudinal axis, with extreme low height Design: Swivel on the longitudinal axis. The base plate of the sine table is made of hardened steel (HRC 60), black-finished and precision ground. High accuracy due to extreme flat construction. Standard execution with permanent magnetic chuck. ON/OFF-switching on top. The sine tables are supplied in wooden storage cases, with sine chart degrees / minutes in mm, precision long side stop and short side stop. Angle precision: 5 sec. Planar parallelism: 0.005 / 100 mm Shimming measure at 0: 3 mm Angle range: 0 to 45 Nominal holding force: 80 N/cm2 Pole pitch: 1.9 mm Magnetic field height: 6 mm Pole plate wearing limit: 6 mm Application: The angle is set according the sine principle, using an end-gauge. Fixation is achieved by side mounted pincers and by tightening the upper bearing clamps.
SAV 245.04
F D
E at 0
Dimensions in mm
A 175 150 255 300 350 400 450
B 100 150 130 150 150 200 150
C 215 190 295 340 390 440 490
D 115 165 145 165 165 215 165
0 E -2 60.0 62.5 60.0 62.5 70.5 71.0 70.5
F 85 135 115 135 135 185 135
Weight in kg
8.5 10.0 14.0 20.0 26.5 41.0 33.5
Execution with flushing holes available against price adder.
Ordering example: Precision Sine Table SAV 245.04 - 450 Ordering key: Name SAV No. - A SAV Workholding and Automation www.sav-workholding.com Chapter 8 151
Multi-Prism Clamping Block

For rational multi-clamping Use: Rational simultaneous clamping of round, square and rectangular workpieces like hole punchers, ejector pins and mould inserts. Design: - single positioning and clamping of workpieces - stainless tool steel, through-hardened and ground on all sides - mounting holes for erosion frame (special execution) as well as special shapes and workpiece specific solutions possible on request - standard solution see also chapter 13 Technical data: Square accuracy : 0.01 / 100 mm Parallel accuracy : 0.01 / 100 mm Scope of supply: Wooden case.
stainless execution
SAV 207.01
SAV 207.01-230-RF
90 C Special prism clamping block for square 7 x 7 mm, 2 sections, for 50 workpieces each on circular magnet SAV 244.06-350 mm 150 320 mm 60 95 mm 70 56 mm 15 x 0 - 7 8 x 14 - 32 mm 8 x 0 - 14 8 x 14 - 40 kg 8.5 22.5
Length (C) Width with prism (A) Height (B) 1st side for quantity x 2nd side for quantity x Weight
Ordering example: Multi-clamping prism block SAV 207.01 - 320 - RF Ordering key: Name SAV - No. - Length - Execution 152 Chapter 8 Technical data subject to change without prior notice
A ca. A + 55
Permanent Magnetic Block

With fine and extra fine pole pitch, non-switchable For machining and shaping of small workpieces, such as punches etc. For clamping of thin components type MH 204 is recommended which has an extra fine pole pitch. Features: Two or three magnetic clamping surfaces, pole pitch 4 mm, or 1.3 mm for type MH 204. Types MH 201S to MH 203S use SmCo5-magnets with extremely high holding forces for materials that are difficult to magnetize. Nominal holding force: 80 N/cm2 for MH201 to MH204 180 N/cm2 for MH201-S to MH204-S Field height: 6 mm Pole plate wearing limit: 14 mm for MH201 and MH202 6 mm for MH203 and MH204
Dimensions in mm
SAV 242.01
Type MH 201 Type MH 202 to MH 204
A B MH 201 MH 201S 100 100

Type
C 50 50 25 25
Max. angular deviation
Magnetice faces
Weight in kg
5 5 5 5
MH 202 MH 202S 100 MH 203 MH 203S 100 MH 204 100
50 25 25
1 face 100 x 100 2 faces 100 x 50 3 faces 100 x 50 2 faces 100 x 25 2 faces 100 x 25
3.6 1.7 0.5 0.5
Ordering example: Permanent Magnetic Block SAV 242.01 - MH 201 Ordering key: Name SAV - No. - Type
Permanent Magnetic Switchable Block

With 3 magnetic clamping surfaces Use: Angular and parallel grinding of small and medium-sized workpieces. Features: ON-OFF control with rotary switch. Three magnetic faces. Laminations 0.5 mm brass / 1 mm steel. 2 mm C B P
Dimensions in mm Weight
SAV 242.02
Nominal holding force: 60 N/cm2 Magnetic field height:
A
ON OFF
A 55 70
in kg B C D P 90.5 125.5 146 0.5+1 2.8 90.5 125.5 151 0.5+1 4.0
7.5 D Ordering example: Permanent Magnetic Switchable Block SAV 242.02 - 55 Ordering key: Name SAV - No. - A SAV Workholding and Automation www.sav-workholding.com
Chapter 8
153

With 4 magnetic clamping surfaces, also in stainless execution Use: Angular and parallel grinding of small and medium-sized workpieces. Features: Robust construction with good holding force. Laminations 2 mm brass / 2 mm steel. Nominal holding force standard: 50 N/cm2 Nominal holding force stainless: 30 N/cm2 Magnetic field height: 2 mm Pole plate wearing limit: 4 mm Can be supplied with stainless, high-alloyed chrome steel pole plates (RF). Best suited for use on wire erosion machines.
SAV 242.11
Application with wire-erosion
Application at spark-erosion
B P
Dimensions in mm
A 140 160
B 115 135
C 64 64
D 64 64
P 2+2 2+2
Weight in kg
3.1 4.0
4 magnetic sides
Ordering example: Permanent Magnetic Switchable Block SAV 242.11 - 140 - RF Ordering key: Name SAV - No. - A - Execution 154 Chapter 8 Technical data subject to change without prior notice
Neodymium Magnetic Block

With extreme high holding force Material: Steel base with St 37 / Brass pole plate Technical Specifications: - High pole plate stability 0.002 mm - For difficult and small workpieces with complex eroding outline - Bigger sizes available on request - Holding force: 140 N/cm2 - Magnetic field height: approx. 10 mm - Pole plate wearing limit: 3 mm - Magnetic Block with (A) or without (N) adapter plate for Reference system* - On request including Positioning Template (JS) on the clamping surface for quick and accurate workpiece positioning - Suitable for connecting Precision Sine Guidance (S) - Mounting of Positioning Template and Precision Sine Guidance using positioning pins with a repeatability of 0.003 mm - On request the pole plate can be executed with a Z - 0 end stop (Z) - Clamping of more than 1 workpiece is possible Positioning pin Clamping surface
SAV 242.12
Positioning template Workpiece
Stability of pole plate 0.002 mm
Execution: Neodymium Magnetic Block SAV 242.12-ND 200-JS
Execution: Neodymium Magnetic Block SAV 242.12-ND 100-JS
Execution: Neodymium Magnetic Block SAV 242.12-ND 100-Z
* Please specify reference system and robot adaption; we can advice!

Dimensions (mm) Weight (kg)
B G F 35 36 G 62 62 H
D P=6
4 x M6 x 9 deep
A ND 100 140 ND 200 200
System
B 70 70
C 51 51
D E 102 118 157 178
3.4 4.2
F Ordering example: Neodymium Magnetic Block SAV 242.12 - ND - 200 - A - JS - Z Ordering key: Name SAV - No. - ND - Size - A - JS - Z SAV Workholding and Automation www.sav-workholding.com
E A 1 magnetic surface
Chapter 8
155
Coolant-Hose Holder
With permanent holding magnet Design: Execution with 1 Snaploc-hose and permanent magnet base from aluminium. Locking valve with PTFE-ball-valve-seal.
SAV 581.01
Magnet base diameter in mm
Nom. holding force in N
Weight in kg
50 90
110 600
0.36 0.80
Ordering example: Coolant hose holder SAV 581.01 - 90 Ordering key: Name SAV - No. - Execution
Coolant-Hoses Holder
With switchable permanent holding magnet Design: Execution with 3 Snaploc-hoses and switchable permanent magnet base. Locking valve with PTFE-ball-valve-seal. Connections: Magnet base surface: Nom. holding force: Weight: hose 60 x 50 mm 200 N 1.7 kg
SAV 581.02
Ordering example: Coolant hoses holder SAV 581.02 Name SAV - No. Ordering key:
Holding Magnets
For reliable flushing Application: For closing non-required flushing holes with wire erosion etc. Execution: 8 pcs. high-quality permanent pot magnets from SmCo5 magnet material with extreme high holding force (100 N). Edged execution for better removal of the magnet. Delivery in wooden storage case. On request also available in other sizes. Diameter: 20 mm Height: 9 mm Weight: 0.225 kg (8 pcs. in wooden case) Ordering example: Holding magnets SAV 581.03 Ordering key: Name SAV - No. 156 Chapter 8
SAV 581.03
Electrode Uni Fixture

Material: Stainless tool steel, hardened Application: For EDM and milling of electrodes or other square slotted workpieces Technical Specifications: - On request adjusted to your reference system - Suitable for mounting on multiple-pallets and single mounting
SAV 581.07 UEH
Dimensions (mm)
A 15 25
B 15 25
C 43 43
D 43 43
E 27 27
F G H 27 6.6 36 0.40 27 6.6 36 0.45
Weight (kg)
E C A
Ordering example: Electrode Uni Fixture SAV 581.07 - UEH - 15 Name SAV - No. - Type - A Ordering key:
F D B
Application Examples Electrode Uni Fixture
Adaption to the electrode clamping system is possible
Execution: Screw-threaded Pallet SAV 220.10 - 320 x 320 - Reference system* Electrode Uni Fixture SAV 581.07- UEH - A
Chapter 8
157
Set Electrode Fixtures

Technical Specifications: - Set is supplied in 2 basic variants - The variants differ in the reference system*, the clamping range of the collets and the exchange set - Set is supplied in wooden case, c.w. collet key - Suitable for exchange set 581.07-W Collets
Clamping range (mm) Quantity Type Exchange set
SAV 581.07 SET
4.0 6.0 3.0 5.0 6.0 8.0 10.0 12.0 16.0 8.0
1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1
4008 E 4008 E 470 E 470 E 470 E 470 E 470 E 470 E 470 E 426 E
581.07-W-A 581.07-W-A 581.07-ZEH 581.07-ZEH 581.07-ZEH 581.07-ZEH 581.07-ZEH 581.07-ZEH 581.07-ZEH 581.07-W-B
Ordering example: SAV 581.07 - Set - Reference system* Ordering key: SAV - No.- Execution - Reference system* Electrode fixture SAV 581.07 - WEH Collet-electrode-fixture SAV 581.07 - ZEH Adapter flange Reference system* SAV 581.07 - FA
SET Electrode fixtures SAV 581.07 - Set
Exchange set SAV 581.07 - W (execution A)
Collet SAV 439.67 - A
Exchange set SAV 581.07 - W (execution B)
Gasket for central lubrication at Z-axis SAV 581.07 - DS
Collet SAV 439.67 - B
Mounting bolt with gasket
Ordering example: Ordering key: 158
Collet key SAV 581.07 - S
Collet SAV 439.67 - C
Chapter 8
Execution: Collet fixture SAV 581.07 - ZEH With exchange set SAV 581.07 - W - A
Application sinker EDM
Exchange set SAV 581.07 W
Built on turning machine Application sinker EDM Execution: Collet fixture SAV 581.07 - ZEH With exchange set SAV 581.07 - W - A
Execution: Electrode fixture SAV 581.07 - WEH with exchange set Ordering SAV 581.07 - W - A example: Ordering and round electrode key: SAV Workholding and Automation www.sav-workholding.com Chapter 8 159
Adapter Flange
Material: Stainless tool steel, hardened Technical Specifications: - Adapter between machine and fixture - For mounting of collet-electrode-fixture SAV 581.07 - ZEH on bigger sized reference systems* - System adaptation required
SAV 581.07 FA
M6
20
110
65
light milling
Ordering example: Adapter Flange SAV 581.07 - FA - Reference system* Name SAV - No. - Type - Reference system* Ordering key:
Exchange Set
Material: Stainless tool steel, hardened Technical Specifications: - Exchange set connects collet-electrodefixture SAV 581.07 - ZEH and electrode fixture SAV 581.07 - WEH - Supplied with collet holder, excluding collet Execution A
SAV 581.07 W
Execution B
87
Execution
Collet
A (mm)
Clamping range (mm)
A B
4008 E 426 E
50 56
1.0 - 7.0 1.0 - 10.0
M5
A light milling
Ordering example: Exchange Set SAV 581.07 - W - A Ordering key: Name SAV - No. - Execution
Gasket
Material: Aluminium / Plastic Technical Specifications: To seal the connection between adapter flange SAV 581.07 - FA and the collet-electrode-fixture SAV 581.07 - ZEH on machines with central lubrication.
Hole for central lubrication
SAV 581.07 DS
Ordering example: Gasket SAV 581.07 - DS Ordering key: Name SAV - No. - Type 160 Chapter 8 Technical data subject to change without prior notice
Collet Electrode Fixture

Material: Body out of stainless tool steel, hardened Technical Specifications: - Collet fixture with adapter flange and reference system aligned - Collet fixture suitable for collet SAV 439.67- 470E or exchange set SAV 581.07 - WS - Supplied with cone for chuck type Schaublin No. 470E according DIN 6499 shape ER32 - Supplied with adapter flange diameter 80 mm aligned
SAV 581.07 ZEH

76
Ordering example: Collet Electrode Fixture SAV 581.07 - ZEH Ordering key: Name SAV -No. - Type
Electrode Fixture
Material: Stainless tool steel, hardened Application: Adaption with fixture to the maching head for spark erosion. Technical Specifications: - Supplied either with or without sine function - Supplied including exchange set SAV 581.07 - W - Execution A suitable for collet form 4008 E - Execution B suitable for collet form 426 E - Delivery excluding collet
80
SAV 581.07 WEH
M6
40
50
Ordering example: Electrode Fixture SAV 581.07 - WEH - A Ordering key: Name SAV-No. - Type - Execution
Collet Electrode Fixture

Material: Stainless tool steel, hardened Technical Specifications: - Double cone collet supplied with Schaublin System / Regofix according DIN 6499 - Type A: Form 470 E Clamping range from diam. 4.0 to 20.0 mm in 1.0 mm steps Clamping range from diam. 2.0 to 3.0 mm in 0.5 mm steps - Type B: Form 426 E Clamping range from diam. 4.0 to 10.0 mm in 1.0 mm steps Clamping range from diam. 2.0 to 3.0 mm in 0.5 mm steps - Type C: Form 4008 E Clamping range from diam. 4.0 to 7.0 mm in 1.0 mm steps Clamping range from diam. 2.0 to 3.0 mm in 0.5 mm steps - Collets can be supplied as set, from diameter 3.0 mm to 18.0 mm Ordering example: Collet SAV 439.67 - 470 E - Set Ordering key: Name SAV-No. - Type or Set SAV Workholding and Automation www.sav-workholding.com
50
82
SAV 439.67
Type A
Type B
Type C
A Chapter 8 161
Precision Rotary Indexer

Suitable for erosion frames
stainless execution
SAV 434.50
Use For use in erosion frames or for grinding. High accuracy requirements at small holding force. For centered clamping of workpieces. Execution Compact, manual precision indexer from stainless steel, precision ground. Execution especially suitable for wire erosion. - Angle setting through 15 Hirth toothing - Intermediate steps according sine principle up to 45 angle - Indexing accuracy 20 sec. - Through holes for mounting, for instance on erosion frames, can be provided on request - Delivery with center through hole diameter 15 mm possible Accessories: The indexer is universal and can be used with different clamping tools. Please order clamping tools always together with indexer, as these must be precisely adapted. Precision 3-jaw chuck (F) SAV 260.11 Neodymium magnetic block (MB) SAV 242.12 Precision mini pull down vice (NS) SAV 231.02-RF Ordering example: Precision Rotary Indexer SAV - 434.50 Ordering key: Name SAV - No. 143
43g7
14H7 100 130 107
58
Z=0
Alternative Executions:
Tool Mounting Scale Angle setting
Angle setting
Sine setting Ordering example: Ordering key: 162 Chapter 8
Parallel end stop
Execution: Precision rotary indexer with sine table up to 45 angle SAV 434.50 - Special execution
Execution: Precision Rotary Indexer SAV 434.50 with 3-Jaw-Chuck SAV 260.11 - 58
SAV 434.50
Execution: Precision Rotary Indexer SAV 434.50 with Collet fixture SAV 581.07-ZEH
Execution: Precision Rotary Indexer SAV 434.50 with reference chuck
Execution: Precision Rotary Indexer SAV 434.50 with reference chuck
Chapter 8
163
NC Rotary Indexers Indexers with direct Drive

Examples and possbilities of SAV
Specifications available on request
SAV 434.44 Precision sine indexer especially developed for use on spark erosion machines. Completely sealed for continuous use in dielectric. With flushing connection.
SAV 434.51 NC Rotary indexer for universal use. Sealed execution for wire erosion available. Standard with SAV control. Optionally also available for Siemens, Heidenhain and Infranor controls.
SAV 434.52 Rotary indexer with direct drive. Also suitable for use as extra machine axis. Available in horizontal and vertical execution. With hydraulic clamping through 6 bar pneumatic supply. Standard supplied with Simudrive 611U.
164
Chapter 8
Application Examples Control unit versions for SAV NC-rotary indexers DA 145 / DT 350 / DT 630 / DT 8002
Production version 1
Production version 2
CNC version SAV Control

Touch panel for programm editing, saving and for control of the converter
PC with programming software
Converter with fixed Client specific programs
Converter with variable programs
Program of CNC control
SAV Indexers with NC control

With conventional control and drive SAV 434.51 SAV DT 350 SAV DT 630 SAV DT 800
SAV Indexers with NC control

SAV DT 415 with high dynamic direct drive SAV 434.52
Programming with first installation by SAV according client specification, max. 64 programming positions
Programming by SAV service or customer max. 64 programming positions
Programming in ISO code, by customer, unlimited program quantities, full NC compatiblity for max. 2 axis, tele-service
Chapter 8
165
Rolling Transporter
SAV 228.01
SYSTEMS-LIFT G100-Al-1
Application: For transport of pallets and easy positioning on the machines reference system. With pallets of 25 to 30 kg and up the handling of loaded pallets becomes more and more difficult. The limited access to the machines and measuring facilities and the restricted manoeuvring space on the work floor makes the use of a safe and simple transport system inevitable. Technical Specifications: - SAV 228.01 - G100 suitable for weights up to 100 kg. - Additional: Lift arm with limited top space access see sketch Al - 1 Lift arm with limited reach see sketch Al - 2 - With the battery powered, electrical driven lift axle the load can be safely and accurately positioned. This transporter can be extended with several mounting sets to adapt to the different pallet sizes and reference systems. - mains voltage 100...230 V AC - frequency 50...60 Hz - Rotation of Lifting tool 360 - weight 120 kg
SAV 228.01-G100 590 adjustable
Lifting height 870
AL-1 1680 360 Special execution SAV 228.01-KP alternative SAV 228.01-GP 450 95
Sketch AL-1
700
1990
850
Ordering example: Rolling Transporter SAV 228.01 - G100 - Al - 1 Name SAV-No. - Type - Arm Ordering key: 166 Chapter 8 Technical data subject to change without prior notice
SAV 228.01-G100
Lifting height 1120
adjustable 480
AL-2 1930 360 Special execution SAV 228.01-KP alternative SAV 228.01-GP 450
Sketch AL-2
700
850
1990
Chapter 8
167
Lifting Device with fork

Material: Construction steel Application: For loading of machines, pallets and robot magazines, machine loading stations, measuring machines and storage racks. Technical Specifications: - Light and precise positioning of pallets on workholding system or on machine table. - Transported by SAV-systems-Lift SAV 228.01 or by work shop rotating crane. - Transferss weight 200 kg (incl. Pallet) - Other dimensions on request A
SAV 228.01 - KP
Pallet magnet with workpiece
240 280 320
A 305 345 385
B 300 340 380
Weight (kg)
5.0 5.8 6.5
Ordering example: Pallet Lifter SAV 228.01 - KP - 240 Ordering key: Name SAV - No - System
Lifting Device changeable

Material: Galvanised non-eroding steel Application: For loading of machines, pallets and robot magazines, machine loading stations, measuring machines and storage racks. Technical Specifications: - For pallet weights up to 200 kg, lifter weight 6 kg - Safe handling by SAV-systems-Lift or by work shop crane - Adjustable to different pallet sizes
400
SAV 228.01 - GP
Pallet magnet 390 Adjustable 440 to 360 340 Technical data subject to change without prior notice
Ordering example: Adjustable Pallet Lifter SAV 228.01 - GP - 240 Name SAV - No. - System Ordering key: 168 Chapter 8
Automatic Pallet Changers

We supply automation solutions to machine builders and users in the machine and tool industry. Regardless for what reference system, we can supply for your typical operation
SAV 228.20
SAV Pallet systems

High reliability, precision and quality.
PALLET CHANGER 1600

for weights up to 80 kg per pallet
MAGNET PALLET
POWER MAGNET PALLET
SECTIONED T-SLOT PALLET
SCREW THREADED PALLET
T-SLOT PALLET
UNI PALLET
Special solutions on request
MAGNET CIRCULAR PALLET
SCREW THREADED CIRCULAR PALLET
T-SLOT CIRCULAR PALLET

Chapter 8
UNI CIRCULAR PALLET

169
Automatic Pallet Changers
SAV 228.20
PALLET CHANGER 1600-1

for weights up to 120 kg per pallet EP MAGNET PALLET
MAGNET PALLET
POWER MAGNET PALLET
SECTIONED T-SLOT PALLET
SCREW THREADED PALLET
T-SLOT PALLET
320 x 320 8 Pallets 400 x 400 6 Pallets 280 x 480 6 Pallets 320 x 480 5 Pallets
UNI PALLET
170
Chapter 8
CHAPTER 9
Electro holding magnets Electro holding magnet Electromagnetic holding beam Permanent magnetic blocks Permanent magnetic block Permanent magnetic block Permanent magnetic block Neodymium magnetic block Permanent magnetic block Permanent magnetic blocks Permanent magnetic block Permanent magnetic block Laminated plates and bars Laminated circular top plate Laminated bars Laminated bars Laminated circular top plate Laminated circular top plate Laminated blocks Laminated blocks (set) for use on circular magnetic chucks for magnetic chucks with transverse poles for use on magnetic chucks for use on circular chuck with radial poles for parallel pole arrangement for use on magnetic chucks in storage case with fine and super-fine pole pitch with 3 magnetic sides with 3 magnetic sides extreme high holding force switchable with integrated holding magnets with 4 magnetic sides, also stainless switchable, for EDM applications Remarks with 2 types of electrical connection with high holding forces
Page 171 - 182
SAV-No. 241.31 241.32
Page 172 173
242.01 242.02 242.03 242.05 242.07 242.08 242.11 243.15
174 174 175 176 175 177 177 178
248.01 248.02 248.03 248.05 248.06 248.60 248.61
179 179 180 181 181 182 182
Chapter 9
171
Electro Holding Magnet

With 2 types of electrical connection Design: Electro holding magnets can hold ferrous magnetic workpieces. Their application is found in steel construction, production and have significant advantages in handling small and medium mass products. To reach the nominal holding force, the steel poles of the holding surface must be completely covered by the workpiece. Construction: The magnets consist of an electromagnetic holding system. The magnetic circuit is open in switched-on position and makes it possible to hold ferrous magnetic workpieces. Available with stripped connecting wire (Type A) or with connection terminals (Type B ). Depending upon application the appropriate rules for the prevention of accidents are to be followed.With devices of safety class 1 the protective earthing connection according to VDE 0100 6 is to be guaranteed by the user. The devices are built and tested according to VDE 0580. This is considered as conformance certificate in accordance with CENELEC memorandum Nr. 3, Part 3, Par. 2.3 according to the new equipment safety law of the EEC. Nominal Voltage: 24 V DC Duty: 100 % Protection: IP 65 acording DIN 40 050 Isolation class: E Notes to technical data: The maximum holding forces are given for St 37 and are based on optimal workpiece-thickness, at airgap dL= 0 and 100% coverage of clamping surface. The values are given for 90% nominal voltage and warmed condition (approx. 60 K over-temperature without additional heat transfer). If the application is based on other conditions, the holding force is reduced. Due to safety reasons and depending on the application a safety factor is to be taken into account. The nominal power values in the table above are intended to determine the correct electronic accessories and are based on 20C winding temperature at nominal voltage (VDE 0580/10.70 9.1). During operation the nominal power decreases, depending on the duty.
SAV 241.31
G A D C
E 19 L
SAV 241.31- A 01 SAV 241.31 - Type A SAV 241.31 - Typ B

with connecting wire with stripped connecting wire with connection terminals
Notes to dimensions: Size l is applicable for the consumption of the holding surfaces and eventual machining. Mounting of the magnets through centred threaded hole at the backside. 70% of size C shall not be exceeded when a bigger threaded hole is required. The threaded depth is not limited. When more holes are made on a pitch circle, the depth of size H-0.5 shall not be exceeded. In both cases one should take care, that the threaded holes are completely filled by the bolts, otherwise the magnetic properties will be less.
Type and Size
Dimensions in mm
A 01 A/B 02 A/B 03 A/B 04 A/B 05 A/B 06 A/B 08 A 10 A 15 A 18 A 25
A 180.1 250.1 320.1 400.1 500.1 630.1 800.1 1000.1 1500.1 1800.1 2500.1
B 11.0 20.0 22.0 25.5 27.0 30.0 38.0 43.0 56.0 63.0 80.0
C D 8.0 16.1 11.1 22.3 14.3 28.6 17.9 35.8 20.4 44.7 28.2 56.3 34.0 72.8 42.8 91.3 67.9 134.0 84.8 161.0 117.5 223.0
E 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 300 300 300 300
F M3 M4 M4 M5 M5 M8 M8 M 10 M 16 M 24 M 24
G 5 6 6 8 8 12 12 15 24 36 36
H 2.5 3.5 5.0 5.0 5.5 6.0 8.5 10.0 16.5 20.5 28.5
I 1 1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
K 28.5 32.5 37.0 42.0 49.0 57.5 -
L 45 0.5 140 0.5 230 0.5 475 4.5 750 6.5 1000 7.5 2400 3400 9300 - 15000 - 30000
Nominal optimum workpiece Power Force thickness in W in N in mm
Weight in kg
>2.0 >3.0 >3.6 >4.5 >6.0 >7.0 >9.0 >10.5 >17.0 >21.0 >29.0
1.4 3.2 3.6 5.2 6.5 9.0 15.0 20.5 37.0 50.0 90.0
Ordering example: Electro Holding Magnet SAV 241.31 - A 01 Name SAV - No. - Type and Size Ordering key: 172 Chapter 9 Technical data subject to change without prior notice
K 0.02 0.06 0.11 0.20 0.30 0.55 1.20 2.10 6.40 10.5 25.9
Electro Magnetic Holding Beam

With high holding force Application: The apparatus type C is suitable for holding parts with straight surfaces, while Type D can be used for parts with rough or scaled surface. To reach the nominal holding force, the steel poles of the holding surface must be completely covered by the workpiece. Design: The electro magnetic holding beams are direct current holding systems.The magnetic circuit is open in switched-on position and makes it possible to hold ferrous magnetic workpieces. For mounting the magnets are provided with threaded holes in the bottom of the housing. Electrical connection through 2 connection bolts, which are fitted in the housing of the magnet and have easy access. Further a stud is available for mounting of a steel wire as stress release. These studs can be screwed on the side or bottom. When working with electromagnetic holding beams, one should follow the appropriate rules for the prevention of accidents. Nominal voltage: Protection: Isolation class: Duty: 24 V DC Housing IP 53 according DIN 40 050 connection IP 00 E 100 % ED
SAV 241.32
2.51) E D K 7.0 10.5 14.0 25.0 35.0 42.0 22.0 31.0 70.0 0.65 0.88 1.22 2.48 3.15 3.75 2.35 3.20 9.20 173 L C
15
I Pg 7 F x G M
1)
Notes to technical data: The nominal power values in the table above are intended to determine the correct electronic accessories and are based on 20C winding temperature at nominal voltage (VDE 0580/ 10.70 9.1). During operation the power decreases, depending on theduty . The pole pitch as well as their influence on the operation is described in the technical notes. The maximum holding forces FH are given for St 37 and are based on a plate thickness of > 8 mm for Type C and >10 mm for Type D. The forces are for an airgap dL=0 and 100% coverage of clamping surface, 90% Nominal voltage and warmed condition (approx. 50 K over-temperature) without additional heat transfer.
Type and Size
max. pole plate consumption
If the application is based on other conditions, the holding force is reduced. Due to safety reasons and depending on the application a safety factor is to be taken into account.
Pole pitch Nominal Nominal Weight force power in kg in N in W
Dimensions in mm
C 01 C 02 C 03 C 04 C 05 C 06 D 07 D 08 D 09
A 101.5 151.5 201.5 401.5 501.5 601.5 151.5 201.5 501.5
B 32 32 32 32 32 32 60 60 60
C 31 31 31 31 31 31 49 49 49
D E F G H I 20 50 2 M 6 10 13.5 20 50 3 M 6 10 13.5 20 50 4 M 6 10 13.5 20 50 8 M 6 10 13.5 20 50 10 M 6 10 13.5 20 50 12 M 6 10 13.5 30 75 2 M 8 12 15.0 35 120 2 M 8 12 15.0 35 140 4 M 8 12 15.0
K 68.0 118.0 168.0 368.0 468.0 568.0 93.5 143.5 443.5
L 10 10 10 10 10 10 12 12 12
M 23.5 23.5 23.5 23.5 23.5 23.5 36.5 36.5 36.5
N 12 12 12 12 12 12 18 18 18
O 8.5 8.5 8.5 8.5 8.5 8.5 10 10 10
16 16 16 16 16 16 30 30 30
880 1500 2100 4700 6000 7200 2600 3750 10400
Ordering example: Electromagnetic Holding Beam SAV 241.32 - D 09 Ordering key: Name SAV - No. - Type and Size SAV Workholding and Automation www.sav-workholding.com Chapter 9

With fine and extra fine pole pitch, non-switchable For machining and shaping of small workpieces, such as punches etc. For clamping of thin components type MH 204 is recommended which has an extra fine pole pitch. Features: Two or three magnetic clamping surfaces, pole pitch 4 mm, or 1.3 mm for type MH 204. Types MH 201S to MH 203S use SmCo5-magnets with extremely high holding forces for materials that are difficult to magnetize. Nominal holding force: 80 N/cm2 for MH201 to MH204 180 N/cm2 for MH201-S to MH204-S Field height: 6 mm Pole plate wearing limit: 14 mm for MH201 and MH202 6 mm for MH203 and MH204
Dimensions in mm Max. angular deviation Magnetice faces Weight in kg
SAV 242.01
Type MH 201 Type MH 202 to MH 204
A B MH 201 MH 201S 100 100

Type
C 50 50 25 25
5 5 5 5
MH 202 MH 202S 100 MH 203 MH 203S 100 MH 204 100
50 25 25
1 face 100 x 100 2 faces 100 x 50 3 faces 100 x 50 2 faces 100 x 25 2 faces 100 x 25
3.6 1.7 0.5 0.5

With 3 magnetic clamping surfaces Use: Angular and parallel grinding of small and medium-sized workpieces. Features: ON-OFF control with rotary switch. Three magnetic faces. Laminations 0.5 mm brass / 1 mm steel. 2 mm C B P
Dimensions in mm Weight
SAV 242.02
Nominal holding force: 60 N/cm2 Magnetic field height:
A
ON OFF
A 55 70
in kg B C D P 90.5 125.5 146 0.5+1 2.8 90.5 125.5 151 0.5+1 4.0
7.5 D Ordering example: Permanent Magnetic Switchable Block SAV 242.02 - 55 Ordering key: Name SAV - No. - A 174 Chapter 9

With 3 magnetic clamping surfaces Use: Angular and parallel grinding of workpieces. Features: 3 magnetic clamping surfaces. Strong, switchable permanent magnet. The base of the magnet can be clamped on an existing magnetic chuck. Nominal holding force: 80 N/cm2 Magnetic field height: 12 mm Polepitch: 9 mm steel/2 mm brass/3mm steel/2 mm brass Pole plate wearing limit: 6 mm
SAV 242.03
Dimensions in mm
A 230
B 100
C 100
Weight in kg
20.0 A
Ordering example: Permanent Magnetic Switchable Block SAV 242.03 Name SAV - No. Ordering key:

Switchable Use: In combination with magnetic chucks, for grinding workpieces with protruding features, narrow sides, positioning templates etc. Features: Switchable permanent magnet with clamping face on the upper side. Side faces are ground square to one-another.
SAV 242.07
D
Dimensions in mm Nominal holding force Weight in kg in N
G F E C B 175
A 115 135
B 40 50
C 40 60
D 75 80
E 30 40
F M5 M6
G 7 10
105 400
1.3 2.9
Ordering example: Permanent Magnetic Block SAV 242.07 - 135 x 50 Name SAV - No. - A x B Ordering key: SAV Workholding and Automation www.sav-workholding.com Chapter 9
Neodymium Magnetic Switchable Block

With neodymium-iron-boron magnets, extremely high holding force Use: For workpieces that are particularly difficult to clamp, such as ferrotic and hard metals containing cobalt (carbides), as well as very small workpieces. Features: Extremely high holding force due to a specially developed construction. Stable all-steel body. ON-OFF control on end face. Larger models - with optional power-operated switching mechanism - available on request. Laminations 4 mm steel and 2 mm brass with NdFeB magnets in the pole gaps. For wire EDM use type 242.12 (stainless steel). Nominal holding force: Magnetic field height: Pole plate wearing limit: 180 N/cm2 ca. 10 mm 3 mm
SAV 242.05
Available with adaption for Zero-Reference-System
Clamping of multiple parts possible see also SAV 242.12, chapter 8 for EDM
stability of pole plate 0.002 mm
B G H
D P=6
4 x M 6 x 9 deep
Dimensions in mm
A ND 100 140 ND 200 200
Type
B C+0,5 D E 70 51.0 102 118 70 51.0 157 178
F 35 36
G 62 62
H 12 12
Weight in kg
3.0 4.2
E A 1 magnetische Spannflche
Ordering example: Ordering key: 176
Neodymium Magnetic Switchable Block SAV 242.05 - ND 100 Name SAV - No. - Type Technical data subject to change without prior notice
Chapter 9

With integrated holding magnets Features: Robust, pressure resistant clamping blocks with integrated holding magnets, non-switchable. Suitable for fixing as a press fit or for glueing. Type MH2 has a tapped hole M6 on the back. Red textured paint finish. For use up to 100 C.
SAV 242.08
Dimensions in mm Type
MH 1 MH 2
A 26 60
B 26 26
C 25 25
100 200
0.11 0.25 A B

With 4 magnetic clamping surfaces, also in stainless execution Use: Angular and parallel grinding of small and medium-sized workpieces. Features: Robust construction with good holding force. Laminations 2 mm brass / 2 mm steel. Nominal holding force standard: Nominal holding force stainless: Magnetic field height: Pole plate wearing limit: 50 N/cm2 30 N/cm2 2 mm 4 mm
SAV 242.11
Can be supplied with stainless, high-alloyed chrome steel pole plates (RF). Best suited for use on wire erosion machines. B P D
4 magnetic surfaces Application with wire-erosion Application at spark-erosion
Dimensions in mm
A 140 160
B 115 135
C 64 64
D 64 64
P 2+2 2+2
Weight in kg
3.1 4.0
Ordering example: Permanent Magnetic Switchable Block SAV 242.11 - 140 - RF Name SAV - No. - A - Execution Ordering key: SAV Workholding and Automation www.sav-workholding.com Chapter 9 177
Nom. holding force in N
Weight in kg
Permanent Magnetic Beam

With 2 magnetic faces Use: As a clamping device for holding workpieces securely on spark erosion (EDM) machines and other machining applications, or as part of a fixture. Features: Two clamping surfaces on opposite faces, individually switchable. Low magnetic field due to fine pole pitch. Supplied in pairs. Planar parallelism: 0.02 mm Pole pitch: 1.3 mm Magnetic field height: 6 mm Pole plate wearing limit: 6 mm work piece
SAV 243.15
magnetic beams machine table
G A C B D 2 magnetic clamping surfaces E

Dimensions in mm
F A B C D E 125 98 13.5 13.5 52 180 153 13.5 13.5 52 250 225 12.5 12.5 52 F 50 50 50 G 15 15 15 H 7 11 11
Nom. holding force Weight in kg in N
300 400 590
2.5 3.6 5.0
Ordering example: Permanent Magnetic Beam SAV 243.15 - 125 Ordering key: Name SAV - No. - A 178 Chapter 9 Technical data subject to change without prior notice

For use on circular chucks with parallel pole arrangement Use: Clamping of profiled workpieces on circular chucks with parallel pole arrangement. Only usable in conjunction with circular magnetic chuck SAV 244.02 and 244.05. Features: Silver brazed steel/brass construction. Can be machined to any required shape, or custom machined during manufacture. Connection to magnet to be agreed upon. Pole pitch: steel 3 mm, brass 1 mm
SAV 248.01
B
155 200 250 300 350 400 450 500
25 25 25 25 25 30 30 30
4.0 6.0 10.0 14.0 19.0 30.0 37.5 46.0
1 3
Ordering example: Laminated Circular Top Plate SAV 248.01 - 500 Ordering key: Name SAV - No. - A
Laminated Bars
For use on magnetic chucks with transverse pole arrangement Use: To provide a suitable mounting surface for difficult workpieces. Only usable in conjunction with a magnetic chuck with a transverse pole arrangement. Suitable for SAV 243.11, 243.12, 243.40, 243.42, 243.70 and 243.73. Features: The silver brazed pole plates can be machined to any desired shape. Pole pitch: steel 3 mm, brass 1 mm
SAV 248.02
Dimensions in mm
A 250 300 400 300 400 250 400
B 150 150 150 200 200 250 250
C 25 25 25 25 25 25 25
Weight in kg
7.5 9.0 12.0 12.0 16.0 12.5 19.5
1 3
Custom sizes on request. Ordering example: Laminated Bar SAV 248.02 - 250 x 150 Ordering key: Name SAV - No. - A x B SAV Workholding and Automation www.sav-workholding.com
Chapter 9
179
Laminated Bars
For use on magnetic chucks Use: In conjunction with magnetic chucks, to guide the magnetic field into the workpiece. Can be reduced in size and shaped as required. Suitable for SAV 243.11, 243.12, 243.42 and 243.70 Features: Silver brazed steel-brass laminations. Pole arrangement: 3 mm steel 1 mm brass With transverse pole arrangement
Dimensions in mm Dimensions in mm
SAV 248.03
A 250 500 250 500 400 250 500 200 400 500
B 75 75 100 100 75 75 75 100 100 100
C 25 25 25 25 25 40 40 40 40 40
Weight in kg
3.8 7.5 5.0 10.0 6.0 6.0 12.0 6.4 12.8 16.0
A 320 650 320 650
B 75 75 100 100
C 25 25 40 40
Weight in kg
4.8 9.8 10.1 20.5

1 3
With longitudinal pole arrangement
Ordering example: Laminated Bar SAV 248.03 - 400 x 100 x 40 Ordering key: Name SAV - No. - A x B x C
Application Laminated Adapter Plates Accessories for Circular Magnets

Adapter plates
Flanges (see also chapter 1)
Ordering example: Ordering key: 180 Chapter 9
Permanent circular magnets with built-on flange as well as adapter pole plates Technical data subject to change without prior notice

For use on circular chuck with radial poles Features: Can be machined to any required shape, or custom machined during manufacture. The maximum machined depth shall not exceed 12 mm. Suitable for SAV 244.06. Machinable depth: max. 12 mm
SAV 248.05
B
Dimensions in mm Number Weight of poles in kg A B
150 200 250 300 350 400
20 20 20 25 25 25
10 12 16 16 20 20
3.0 5.0 8.0 14.0 19.0 24.5
Larger sizes available on request Ordering example: Laminated Circular Top Plate SAV 248.05 - 150 Ordering key: Name SAV - No. - A

With radial pole arrangement Features: Can be machined to any required shape, or custom machined during manufacture. The maximum machined depth must not exceed 12 mm. Suitable for SAV 244.08.
SAV 248.06
150 180 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 600
20 20 20 20 20 20 25 25 25 25
2.8 4.0 4.9 7.7 11.1 15.1 24.7 31.3 38.6 55.6
Ordering example: Laminated Circular Top Plate SAV 248.06 - 600 Ordering key: Name SAV - No. - A SAV Workholding and Automation www.sav-workholding.com Chapter 9 181
Laminated Block
For use on magnetic chucks Use: In conjunction with magnetic chucks for machining of irregularly shaped workpieces. Can be machined to any required shape. Features: Longitudinal and transverse pole arrangement, as well as prisms. Pole arrangement: 3 mm steel 1 mm brass
Dimensions in mm
SAV 248.60
A 65 72 75 80 80 90 100 100 100 100 120
B 60 45 60 60 80 62 50 50 70 70 80
C 40 22 30 30 50 33 40 40 41 48 50
Pole arrangement
Execution
Weight in kg
trans. pole (Q) trans. pole (Q) long. pole (L) trans. pole (Q) trans. pole (Q) long. pole (L) long. pole (L) long. pole (L) trans. pole (Q) long. pole (L) trans. pole (Q)
prism (P) flat (E) flat (E) flat (E) flat (E) flat (E) flat (E) prism (P) flat (E) flat (E) flat (E)
0.8 0.5 0.7 0.7 2.5 0.8 1.7 1.0 2.1 2.7 3.8
Custom sizes on request. Ordering example: Laminated Block SAV 248.60 - 75 x 60 x 30 - L - E Ordering key: Name SAV No. - A x B x C - Pole arrangement - Execution
Laminated Blocks (Set)

In storage case Use: In conjunction with magnetic chucks for machining of irregularly shaped workpieces. Can be machined to any required shape. Features: Longitudinal and transverse pole arrangement, as well as prisms. Pole arrangement: Total weight: 3 mm steel 1 mm brass 7.6 kg
SAV 248.61
Dimensions in mm
A 56 96 96 56
B 32 57 53 68
C 15 26 22 47
Design
Quantity
trans. pole trans. pole long. pole with prism
2x 2x 2x 2x
C A B Technical data subject to change without prior notice C
Ordering example: Laminated Block Set SAV 248.61 Ordering key: Name SAV - No. 182 Chapter 9
CHAPTER 10
Permanent magnetic V-blocks, clamping blocks Permanent magnetic V-block Permanent magnetic V-block Permanent magnetic V-block Permanent magnetic V-block Permanent magnetic V-block Permanent magnetic V-block Permanent magnetic V-block Permanent magnetic V-block Magnetic stands, magnetic bases, dial gauge Magnetic stand, with hydraulic clamping Magnetic stand, with hydraulic clamping Magnetic stand, with mechanical clamping Magnetic stand, with mechanical clamping Universal magnetic stand Magnetic stand, with flexible column Magnetic stand Permanent magnetic bases Dial gauge Magnetic separators, wrist magnet Magnetic separator Wrist magnet Remarks with 4 magnetic surfaces singe or in pairs in completely sealed execution singe or in pairs, hardened execution small version in sealed execution, pair with powerful cross prisms small size, non-switchable
Page 183 - 192

SAV-No. 242.21 242.22 242.24 242.25 242.28 242.29 242.31 242.33 Page 184 184 185 185 186 186 187 187
for dial gauges, non-switchable with fine adjustment for measuring with fine adjustment for measuring with fine adjustment for measuring precision construction for measuring for measuring switchable for use with magnetic stand
482.01 482.03 482.40 482.41 482.42 482.43 482.45 482.70 482.92
188 188 189 189 190 190 191 191 192
for separation of steel parts for separation of thin steel plates
512.03 532.11
192 192
Chapter 10
183
Permanent Magnetic "V"-Block

With 4 magnetic surfaces Features: 4 magnetic surfaces (top, bottom and two sides). ON/ OFF switch for top and bottom faces. Completely sealed. Available in wooden storage case SAV 539.02-HK2 against price adder. Available single (S) or in pairs (P) Planar parallelism: < 0.01 mm
SAV 242.21
Dimensions in mm Length Width Hight
Width of large block
Nom. hold. Weight force in kg in daN
80 125
60 60
73 73
38 38
30 45
2.0 3.3
Ordering example: Permanent Magnetic V Block SAV 242.21 - 125 Ordering key: Name SAV - No. - Length

Single or in pairs Features: 2 magnetic contact surfaces (large "V"-block and opposite face), which are switched on and off simultaneously. Available single (S) or in pairs (P). Available in wooden storage case SAV 539.02 (for S) and SAV 539.04 (for P) against price adder. Rectangularity: Planar parallelism: 0.004 mm 0.004 mm
SAV 242.22
Length
Nom hold. Nom. hold. Dimensions in mm Workpiece force in V force to surface in daN Width Height diameter in daN
Weight in kg
80 100
67 70
96 96
6 - 66 6 - 70
40 40
90 120
2.9 3.8
Ordering example: Permanent Magnetic V Block SAV 242.22 - 100 - S Ordering key: Name SAV - No. - Length - Single or pair 184 Chapter 10 Technical data subject to change without prior notice

In completely sealed execution Features: 3 magnetic faces, which are switched on and off simultaneously (large "V"-block, opposite face, front face). Completely sealed. Available in wooden storage case SAV 539.03 against price adder. Rectangularity: Planar Parallelism: 0.01 / 100 mm 0.01 / 100 mm
SAV 242.24
Length
Nom hold. Nom. hold. force Dimensions in mm Weight Width of Workpiece force in V to surface in kg block diameter Width Height in daN in daN
180
75
105
50
6 - 70
100
130
9.0
Ordering example: Permanent Magnetic V Block SAV 242.24 - 180 Ordering key: Name SAV - No. - Length

Single or in pairs, hardened execution Features: 2 magnetic faces, which are switched on and off simultaneously (main and small prisms). Hardened contact surfaces and V-s. Available in single (S) or in pairs (P). Available in wooden storage case SAV 539.04 against price adder. Rectangularity: Planar parallelism: 0.004 mm 0.004 mm
SAV 242.25
Dimensions in mm Length Width Height
Workpiece diameter
Weight in kg
80 100
67 70
96 96
6 - 66 6 - 70
2.8 3.8
Ordering example: Permanent Magnetic V Block SAV 242.25 - 80 Name SAV - No. - Length Ordering key: SAV Workholding and Automation www.sav-workholding.com Chapter 10 185

Small version Features: 2 magnetic faces (large "V"-block and opposite face), which are switched on and off simultaneously (main and small prisms). Available single (S) or in pairs (P). Available in wooden storage case SAV 539.02 against price adder. Planar parallelism: V-angle: 0.008 mm 108
SAV 242.28
Length
Nom. Dimensions in mm Workpiece holding force Weight in kg Width Height diameter in daN
70
45
65
6 - 35
60
1.35
Ordering example: Permanent Magnetic V Block SAV 242.28 - S Ordering key: Name SAV - No. - Single or pair

In sealed execution, pair Features: 3 magnetic faces ("V"-block and two side faces). With two opposite switch positions, including separate key. Strong switchable permanent magnetic block. Ground together and supplied as a pair. Fully sealed. Available in wooden storage case against price adder.
SAV 242.29
Length
Nom. holding Dimensions in mm Weight Width of Workpiece force in kg block diameter Width Height in daN
Wooden storage case SAV No.
70 100 150
40 50 50
50 80 100
36 60 90
50 80 125
15 20 23
1.0 3.0 5.0
539.01 539.02 539.05
Ordering example: Permanent Magnetic V Block SAV 242.29 - 100 Ordering key: Name SAV - No. - Length 186 Chapter 10 Technical data subject to change without prior notice
Permanent Magnetic Clamping Block

With powerful cross prisms Features: 4 magnetic faces (top, bottom and 2 side faces). With two opposite switch positions, inclusive separate key. Switchable permanent magnet with strong holding force. Prism on upper surface. Available in wooden storage case SAV 539.04 against price adder. Rectangularity: Planar parallelism: 0.025 mm 0.015 / 100 mm
SAV 242.31
Nom. hold. Nom. hold. force in V force on surface in daN in daN
Workpiece diameter
Weight in kg
80 125 180
80 125 180
80 125 180
20 35 55
30 100 200
10 - 28 10 - 42 10 - 52
3.1 11.9 41.0
Ordering example: Permanent Magnetic Clamping Block SAV 242.31 - 180 Ordering key: Name SAV - No. - Length

Small size, non-switchable Features: 2 magnetic faces. Available single (S) or in pairs (P). Rectangularity: Planar parallelism: 0.005 mm 0.02 mm
SAV 242.33
Workpiece diameter Weight in kg in mm
30 40 50
30 40 50
30 40 50
6 - 30 6 - 40 6 - 50
0.2 0.5 1.0
Ordering example: Permanent Magnetic V-Block SAV 242.33 - 50 - S Ordering key: Name SAV - No. - Length - Single or pair SAV Workholding and Automation www.sav-workholding.com Chapter 10 187
Magnetic Stand
with hydraulic clamping
SAV 482.01
For dial gauges, non switchable Use: For use on measuring tables, on fixings and on machines. Especially suitable for use in positions with restricted access, in particular on slant mounting surfaces and low-positioned measuring positions. Features: High rigidity through hydraulic clamping. All joints are clamped simultaneously by means of a central knob. When the clamp is released, the stand does not collapse suddenly, which could cause damage to the gauge, but can be moved as required, into a new position. This movement can be set from easy to stiff. The stand offers great flexibility of positioning, each joint having complete freedom of movement. Every measuring position within the working range of 150 mm can quickly and easily be attained. Suitable for 8 mm stem dial gauges. With the fine adjustment on the magnetic base, dial gauges can be positioned within 0,01 mm. The base is fitted with a powerful clamping magnet. Due to the double casing, the magnetic force is effective towards the bottom only. Supplied with protective plate.
Dimensions in mm Base Base Overdiameter height hang Weight in kg
35
30
150
0.45
Ordering example: Magnetic Stand SAV 482.01 Ordering key: Name SAV - No.
Magnetic Stand
with hydraulic clamping
SAV 482.03
With fine adjustment for measuring Use: For measuring and testing on machines and special equipment. Features: Robust construction with long life. High rigidity through hydraulic clamping. Two ball joints and one central joint provide movement in every direction. Clamping by means of a clamping bolt with star grip. With switchable magnetic base.
Reach
Dimensions in mm Overall Magnetic Magnetic Magnetic Weight height base width base depth base height in kg
260 400
310 480
60 75
50 50
55 55
1.5 3.0
Ordering example: Magnetic Stand SAV 482.03 - 400 Ordering key: Name SAV - No. - Reach 188 Chapter 10 Technical data subject to change without prior notice
Magnetic Stand
with mechanical clamping

8 mm
SAV 482.40
With fine adjustment for measuring Use: For measuring and testing on machines and special equipment. Features: Robust construction with long life. High rigidity through mechanical clamping. Clamping by means of a clamping bolt with star grip. With switchable magnetic base.
Reach
Dimensions in mm Overall Magnetic Magnetic Magnetic Weight height base width base depth base height in kg
340
255
60
50
55
1.5
Magnetic Stand
with mechanical clamping
SAV 482.41
With fine adjustment for measuring Use: For measuring and testing on machines and special equipment. Features: Robust and versatile measuring stand with fine adjustment and switchable magnetic base with "V". Suitable for measuring tool with 6 or 8 mm stem.
Dimensions in mm Overall Magnetic Magnetic Magnetic Column Column height base width base depth base height diameter length
Weight in kg
240 280
58 73
50 50
55 55
12/10 180 16/14 225
1.5 2.3
Ordering example: Magnetic Stand SAV 482.41 - 280 Ordering key: Name SAV - No. - Overall height SAV Workholding and Automation www.sav-workholding.com Chapter 10 189
Universal Magnetic Stand

Precision construction Use: For measuring and testing on machines and special equipment. Features: Finest precision design with switchable magnetic base. Fixed magnetic clamping force. "V" in the base makes this stand suitable for all flat and cylindrical surfaces. The strong column and the cross beam are both chrome-plated. The cross beam is equipped with a fine adjuster with an 8 mm H7 fitting and a dovetail fitting.
SAV 482.42
Overall height
Dimensions in mm Holding Weight Weight Magnetic Magnetic Magnetic Column Cross beam Dial gauge Connection force of base of stand in N in kg in kg Extension base width base depth base height diameter diameter clamp (H7) thread
285 500
180 180
70 75
46 60
65 80
16 20
16 16
8 8
M 10 M 12
60 80
1.30 2.70
2.33 5.00
Ordering example: Universal Magnetic Stand SAV 482.42 - 500 Ordering key: Name SAV - No. - Overall height
Magnetic Stand
For measuring
with flexible column
SAV 482.43
Use: For general purpose measuring in any position. Features: High magnetic clamping force. ON/OFF switching by means of rotary switch.
Overall height
Dimensions in mm Magnetic Magnetic Magnetic base width base depth base height
Weight in kg
315
58
50
55
1.5
Ordering example: Magnetic Stand SAV 482.43 Ordering key: Name SAV - No. 190 Chapter 10 Technical data subject to change without prior notice
Magnetic Stand
For measuring Use: For measuring and testing on machines and equipment. Features: Robust construction with high magnetic clamping force. Magnet is turned on and off by means of a rotary switch. "V" in base for clamping on cylindrical surfaces.
SAV 482.45
Dimensions in mm Overall Column Magnetic Magnetic Magnetic height diameter base width base depth base height Thread
Weight in kg
305
20
80
55
80
M 12
3.2
Permanent Magnetic Base

Switchable Use: For supports, truing device, dial gauge stands etc. Features: Permanent magnet with ON/OFF switching. 2 magnetic surfaces and a "V" groove. (SAV 482.70 - M 10 x 117 without "V" groove.)
SAV 482.70
Dimensions in mm Thread Length Width
Nom. clamping force Weight in kg Height in daN
M 8 M 8 M 10 M 8 M 10
58 73 73 120 117
50 50 50 60 60
55 55 55 52 55
20 30 30 50 40
1.0 1.3 1.3 2.5 2.0
Ordering example: Permanent Magnetic Base SAV 482.70 - M 10 x 1 17 Ordering key: Name SAV - No. - Thread x Length SAV Workholding and Automation www.sav-workholding.com Chapter 10 191
Dial Gauge
For use with magnetic stand; with shock protection Use: High precision measuring device for height and runout measurements. Features: Shock protected, operationally robust dial gauge with 1 indicator revolution = 0.1 mm. The 100 line scale permits easier reading.
Dimensions in mm Scale Measuring resolution range
SAV 482.92
Dial diameter
No. of scale lines
58
0.001
100
Ordering example: Dial Gauge SAV 482.92 Name SAV - No. Ordering key:
Magnetic Capturing Rod

For sorting steel parts Use: Permanent magnetic capturing rod with NdFeB as magnetic material for capturing steel parts. The captured parts can easily be loosened by pulling back the grip. Design: Stable brass tube design, brightly nickelized. Maximum operating temperature: 100C
SAV 512.03
Dimensions in mm Weight in kg Tube Centre flange Overall Effective diameter diameter length magnetic length
28
47
440
90
0.75
Ordering example: Magnetic Capturing Rod SAV 512.03 Ordering key: Name SAV - No.
Hand Plate Lifter with belt

For separating sheets Use: For depiling and lifting of sheets up to 2mm thickness. For carrying on the right or left inner flat of the hand. Can also be put on the outer flat of the hand for holding of srews or similar small parts. Design: The permanent magnetic system, which is kept in a stable pressure casing, guarantees high holding forces. Spare belts are available on request.
*measured at vertical pull-off Nom. Holding force in daN* Weight in kg Dimensions in mm
SAV 532.11
56 43.5
Length Width Height 64 37 14
20
0.1
64
Ordering example: Hand Plate Lifter with belt SAV 532.11 Ordering key: Name SAV - No. 192 Chapter 10 Technical data subject to change without prior notice
20 34 37
14
CHAPTER 11
Holding magnets Holding magnets Holding magnet, hard ferrite Holding magnet, hard ferrite Holding magnet, hard ferrite Holding magnet, hard ferrite Holding magnet, hard ferrite Holding magnet, hard ferrite Holding magnet, hard ferrite Holding magnet, hard ferrite Holding magnet, hard ferrite Holding magnet, hard ferrite Holding magnet, hard ferrite Holding magnet, hard ferrite Holding magnet, hard ferrite Holding magnet, AlNiCo Holding magnet, AlNiCo Holding magnet, AlNiCo Holding magnet, AlNiCo Pot-, button-, strong and bar magnets Pot magnet Flat pot magnet Button magnet Strong magnet Pot magnet Bar magnets Holding magnets Holding magnet, SmCo5 Holding magnet, SmCo5 Holding magnet, SmCo5 Holding magnet, SmCo5 Holding magnet, NdFeB Holding magnet, NdFeB Holding magnet, NdFeB Holding magnet, NdFeB Holding magnet, NdFeB Holding magnet, NdFeB Holding magnet, NdFeB Holding magnet, NdFeB also with fitting tolerance smooth, without bushing through hole with counter bore bushing with inner thread with inner thread, also in stainless execution with smooth bushing high energy magnets, also in stainless execution also with fitting tolerance smooth, without bushing with threaded bush bushing with inner thread bushing, anisotropic, with bore and recess, inner thread with inner thread through hole with counter bore with through hole with through hole with releasing bolt square and round Remarks technical information through hole with counter bore bushing with inner thread without threaded bush with threaded bush with spherical holding surface with pressing notches with spherical holding surface / pressing notches with inner thread with 2 or 3 threaded bushings with spherical holding surface / threaded bush through hole with counter bore with plastic cover / inside thread with plastic cover / inside thread with inner thread with bushing smooth, without fitting tolerance smooth, with fitting tolerance
Page 193 - 230
SAV-No. 240.01 240.02 240.03 240.08 240.20 240.21 240.22 240.23 240.24 240.25 240.27 240.30 240.31 240.04 240.05 240.06 240.07
Page 194-199 200 200 201 201 202 202 203 203 204 204 205 205 205 206 206 207 207
240.11 240.12 240.13 241.14 240.15 241.06
208 208 209 209 210 210
240.09 240.10 240.34 240.35 240.14 240.16 240.17 240.19 240.18 240.33 240.36 240.38
211 211 212 212 213 213 214 214 215 215 216 216
Chapter 11
193
Organizing Magnets
With personal print
So that your advertisement is always visible...

With our organizing magnets your company will be remembered everywhere. The application of these magnets is versatile and attractive; attach drawings, plates and plans quickly and secure in offices, factories, social areas, etc.
So that you stay focussed...

The holding magnets consist of powerful magnet bodies in nicely-shaped plastic or steel covers. The plastic covers are partly free for printing of logos or other lay-out according your wishes. In the following chapter you will certainly find the right execution; even or with eye, hook, threads or simply flat with your logo or personal print.
Many possibilities...
SAV can provide printed or formed surfaces according your personal design. Attractive packaging shapes and sizes are possible.
194
Chapter 11
CHAPTER 11
Magnetic cores Magnetic core, hard ferrite Magnetic core, AlNiCo 500 Magnetic core, AlNiCo 500 Magnetic core , SmCo5 Magnetic core, Nd2Fe14B Magnetic core Remarks from Oxid 300 machining through grinding in lengths to choice with high nominal holding force high energy magnet with extreme high nominal holding force
Page 193 - 230
SAV-No. 240.40 240.45 240.46 240.50 240.55 240.56
Page 217 218 218 219 220 221
Holding magnets, magnetic ball-joints, holding plates Magnetic holding plates Magnetic ball-joint Holding magnet with plastic cover Rubber covers for holding magnets Permanent magnets, magnetic tape Flexible permanent magnets Magnetic tape Magnetic tape Organizing magnets Organizing magnets Organizing magnets Organizing magnets Organizing magnets Organizing magnets Organizing magnets Organizing magnets in plastic housing in steel housing with steel cover in plastic cover printable printable with personal print 240.80 240.83 240.84 240.85 240.88 240.89 240.90 227 228 228 229 229 230 230 light machining possible can be cut with scissors self-adhesive 240.70 240.71 240.72 225 226 227 from Oxid-Ceramic permanent magnetic clamping on sensitive surfaces for scratch-sensitive surfaces 240.60 240.36-KG 10 240.41 240.39 222 223 224 225
Chapter 11
195
Holding Magnets
Influences of installation and use on the magnetic holding forces.
Magnetic effect of iron poles

Iron poles can cause a high density of lines of force in a magnetic circuit. This leads to a considerably improved adhesive effect as the magnetic flux is guided around the corner and is concentrated on the holding surface. An approximate multiplying factor for the holding forces is given in the depicted arrangements below. a)
S N N S
Magnetic effect of a return plate

N
Open magnetic core as disc or rod without influence from the iron poles: Factor 1 With iron return plate: Factor 1.3
a far-reaching, concentric magnetic field is produced when there is an opposite pole arrangement of two holding magnets on a return plate just as it would be necessary for collecting magnets Thin iron sheets with good adhesion require a high density of lines of force just barely over the upper surface of the magnet, and this can be attained by multi-pole magnetization.
Multi-pole magnetization:
b)
N S
Holding force upper surface quality

c)
N S N S
With iron return plate and centre pole: Factor 4.5
20% 40% 50% 70% 90%
0.20 0.15 0.10 0.05 0.02
The percentage corresponds with the remaining holding force when there are various different qualities of upper surface.
d)
N S
Magnetic disc in iron pot (adhesive magnetic disc): Factor 6 Magnetic ring in iron pot with additional centre pole: Factor 7 Magnetic rod made of AINiCo in iron sleeve (pot magnets): Factor 7.5 Magnetic plate in Uprofile made of iron: Faktor 5.5
Material dependence of the adhesive force

techn. pure iron St 37 1.00 0.94 0.82 0.75 0.7 0.6 0.5
Low rate of ferromagnetic material - eg. iron - leads to lower adhesive forces.
e)
N S N S
St 34 GS and St 50 St 70 GT 16MnCr5 GG 0.3
f)
N S
Dependence of surface to the holding forces
g)
S N S S
100%
20 - 30%
30 - 40%
h)
Sandwich-arrangement consisting of a magnetic plate between 2 flat iron poles: Factor 18 Parallel connection of several sandwicharrangements Factor 18 x quantity
Installation of magnetic cores

N S N S installed in nonmagnetizeable materials(brass, V2A, aluminium) Installed in iron, St, magnetic short circult
i)
N
S N
A magnetic short circuit arises when both magnetic poles are connected through iron. Therefore connections should be made of non magnetizeable materials, like e.g. brass or stainless steel.
196
Chapter 11
Holding Magnets
Advice for use and methods of magnetization.
The following points should be observed when using holding magnets:

Strong attractive forces, especially with high-energy magnets can lead to finger contusions if used improperly. Wearers of pace-makers must avoid strong magnetic fields at all costs! When using measuring equipment and mechanical gauges, the influential or disturbing effect of the magnetic field should be monitored, Keep a safe distance! Because of the strong attractive forces sparks can arise during operation; if they occur in an area in danger of explosion, they may ignite. Radioactive rays and high temperatures reduces the magnetization in the long run. The hard, brittle, sintered magnets could shatter into many sharp pieces if met with sudden impact. In order to guarantee a temporal continuous adhesive force, when using AINiCo-magnets, care must be taken that they are not exposed to large impacts, and they do not have to bridge air gaps for a longer period of time without an anchor, or workpiece. During chip removal machining of all high-energy magnets made of rare earths and plastic bound magnets, the selfigniting danger of the dry grid or the chips is to be monitored. Therefore the machining should be done wet. Small hairline cracks or chips on sintered magnets are production limited and have no influence on the magnetic qualities. There are no known damaging etfects on the human body caused by magnetic fields, as they arise from permanent magnets It is not possible, to indicate the holding force of an open permanent magnet.
Magnetization possibilities of permanent magnets:

axial
S N S N N S N S N
strip sized lateral on a surface P =pole pitch
S N
completely magnetized in the height

N S N
diametral
S N S N N S
S N
N S
axial sector sized magnetized eg. 6-pole
N S N S N S N S N S
sector sized* lateral on a surface. eg. 6-pole
N N N N N N N N
radial*
S
multi-pole lateral* on the perimeter eg. 4-pole
The types of magnetization marked with * are only possible with isotropic magnetic materials.
Chapter 11
197
Holding Magnets
Technical terrns and physical parameters of permanent magnetic materials
Technical explanations and terms from the magnet technology:

The maximum energy product (B x H)max is the quality value. The bigger the energy product, the more energy is stored in the magnetic material. It results trom the largest possible flux density B and field strength H on the demagnetizing characteristic curve. The remanence Br is given in Tesla (T) or Millitesla (mT) or - in the cgs-system - in Gauss (G) . The remanence is the remaining magnetization in a magnet that bas been magnetized to saturation, or it is the flux density in a closed magnetic circuit. The coersive force is the necessary retarding field strength in kA/m or Oersted (Oe), in order to demagnetize a magnet again. The higher the value, the better the demagnetization durability. One differentiates between H and JHC x BHC stands for the coersive force under B C a feeded retarding field (B) and JHC stands for the coersive force during which the demagnetization of the magnet also maintains even when the retarding field has been turned off (polarization J -> magnetization M). The coersive force JHC is important for magnets, that have strong coersive forces in relation to remanence. The permeability in Vs/Am is is the magnetic conductivity. At almost all magnetic materials, the permeability is only a little bit higher than at air, whereas at iron it is a thousand times moreso. The permeability is composed by two components, one which is conditioned by the magnetic field strength and another which results from the magnetization of the material. The temperature coefficient TKBR of the remanence in 1/K gives the reversible decrease of the remanence assuming the room temperature is 20C - per 1K temperature increase. The maximum temperature during use tmax (C) is only an approximate value, as there is dependency on the dimensioning of the magnet (length / diameter-ratio L/D). The given value is only reached, when the product of B and H reaches a maximum (see magnet dimensioning). If the Curie temperature tcurie in C is reached, every magnetic material loses its holding force irreversibly and must be newly magnetized. The density p or the specific weight is given in g/cm3.
Physical parameters of permanent magnetic materials:

Magnetic material Energy product Remanence
max
Coersive force (T = 20 C)
B
(B x H)
Br
mT 245 380 400 1120 550 590 G 2450 3800 4000 11200 5500 5900 7000 8000 8500
HC
Oe 2200 2891 3457 590 4500 5900 5230 6033 7800
HC
Oe 2600 2954 3645 603 7500 8045 11060 15000
Relative remanent permeability kAm 1.40 1.45 1.65 23.80 1.05 1.10 ~ 1.70
kJ/m3 MGOe Betaflex (BaFe) plastic bonded anisotropic Hard Ferrite (SrFe) AlNiCo 500 fine casting SamariumCobalt plastic bonded NeodymiumIron Boron plastic bonded SamariumCobalt SmCo5 SamariumCobalt SmCo17 NeodymiumIron Boron NdFeB 12 27 32 35 56 64 80 96 1.5 3.4 4.0 4.4 7.0 8.0
kA/m 175 230 275 47 360 416 416 480 620
kA/m 207 235 290 48 600 640 880 1193
Temperature Max. Curiecoefficent of temperature tempe- Density remanence during use rature TKBr t maxC t CurieC p 1/K g/cm3 - 0.20 % - 40 + 85 ca. 200 450 80 450 3.7
- 0.20 % - 0.02 % - 0.04 % - 0.10 % (25-90) - 0.04 % (20-100)
450 860 725
5.0 7.4 5.1
10.0 - 700 12.0 800 850
120
310
~ 6.0
143 - 18.0 159 20.0
1.37
ca. 250
725 750 800 310
8.2 8.2
159 - 20.0 175 22.0
900
9000 10800 11200
636 780836
8000 9800 10500
1193
15000
1.42 1.33 1.38
0.03 % (20-100) - 0.10 %
ca. 300 100 120
223 - 28.0 - 1080 239 30.0 1120
>1350 >1600
7.4
198
Chapter 11
Holding Magnets
Design guidelines for permanent magnetic systems
Magnet dimensioning with help of the demagnetizing characteristic curve

Magnets can not be randomly constructed or established like other design parts. The dimensioning of pole surface to length in magnetization direction must correspond with their magnetic values.
Fig. 1 Remanence B B
If one connects this new-found operating point horizontally with the B-axis and vertically with the H axis, one can read the remanence and coersive force. If B and H have the largest possible value, the operating point is in (B x H) maximum value. When using an open magnet, which is used without an iron return plate, the dimensioning should be chosen so that the operating point is near the (BxH) maximum value. If there is an iron return plate situated behind the magnet, the Iength L in the L/D-ratio can be doubled for an approximate value estimation. That requires that the thickness of the iron return plate is so designed, that no magnetic saturation takes place. With quadratic, or almost quadratic magnetic pole surfaces, the pole surface can be equated with the following formula.
/D
-ra
tio
Br B x H operating point Ba
field strength
BHC
T1 Ha
The highest magnetic energy is then available when the product of remanence Band field strength H reaches a maximum. That is the case, when the biggest possible rectangle forms itself under the demagnetizing characteristic curve of B to H (see figure 1). The following diagram has a scale at the side for the relationship between Iength and diameter of a magnet (L/D-ratio). When using a magnetic disc of 10 mm diameter and 5 mm thickness the L/D-ratio is 5 : 10 = 0.5. If one draws a line from the 0.5 mark to the zero, the point of intersection on the characteristic curve of the corresponding magnet is the operating point (BxH) of this magnetic disc.
D=
AxBx4
The following curves for the various magnetic materials are simplified and portrayed without temperature characteristics. A temperature change causes a shift of the operating point on the characteristic curve. As long as the operating point stays in the linear area of the demagnetizing characteristic curve, the remanence changes reversibly, that means, after the cooling the original value returns. Otherwise, the change is irreversible and can only be undone by new magnetizing. See temperature line T1 in figure 1.
Fig. 2 1.5 2.0
3.0 4.0
1.4 1.3 1.2 1.1 1.0 0.9 0.8 0.7 0.6 Flux density B in Tesla [T] (0.1 T = 1000 G)
1.01.2 0.90 0.80 0.70 0.60 0.50 AlNiCo 500 0.40 B Fe 0.30 Nd
0.25 0.20 0.15 0.10 0.05 800 700 600 500 400
Sm la ,p Co
/D
-ra
tio
Sm
Co
sti c n bo de d
0.5 0.4 0.3
id Ox
30
e Typ
MF
10
0.2 0.1 0 0
300
200
100
demagnetizing field H in kA /m (1 kA /m = 12.56 OE)
Chapter 11
199
Holding Magnet
hard ferrite
SAV 240.01
Through hole with counter bore Design: Protected system, Surface galvanized. Max. application temperature: 200 C Magnetic material: Hard ferrite (Oxid 380) Mounting possibility: Screws from the holding surface. The screws must be non-magnetic material. Note: Also available in stainless steel execution (f.e. SAV 240.01-MH1-40-RF) A 0.2 MH 1 - 16 16 MH 1 - 20 20 MH 1 - 25 25 MH 1 - 32 32 MH 1 - 40 40 MH 1 - 50 50 MH 1 - 63 63 MH 1 - 80 80 MH 1 - 83 83 MH 1 - 100 100 Type
Dimensions in mm
A
Counter sink Nom. force in N Weight in kg RF Nom. force in N
C B
RF Weight in kg
B 0.2 4.5 6.0 7.0 7.0 8.0 10.0 14.0 18.0 18.0 22.0
C 3.3 4.2 5.5 5.5 5.5 8.5 6.5 6.5 10.5 10.5
D 7.0 9.0 11.0 11.0 11.0 22.0 24.0 11.5 32.0 34.0
E 1.6 2.1 2.5 2.5 2.5 -
90 90 90 90 90 -
14 27 36 72 90 180 290 540 600 680
0.004 0.009 0.016 29 0.0165 0.027 58 0.0270 0.052 72 0.0530 0.085 145 0.0850 0.195 230 0.1950 0.458 0.444 0.815 -
D 90 A C B
Ordering example: Holding Magnet SAV 240.01 - MH 1 - 40 - RF Ordering key: Name SAV - No. - Type - stainless steel execution
Holding Magnet
Bushing with inner thread
hard ferrite
Magnetic material: Hard ferrite (Oxid 380) Mounting possibility: Screw
SAV 240.02
Design: Flat holding magnet with threaded bush. Protected system, Surface galvanised. Max. application temperature: 200 C Note: Also available in stainless steel execution (f.e. SAV 240.02-MH2-09-RF) Type MH 2 - 01 MH 2 - 02 MH 2 - 03 MH 2 - 04 MH 2 - 05 MH 2 - 06 MH 2 - 36 MH 2 - 07 MH 2 - 47 MH 2 - 08 MH 2 - 57 MH 2 - 09 MH 2 - 10 MH 2 - 11 MH 2 - 12
Dimensions in mm
A 0.2 10 13 16 20 25 32 36 40 47 50 57 63 80 100 125
B 0.2 4.5 4.5 4.5 6.0 7.0 7.0 7.7 8.0 9.0 10.0 10.5 14.0 18.0 22.0 26.0
C D 0.2 E 0.2 F 0.2 M3 6 11.5 7 M3 6 11.5 7 M3 6 11.5 7 M3 6 13.0 7 M4 8 15.0 8 M4 8 15.0 8 M4 8 16.0 8 M5 10 18.0 10 M4 8 17.0 8 M6 12 22.0 12 M4 8 18.5 8 M8 15 30.0 16 M 10 20 34.0 16 M 12 22 43.0 21 M 14 25 50.0 20
Nom. force in N
Weight in kg
4 10 18 30 40 80 100 125 180 220 280 350 600 900 1300
0.003 0.004 0.006 0.011 0.020 32 0.031 64 0.042 0.059 100 0.086 0.110 175 0.147 0.245 280 0.499 0.956 1.720 -
RF Nom. force in N
RF
M5 M5 M5 M5 M5 -
D C
3 A B E
Ordering example: Holding Magnet SAV 240.02 - MH 2 - 12 - RF Ordering key: Name SAV - No. - Type - stainless steel execution 200 Chapter 11 Technical data subject to change without prior notice
Holding Magnet
Without threaded bush
hard ferrite
SAV 240.03
Design: Flat holding magnet without threaded bush. Protected system, Surface galvanized. Max. application temperature: 200 C Mounting possibility: Press, glue Magnetic material: Hard ferrite (Oxid 380) Type MH 3 - 01 MH 3 - 02 MH 3 - 03 MH 3 - 04 MH 3 - 05 MH 3 - 06 MH 3 - 07 MH 3 - 08 MH 3 - 09 MH 3 - 10 MH 3 - 11 MH 3 - 12 MH 3 - 36 MH 3 - 47 MH 3 - 57
Dimensions in mm
Note: For all flat holding magnets, including Type MH 3 applies, that hair-cracks at the holding surface of the inserted magnetic material and a centre offset are technically not avoidable. This has no influence on the functionality. Ordering example: Holding Magnet SAV 240.03 - MH 3 - 10 - RF Ordering key: Name SAV - No. - Type - stainless steel execution
A 0.2 B 0.2 10 4.5 13 4.5 16 4.5 20 6.0 25 7.0 32 7.0 40 8.0 50 10.0 63 14.0 80 18.0 100 22.0 125 26.0 36 7.7 47 9.0 57 10.5
Holding force in N
Weight in kg
RF Holding force in N
4 10 20 30 40 80 110 200 320 600 900 1300 100 180 280
0.002 0.003 0.005 0.010 0.018 0.029 0.055 0.100 0.230 0.468 0.915 1.680 0.040 0.084 0.140
3 8 16 24 32 64 88 160 256 480 720 1040 80 144 224
A B Holding surface
Holding Magnet
With threaded bush
hard ferrite
SAV 240.08
Design: Flat holding magnet with threaded bush, surface galvanized. Protected system. Max. application temperature: 200 C Type MH 8 - 10 MH 8 - 13 MH 8 - 16 - 1 MH 8 - 16 - 2 MH 8 - 20 - 1 MH 8 - 20 - 2 MH 8 - 25 - 1 MH 8 - 25 - 2 MH 8 - 25 - 3 MH 8 - 32 - 1 MH 8 - 32 - 3 MH 8 - 32 - 4 MH 8 - 47 MH 8 - 57 - 2 MH 8 - 63
Dimensions in mm Holdig force in N Weight in kg
A 0.2 B 0.2 10 4.5 13 4.5 16 4.5 16 4.5 20 6.0 20 6.0 25 7.0 25 7.0 25 7.0 32 7.0 32 7.0 32 7.0 47 9.0 57 10.5 63 14.0
C M3 M3 M3 M4 M3 M6 M4 M5 M6 M4 M6 M8 M6 M6 M6
D 11.5 11.5 11.5 11.5 12.0 36.0 15.0 22.0 27.0 15.0 19.0 17.0 17.0 18.5 29.0
4 10 18 18 30 30 40 40 40 80 80 80 180 280 350
0.002 0.003 0.005 0.005 0.010 0.015 0.019 0.020 0.022 0.030 0.031 0.032 0.085 0.146 0.233
Magnetic material: Hard ferrite (Oxit 380) Mounting possibility: Screw Note: For holding magnet with threaded bushes in more powerful execution, please see SAV 240.33 - MH 33.
Ordering example: Holding Magnet SAV 240.08 - MH 8 - 32 - 1 Ordering key: Name SAV - No. - Type SAV Workholding and Automation www.sav-workholding.com Chapter 11 201
Holding Magnet
With spherical holding surface
hard ferrite
SAV 240.20
Design: Flat holding magnet without threaded bush. Protected system, surface galvanized. For use as for instance, lamp magnet. Max. application temperature: 200 C Magnetic material: Hard ferrite, anisotropic Application: Press, glue, screw
A C Type MH 20
Dimensions in mm Holding Weight force in in kg N*
Ordering example: Holding Magnet SAV 240.20 - MH 20 Ordering key: Name SAV - No. - Type
Holding Magnet
With pressing notches
hard ferrite
Design: Flat holding magnet with notches at the outside diameter, dor pressing, gluing, filling. Protected system. Max. application temperature: 200 C Magnetic material: Hard ferrite Mounting possibility: Press, glue, fill
A 0.2 B 0.2 MH 21 - 16 16 4.5 MH 21 - 20 - 2 20 6.0 MH 21 - 25 - 2 25 7.0 MH 21 - 32 32 7.0 MH 21 - 40 40 8.0 MH 21 - 50 50 10.0
Type
Dimensions in mm
C 1.5 - 3.0 2.5 - 4.5 3.0 - 5.0 3.0 - 5.0 3.5 - 5.5 4.0 - 6.0
D E 16.5 - 18.0 120 20.5 - 22.0 60 25.5 - 27.0 60 32.5 - 34.0 120 41.0 - 43.0 60 51.0 - 53.0 45
Holding Weight force in kg in N
Ball
* The indicated holding force is only reached on a polished ball with diameter 105 mm.
A 0,2 B 0,2 40 15
C 3.2
D 0.1
E 105
22
0.079
18 30 40 80 125 220
0.005 0.010 0.018 0.029 0.055 0.102
SAV 240.21
B C D A
Ordering example: Holding Magnet SAV 240.21 - MH 21 - 50 Ordering key: Name SAV - No. - Type 202 Chapter 11 Technical data subject to change without prior notice
Holding Magnet
hard ferrite
SAV 240.22
With spherical holding surface / pressing notches Design: Flat holding magnet, without threaded bush. Surface galvanized. Notches on the outside diameter. For use as for instance, lamp magnet. Protected system. Max. application temperature: 100 C Magnetic material: Hard ferrite, anisotropic Mounting possibility: Press, glue B F A 0,2 B 0,2 MH 22 25 7.2 Type
Dimensions in mm Holding Weight force in kg in N*
D x 120
C 17
D 3
E 25.8
F 0.1
15
0.015
* The indicated holding force is only reached on a polished ball with diameter 70 mm
A C D
Ball 7
Ordering example: Holding Magnet SAV 240.22 - MH 22 Ordering key: Name SAV - No. - Type
Holding Magnet
With inner thread
hard ferrite
SAV 240.23
Design: Protected system, surface galvanized. Max. application temperature: 200 C Magnetic material: Hard ferrite (Oxid 380) Mounting possibility: Screw
Type MH 23 - 25 - 07 MH 23 - 32 - 07 MH 23 - 40 - 08 MH 23 - 50 - 10 MH 23 - 50 - 10 MH 23 - 63 - 14 MH 23 - 80 - 18 MH 23 - 80 - 18
Dimensions in mm
A 0.2 B 0.2 25 7 32 7 40 8 50 10 50 10 63 14 80 18 80 18
C 4 4 4 6 8 8 8 10
D 5.2 5.2 5.2 12.0 12.0 13.0 14.5 14.5
Weight Holding force in kg in N
0.018 0.029 0.053 0.094 0.094 0.206 0.472 0.466
36 75 90 170 170 290 550 550
D A
Ordering example: Holding Magnet SAV 240.23 - MH 23 - 40 - 08 Ordering key: Name SAV - No. - Type Type SAV Workholding and Automation www.sav-workholding.com Chapter 11 203
Holding Magnet
With 2 or 3 threaded bushings
hard ferrite
SAV 240.24
Design: Protected system, surface galvanized. Can be supplied with 2 or 3 threaded bushing. Max. application temperature: 200 C Magnetic material: Hard ferrite Mounting possibility: Threaded bushings for 2 or 3 screws 2 threaded bushes
3 threaded bushes
MH 24
600 0.483
Type
A 0,2 B 0,2 C 80 18 M4
D 8
E F 24.5 67
Dimensions in mm
Holding Weight force in kg 0,2 in N
E Ordering example: Holding Magnet SAV 240.24 - MH 24 - 3 Ordering key: Name SAV - No. - Type - No. of threaded bushings
Holding Magnet
hard ferrite
SAV 240.25
With spherical holding surface / threaded bush Design: Flat holding magnet with outside thread, protected system, surface galvanized. or use as, for instance, lamp magnet. Max. application temperature: Magnetic material: Hard ferrite, anisotropic Mounting possibility: Screw A E F 100 C
Type MH 25
Ordering example: Holding Magnet SAV 240.25 - MH 25 Ordering key: Name SAV - No. - Type 204 Chapter 11 Technical data subject to change without prior notice
Ball
* The indicated holding force is only reached on a polished ball with diameter 70 mm.
70
A 0,2 B 0,2 25 9.1
C 17
D 0.1
E M5
F 4
15
0.021
Dimensions in mm
Holding Weight force in kg in N*
12
Holding Magnet
hard ferrite
SAV 240.27
Through hole with counter bore Design Flat holding magnet with cylindrical through hole. With plastic cover available in black (S) or white (W). Protected system. Max. application temperature: 60 C Magnetic material: Hard ferrite, anisotropic Mounting possibility: Screw
E C Type MH 27
Dimensions in mm Holding Weight force in kg in N*
A 84
B 20
C 6.4
D 12
E 12
F 5
650 0.470 D A
Ordering example: Holding Magnet SAV 240.27 - MH 27 - S Ordering key: Name SAV - No. - Type - Color
Holding Magnet
hard ferrite
With plastic cover / inside thread Design: Flat holding magnet with inside thread. With plastic cover and centre in grey SAV 240.30 With plastic cover in black SAV 240.31 Protected system. Max. application temperature: 60 C Magnetic material: Hard ferrite, anisotropic Mounting possibility: Screw SAV 240.30 Type MH 30
Dimensions in mm
SAV 240.30
SAV 240.31
A 66
B 16
C M10 x 1
D 15
E 12
F 2
290 0.216 D C F B E A Chapter 11 205
Ordering example: Holding magnet SAV 240.30 - MH 30 Ordering key: Name SAV - No. - Type SAV 240.31 Type MH 31 - 41 MH 31 - 60 MH 31 - 80
Dimensions in mm Holding Weight force in kg in N
A 41 60 80
B 12.2 17.3 20.2
C M6 M6 M6
115 0.072 300 0.238 480 0.495
Ordering example: Holding Magnet SAV 240.31 - MH 31 - 80 Ordering key: Name SAV - No. - Type SAV Workholding and Automation www.sav-workholding.com
SAV 240.30 / 240.31
Holding Magnet
With inner thread
AlNiCo
SAV 240.04
Design: Cylindrical holding magnet, smooth without fitting tolerance. Protected system Max. application temperature: 450 C Magnetic material: AlNiCo 500 Mounting possibility: Screw Note: In enhanced execution see SAV 240.14 For use in injection moulds with high pressure please specify.
Dimensions in mm Holding force in N
D
Weight in kg
Type MH 11 - 06 MH 11 - 08 MH 11 - 10 MH 11 - 13 MH 11 - 16 MH 11 - 20 MH 11 - 25 MH 11 - 32
0.2
6 8 10 13 16 20 25 32
B 0.2 20 20 20 20 20 25 35 40
C M3 M3 M4 M4 M4 M6 M6 M8
D 5 5 7 7 5 7 9 9
1.7 4.0 8.5 12.0 20.0 45.0 100.0 190.0
0.003 0.006 0.010 0.016 0.025 0.055 0.135 0.230
A
1)
1)
Holding surface
When machining the holding surface, the maximum machining depth is 2 mm, otherwise the holding force will decrease significantly.
Ordering example: Holding Magnet SAV 240.04 - MH 11 - 32 Ordering key: Name SAV - No. - Type
Holding Magnet
With bushing
AlNiCo
SAV 240.05
Design: Cylindrical holding magnet with bushing. Protected system. Max. application temperature: 450 C Magnetic material: AlNiCo 500 Mounting possibility: Riveting of bushing or screwing after applying thread to the bushing. For use in injection moulds with high pressures please specify. Type MH 5 - 01 MH 5 - 02 MH 5 - 03 MH 5 - 04 MH 5 - 05 MH 5 - 06 MH 5 - 07 MH 5 - 08 MH 5 - 09 MH 5 - 10 MH 5 - 11
Dimensions in mm
D
A 0.2 B 0.2 6 28 8 28 10 28 13 28 16 28 20 33 25 45 32 50 40 70 50 85 63 95
C 20 20 20 20 20 25 35 40 50 60 65
D 3 3 4 4 5 6 8 10 15 18 20
E 2 3 6 7 5 6 5 3 5 2 5
2)
1.7 4.0 8.5 12.0 20.0 45.0 100.0 190.0 240.0 420.0 660.0
0.004 0.007 0.013 0.021 0.032 0.062 0.137 0.245 0.520 0.961 1.580
Note: 1) When machining the holding surface, the maximum machining depth is 2 mm, otherwise the holding force will decrease significantly. Bushing can be extended to size e without loosing holding force.
2)
Ordering example: Holding Magnet SAV 240.05 - MH 5 - 10 Ordering key: Name SAV - No. - Type 206 Chapter 11
C
1)
Holding surface
B 0.2
Holding Magnet
AlNiCo
SAV 240.06
Smooth, without fitting tolerance Design: Cylindrical holding magnet, smooth without fitting tolerance. Protected system. Max. application temperature: 450 C Magnetic material: AlNiCo 500 Mounting possibility: Press, shrink, glue Type MH 6 - 01 MH 6 - 02 MH 6 - 03 MH 6 - 04 MH 6 - 05 MH 6 - 06 MH 6 - 07 MH 6 - 08 MH 6 - 09 MH 6 - 10 MH 6 - 11
Dimensions in mm Holding force in N Weight in kg
A C2) 12 11 10 8 6 5 13 9 10 10 10
A 0.2 B 0.2 6 20 8 20 10 20 13 20 16 20 20 25 25 35 32 40 40 50 50 60 63 65
1.7 4.0 8.5 12.0 20.0 45.0 100.0 190.0 240.0 420.0 660.0
0.004 0.007 0.011 0.019 0.029 0.061 0.140 0.240 0.500 0.900 1.500
C
1) Holding surface Note: 1) When machining the holding surface, the maximum machining depth is 2 mm, otherwise the holding force will decrease significantly. 2) Magnet height can be reduced to size c without loosing holding force.
Holding Magnet
Smooth, with fitting tolerance
AlNiCo
SAV 240.07
Design: Cylindrical holding magnet, smooth with fitting tolerance h6. Protected system. Max. application temperature: 450 C Magnetic material: AlNiCo 500 Mounting possibility: Press, shrink, glue
A h6
2)
MH 7 - 01 MH 7 - 02 MH 7 - 03 MH 7 - 04 MH 7 - 05 MH 7 - 06 MH 7 - 07 MH 7 - 08 MH 7 - 09 MH 7 - 10 MH 7 - 11
1.5 3.5 7.0 10.0 18.0 42.0 96.0 180.0 240.0 420.0 660.0
0.002 0.004 0.009 0.017 0.029 0.057 0.110 0.200 0.420 0.720 1.340
C
1) Holding surface Note: 1) When machining the holding surface, the maximum machining depth is 2 mm, otherwise the holding force will decrease significantly. 2)
Type
A h6 6 8 10 13 16 20 25 32 40 50 63
B0.2 10 12 16 18 20 25 30 35 45 50 60
C 2 3 6 7 5 6 5 3 5 2 5
Magnet height can be reduced to size c without loosing holding force.
Ordering example: Holding Magnet SAV 240.07 - MH 7 - 08 Ordering key: Name SAV - No. - Type SAV Workholding and Automation www.sav-workholding.com Chapter 11 207
Pot Magnet
With inner thread Design: Strong magnet with steel housing and threaded blind hole. Surface with red lacquer. Max. application temperature: 100 C for lacquer 400 C for magnetic material Magnetic material: AlNiCo Mounting possibility: Screw
SAV 240.11
Type MH 11 - 17 MH 11 - 21 MH 11 - 27 MH 11 - 35 MH 11 - 65
Dimensions in mm
A 17 21 27 35 65
B M6 M6 M6 M6 M 12
C 16.0 19.0 25.4 30.0 43.0
20 28 68 150 400
0.025 0.050 0.110 0.220 1.080 A
Ordering example: Pot Magnet SAV 240.11 - MH 11 - 65 Ordering key: Name SAV - No. - Type
Flat Pot Magnet

Through hole with counter bore Design: Strong magnet with steel housing and through hole with counter bore. Outside surface with red lacquer. Max. application temperature: 100 C for lacquer 400 C for magnetic material Magnetic material: AlNiCo Mounting possibility: Screw
SAV 240.12
Type MH 12 - 19 MH 12 - 29 MH 12 - 38
Dimensions in mm
A 19 29 38
B 3.5 4.7 4.7
C 8.0 9.0 11.1
25 50 80
0.017 0.044 0.105
A Ordering example: Flat Pot Magnet SAV 240.12 - MH 12 - 38 Ordering key: Name SAV - No. - Type 208 Chapter 11 Technical data subject to change without prior notice
Button Magnet
With through-hole Design: Holding surface separated, with through-hole. Outside surface with red lacquer. Max. application temperature: 100 C for lacquer 400 C for magnetic material Magnetic material: AlNiCo Mounting possibility: Screw from holding surface.
SAV 240.13
Type MH 13 - 13 MH 13 - 19 MH 13 - 25 MH 13 - 32
Dimensions in mm
A 12.7 19.0 25.4 32.5
B 4.7 5.2 5.2 7.0
C 4.0 5.5 5.5 8.0
D 4.8 6.4 8.0 12.0
E 9.5 12.7 19.5 25.0
7 19 29 66
0.006 0.019 0.063 0.105
A Ordering example: Button Magnet SAV 240.13 - MH 13 - 32 Ordering key: Name SAV - No. - Type
Strong Magnet
With trough hole Design: Braced magnet with high nominal holding force, through-hole for mounting from type MH 14-17 onwards. To prevent demagnetizing, magnets are supplied with a steel plate covering both poles. Surface with red hammer-scale. Max. application temperature: 100 C / 400 C Magnetic material: AlNiCo, casted Mounting possibility: Screw, glue Type MH 14 - 05 MH 14 - 10 MH 14 - 17 MH 14 - 20 MH 14 - 25 MH 14 - 29 MH 14 - 35 MH 14 - 39 MH 14 - 41 MH 14 - 54
Dimensions in mm
SAV 241.14
A F A G B B E
D C
Type MH 14 - 05 and MH 14 - 10 without mouting holes D C
E F C D 8.0 7.4 25.0 7.0 20.3 5.0 25.4 5.0 28.6 5.8 44.0 8.0 61.5 7.0 57.0 8.0 82.0 10.5 E 7.8 8.0 7.0 8.0 9.5 11.1 11.0 14.0 15.0 15.0 F 6.5 7.0 8.0 15.0 19.1 22.2 28.0 32.0 40.0 48.0 G 3.3 15.0 9.0 11.0 14.5 17.0 23.0 26.0 26.0 36.0
A 21.4 28.5 22.0 30.4 38.1 44.4 58.0 60.0 70.0 78.0
B 11.3 25.3 22.0 20.3 25.4 29.5 35.0 39.2 41.0 54.0
20 35 45 40 90 120 230 250 320 470
0.012 0.026 0.010 0.063 0.133 0.197 0.500 0.830 1.000 2.200
Type MH 14 - 17 to MH 14 - 29 with one through hole Type MH 14 - 35 to MH 14 - 54 with two through holes Type MH 14 - 39 without through hole
Ordering example: Strong Magnet SAV 241.14 - MH 14 - 29 Ordering key: Name SAV - No. - Type SAV Workholding and Automation www.sav-workholding.com Chapter 11 209
Pot Magnet
With releasing-bolt Design: MH15-2,3,4 with releasing bolt. MH15-5 and 6 with releasing handle and mounting fork. Max. application temperature: 100 C Magnetic material: AlNiCo / hard ferrite Application: As holding magnet, for light to medium handling work. Note: 1) MH 15 - 1 without releasing-bolt, but with T-holding bolt Type MH 15 - 11) MH 15 - 2 MH 15 - 3 MH 15 - 4 MH 15 - 5 MH 15 - 6
Dimensions in mm Holding Permanentforce Magnetin N Material Weight in kg
SAV 240.15
MH 15 - 6 MH 15 - 5 MH 15 - 2, 3, 4
A 50 70 75 44 102 95
B M8 M8 M 12 M8 M8 M8
C 40 63 45 44 75 95
270 AlNiCo 0.600 650 AlNiCo 2.020 400 Hartferrit 2.200 200 AlNiCo 0.520 1700 AlNiCo 6.400 2200 AlNiCo 7.700
Ordering example: Pot Magnet SAV 240.15 - MH 15 - 4 Ordering key: Name SAV - No. - Type
B A
Bar Magnets
Square and round Design: Surface with hammer-scale lacquer, red, not protected. Max. application temperature: 100 C / 400 C Magnetic material: AlNiCo 500, casted Mounting possibility: Press, glue Note: Delivery in pairs. Machining only through grinding. Square bar magnets Type MH 630 MH 631 MH 632 MH 633 MH 634 MH 635 MH 636
Dimensions in mm
A Round bar magnets

Dimensions in mm
C displayed without releasing-bolt
SAV 241.06
A 20 60 50 75 101 40 60
B 10 15 15 15 15 12.5 12.5
C 5 5 10 10 10 5 5
Weight in kg
Type MH 620 MH 621 MH 622 MH 623 MH 624 MH 625 MH 626
0.005 0.055 0.063 0.118 0.174 0.030 0.036
A 10 10 10 20 20 24 30
B 4 5 6 5 6 8 10
Weight in kg
0.001 0.001 0.001 0.002 0.003 0.007 0.018
Type MH 630 to Type MH 636 A B
Type MH 620 to Type MH 626 Ordering example: Bar Magnets SAV 241.06 - MH 635 Ordering key: Name SAV - No. - Type 210 Chapter 11 Technical data subject to change without prior notice
Holding Magnet
Also with fitting tolerance
SmCo5
SAV 240.09
Design: Housing of brass, with integrated sandwich magnetic system. Max. application temperature: 200 C Magnetic material: SmCo5 Mounting possibility: Press, glue B
Dimensions in mm
Ah6 6 8 10 13 16 20 25 32
B1) 10 10 8 6 2 5 7 5
C 20 20 20 20 20 25 35 40
D2) 1.5 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0
8 22 40 60 125 230 400 600
0.5x45 0.004 A Holding surface C 0.008 0.012 Note: 1) Magnet length can be reduced to size b without loosing 0.020 0.032 2) holding force. Min. distance from housing surface to iron surrounding for 0.060 integrated mounting. 0.140 For the backside this only valid, when magnet is reduced to 0.265 size b.
Holding Magnet
Smooth, without bushing
SmCo5
SAV 240.10
Design: Magnets from SmCo5 feature a 3- to 5-fold holding force compared to standard holding magnets. The magnets are surrounded by a steel housing (protection) Max. application temperature: 200 C Magnetic material: Samarium-Cobalt, SmCo5 Mounting possibility: Press, glue, fill Type MH 10 - 01 MH 10 - 02 MH 10 - 03 MH 10 - 04 MH 10 - 05 MH 10 - 06 MH 10 - 07 MH 10 - 08
A0.15 6 8 10 13 16 20 25 32
B0.15 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 6.0 7.0 7.0
5 11 20 40 60 90 150 220
0.001 0.002 0.003 0.005 0.007 0.015 0.027 0.044
Holding Magnet
Design:
SmCo5
SAV 240.34
Through hole with counter bore
Protected system, surface galvanized. Anisotropically magnetized. Max. application temperature: 350 C Magnetic material: SmCo
Type MH 34 - 120 MH 34 - 125 MH 34 - 132 MH 34 - 140
A 0.2 20 25 32 40
B 0.2 6 7 7 8
Dimensions in mm
D 8 8 11 10
4.5 4.5 5.5 5.5
60 80 200 420
0.013 0.024 0.039 0.075
D A
Holding Magnet
SmCo5
SAV 240.35
Bushings with inner thread, high nominal force Design: Protected system, Surface galvanized. Max. application temperature: 200 C Magnetic material: High energy Samarium-Cobalt, SmCo5 Mounting possibility: Screw
Dimensions in mm
A 0.2 B 0.2 6 4.5 8 4.5 10 4.5 13 4.5 16 4.5 20 6.0 25 7.0 32 7.0
C M3 M3 M3 M3 M4 M4 M4 M5
D 6 6 6 6 8 8 8 10
E 11.5 11.5 11.5 11.5 11.5 13.0 14.0 15.5
F 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 8.5
5 11 20 40 60 90 150 220
0.002 0.002 0.003 0.005 0.008 0.016 0.022 0.040
D C
Holding Magnet
NdFeB
SAV 240.14
With inner thread, also in stainless execution Design: Cylindrical holding magnet, smooth without fitting tolerance. Magnets of NdFeB have a 50% higher force compared to SmCo. Protected system Max. application temperature: 80 C Magnetic material: NdFeB Mounting possibility: Screw
Dimensions in mm Holding Holding force force RF in N in N
MH 14 - 06 MH 14 - 08 MH 14 - 10 MH 14 - 13 MH 14 - 16 MH 14 - 20 MH 14 - 25 MH 14 - 32
6 12 24 60 90 135 190 340
1 4 8 16 18 32 73 115
0.003 0.006 0.010 0.016 0.025 0.055 0.135 0.230
1)
Note: 1) When machining the holding surface, the maximum machining depth is 2 mm, otherwise the holding force will decrease significantly.
Ordering example: Holding Magnet SAV 240.14 - MH 14 - 32 - RF Ordering key: Name SAV - No. - Type - stainless steel execution
Holding Magnet
With smooth bushing
NdFeB
SAV 240.16
Design: Cylindrical holding magnet with bushing. Protected system. Max. application temperature: 80 C Magnetic material: NdFeB Mounting possibility: Riveting of bushing or screwing after applying thread to the bushing.
MH 16 - 01 MH 16 - 02 MH 16 - 03 MH 16 - 04 MH 16 - 05 MH 16 - 06 MH 16 - 07 MH 16 - 08
6 12 24 60 90 135 190 340
0.004 0.007 0.013 0.021 0.032 0.062 0.137 0.245
Type
A 0.2 B 0.2 6 28 8 28 10 28 13 28 16 28 20 33 25 45 32 50
C 20 20 20 20 20 25 35 40
D 3 3 4 4 5 6 8 10
E2) 2 3 6 7 5 6 5 3
Weight in kg
C Note: 1) When machining the holding surface, the maximum machining depth is 2 mm, otherwise the holding force will decrease significantly.
2)
1)
Ordering example: Holding Magnet SAV 240.16 - MH 16 - 08 Ordering key: Name SAV - No. - Type SAV Workholding and Automation www.sav-workholding.com
Bushing can be extended to size e without loosing holding force. Chapter 11 213
B Holding surface
B Holding surface
Type
A 0.2 B 0.2 6 20 8 20 10 20 13 20 16 20 20 25 25 35 32 40
C M3 M3 M4 M4 M4 M6 M6 M 8*
D 5 5 7 7 7 9 9 12
Weight in kg
Holding Magnet
NdFeB
SAV 240.17
High energy magnets, also in stainless execution Design: Housing of brass, with integrated sandwich magnetic system. Max. application temperature: 80 C Magnetic material: NdFeB Mounting possibility: Press, glue B
Dimensions in mm
Ah6 6 8 10 13 16 20 25 32
B 10 10 8 6 2 5 7 5
1)
C 20 20 20 20 20 25 35 40
D 1.5 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0

2)
10 22 45 70 150 300 500 720
0.004 0.008 0.012 0.020 0.032 0.060 0.140 0.265
0.5x45 Holding surface C
Note: 1) Magnet length can be reduced to size b without loosing holding force. 2) Holding surface may not be reduced more than size D, otherwise holding for will reduce significantly.
Holding Magnet
Also with fitting tolerance
NdFeB
SAV 240.19
Design: Cylindrical holding magnet, smooth without fitting tolerance. Protected system. Also available with fitting tolerance h6 add (P) to type no. Max. application temperature: 80 C Magnetic material: NdFeB Mounting possibility: Press, shrink, glue
A 0.2 B 0.2 MH 19 - 001 4 10 MH 19 - 002 5 10 MH 19 - 01 6 10 MH 19 - 02 8 12 MH 19 - 03 10 16 MH 19 - 04 13 18 MH 19 - 05 16 20 MH 19 - 06 20 25 MH 19 - 07 25 30 MH 19 - 08 32 35
2.5 4.5 6 12 24 60 90 135 190 340
0.001 0.003 0.004 0.007 0.011 0.019 0.029 0.061 0.140 0.240
Holding surface Note: 1) When machining the holding surface, the maximum machining depth is 2 mm, otherwise the holding force will decrease significantly.
1) 2)
Magnet height can be reduced to size c without loosing holding force.
Ordering example: Holding Magnet SAV 240.19 - MH 19 - 08 - P Ordering key: Name SAV - No. - Type 214 Chapter 11 Technical data subject to change without prior notice
Type
C 2) 5 5 5 7 11 13 15 18 22 27
Holding Magnet
NdFeB
SAV 240.18
High energy magnets smooth, without bushing Max. application temperature: 80 C Magnetic material: Neodymium, NdFeB Mounting possibility: Press, glue, fill
Dimensions in mm
0.15
0.15
6 8 10 13 16 20 25 32
4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 6.0 7.0 7.0
5 13 25 60 95 140 200 350
0.001 0.002 0.003 0.005 0.007 0.015 0.022 0.040
Holding Magnet
NdFeB
SAV 240.33
High energy magnets, with threaded bush Design: Holding magnet with threaded bush, surface galvanized. Protected system. Max. application temperature: 80 C Magnetic material: NdFeB Mounting possibility: Screw
Type MH 33 - 10 MH 33 - 13 MH 33 - 16 MH 33 - 20 MH 33 - 25 MH 33 - 32
Dimensions in mm
A 10 13 16 20 25 32
B 4.5 4.5 4.5 6 7 7
C M4 M5 M6 M6 M6 M6
D 12.5 12.5 12.5 16 17 17
25 60 95 140 200 350
0.003 0.005 0.008 0.016 0.025 0.048
Holding Magnet
NdFeB
SAV 240.36
Bushing with inner thread, high nominal force Design: Protected system, surface galvanized. Max. application temperature: 80 C Magnetic material: NdFeB Mounting possibility: Screw.
Dimensions in mm
A 0.2 B 0.2 6 4.5 8 4.5 10 4.5 13 4.5 16 4.5 20 6.0 25 7.0 32 7.0
C M3 M3 M3 M3 M4 M4 M4 M5
D 6 6 6 6 6 8 8 10
E 11.5 11.5 11.5 11.5 11.5 13.0 14.0 15.5
F 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 8.5
5 13 25 60 95 140 200 350
0.002 0.003 0.004 0.005 0.007 0.016 0.027 0.045
D C
Holding Magnet
NdFeB
SAV 240.38
High energy magnets, bushing, anisotropic, with bore and recess, inner thread Design: Protected system, surface galvanized. Anisotropically magnetized. Max. application temperature: 80 C Magnetic material: NdFeB With bore and recess: Type MH 38 - 216 MH 38 - 220 MH 38 - 225 MH 38 - 232 MH 38 - 240 With inner thread: Type MH 38 - 332 MH 38 - 340 MH 38 - 350 MH 38 - 363 MH 38 - 375 A 0.2 32 40 50 63 75 B 0.2 7 8 10 14 15
Dimensions in mm
A 0.2 16 20 25 32 40
B 0.2 4.5 6 7 7 8
Dimensions in mm
D 6.6 9.0 9.0 11.0 10.6
3.5 4.5 4.5 5.5 5.5
75 105 160 310 500
0.006 0.013 0.024 0.039 0.073
C B D A C B D A
D 5.5 10.5 9.5 11.7 13
5 5 8 10 10
330 500 800 1100 1750
0.040 0.074 0.140 0.315 0.479
Magnetic Core
From Oxid 300
hard ferrite
SAV 240.40
Design: Improved magnetic values as the crystals are pointed in longitudinal direction. Without protection. Max. application temperature: 100 C Magnetic material: Hard ferrite as per DIN 17 410 Mounting possibility: Glue, press or with screws of non-magnetic material. Note: Machining through grinding or with diamond tools is possible. Resistant against weather conditions, oxidation and many chemicals. Contact with food is not allowed. Type MK 10 - 04 MK 10 - 05 MK 10 - 08 MK 10 - 10 MK 10 - 12 MK 10 - 30 MK 10 - 40 MK 10 - 45 Type MK 11 - 15 MK 11 - 20 MK 11 - 21 MK 11 - 31
Dimensions in mm
A 4.0 5.0 8.0 10.0 12.0 30.0 40.0 45.0 A 15.2 20.0 20.0 31.0 B 3.2 4.3 4.2 5.3
B 5.0 2.6 4.0 5.0 6.0 6.0 7.0 9.0 C 6.0 6.5 10.0 15.0
Design A and B ground B ground B ground A ground B ground B ground

Countersink 90
Weight in g
Magnetic discs MK 10 N B A S Magnetic discs with through-hole MK 11 N C B A S Magnetic rings MK 12 N C B A S Magnetic plates MK 13 C B A S Chapter 11 217 N
0.3 0.3 1.0 2.0 3.0 21.0 44.0 72.0

Weight in g
Dimensions in mm
Design
one side both sides both sides one side
5.0 10.0 15.0 55.0
Mounting only with screws of non-magnetic material. Type MK 12 - 19 MK 12 - 20 MK 12 - 30 MK 12 - 36

Dimensions in mm
A 19.5 20.0 30.0 36.0
B 6.5 10.0 16.0 27.5
C 10.0 4.3 5.0 8.0 9.0 20.0 C 7.5 5.0 10.0 7.8 20.0 25.0
Design C ground C ground C ground b sunken at one side C ground Design C ground C ground C ground C ground Through-hole 14 mm
Weight in g
13.0 5.0 13.0 17.0 29.0 401.0

Weight in g
MK 12 - 40 40.0 22.0 MK 12 - 100 100.0 70.0 Type MK 13 - 12 MK 13 - 25 MK 13 - 40 MK 13 - 50 MK 13 - 75 MK 13 - 100 A 12 25 40 50 75 100 B 12 10 20 25 50 100
Dimensions in mm
5.0 6.0 40.0 49.0 375.0 1250.0
Ordering example: Magnetic Core SAV 240.40 - MK 12 - 100 Ordering key: Name SAV - No. - Type SAV Workholding and Automation www.sav-workholding.com
Magnetic Core
Machining through grinding
AlNiCo 500
Note: Due to the high remanence and small field strength of AlNiCo, the magnets should not be stored in the same pole direction (repellent), as demagnetizing can occur. Machining only through grinding.
SAV 240.45
Design: Improved magnetic values as the crystals are pointed in longitudinal direction. Without protection. Outside rough, short sides are ground. Max. application temperature: 400 C Magnetic material: AlNiCo 500 Mounting possibility: Glue, press. Round bar magnets MK 20: Type MK 20 - 15 MK 20 - 20 - 4 MK 20 - 20 - 5 MK 20 - 25 MK 20 - 32 MK 20 - 45 MK 20 - 60 MK 20 - 120
Dimensions in mm
0.2
0.2
Weight in kg
B N Square bar magnets MK 21: Type MK 21 - 25 MK 21 - 32 MK 21 - 20 MK 21 - 60

A S
3 4 5 6 8 10 15 20
15 20 20 25 32 45 60 120
0.001 0.002 0.003 0.005 0.012 0.026 0.078 0.150
Round bar magnets MK 20
0.3
0.2
4.8 6.3 10.0 15.0
4.8 6.3 5.0 5.0
C 0.3 25.4 32.0 20.0 60.0
0.004 0.009 0.007 0.033
C N S
A B S
Ordering example: Magnetic Core SAV 240.45 - MH 21 - 60 Ordering key: Name SAV - No. - Type
Square bar magnets MK 21
Magnetic Core
In lenghts to choise
AlNiCo 500
SAV 240.46
Design: Ground short sides, Magnet unprotected. Max. application temperature: 450 C Magnetic material: AlNiCo 500 Mounting possibility: Press, glue Type MK 30 - 03 MK 30 - 04 MK 30 - 05 MK 30 - 06 MK 30 - 07 MK 30 - 08 MK 30 - 10 MK 30 - 12 MK 30 - 14 MK 30 - 15 MK 30 - 20 A
Dimensions in mm 0.2 B 0.2 B 0.2 optimum maximum
3 4 5 6 7 8 10 12 14 15 20
12 16 20 24 28 32 40 48 56 60 80
200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200
Note: Indication of holding force values are not possible with open magnetic systems. Machining through grinding. Intermediate sizes can also be supplied.
Ordering example: Magnetic Core SAV 240.46 - MK 30 - 12 x 50 Ordering key: Name SAV - No. - Type x Length 218 Chapter 11 Technical data subject to change without prior notice
Magnetic Core
SmCo5
SAV 240.50
With high nominal holding force Design: The holding magnets are manufactured through sintering. The magnets are hard and fragile and can only be machined in unmagnetized condition. Max. application temperature: 200 C Remanence: 8500 to 9300 G Magnetic material: Samarium-Cobalt, SmCo5 Unprotected, anisotropic Mounting possibility: Glue, press
Magnetic discs MK 40 N B
Magnet plates MK 41 N C
Magnetic rings MK 42 N C S B A S
Dimensions in mm
Magnetic discs MK 40: Type MK 40 - 01 - 03 MK 40 - 02 - 04 MK 40 - 02 - 02 MK 40 - 02 - 10 MK 40 - 03 - 02 MK 40 - 04 - 02 MK 40 - 04 - 05 MK 40 - 05 - 02 MK 40 - 05 - 03 MK 40 - 05 - 05 MK 40 - 06 - 02 MK 40 - 06 - 04 MK 40 - 06 - 10 MK 40 - 07 - 03 MK 40 - 08 - 05 MK 40 - 10 - 03 MK 40 - 10 - 05 MK 40 - 10 - 10 MK 40 - 15 - 05 MK 40 - 15 - 10 MK 40 - 20 - 05 MK 40 - 25 - 08 MK 40 - 25 - 15

Dimensions in mm
Magnetic plates MK 41: B 3 4 2 10 2 1.5 5 2 3 5 2 4 10 3 5 3 5 10 5 10 5 8 15

Weight in g
A 1.5 1.8 2.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 4.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 6.0 6.0 6.0 7.0 8.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 15.0 15.0 20.0 25.0 25.0
Type MK 41 - 02 - 02 - 01 MK 41 - 03 - 03 - 02 MK 41 - 04 - 04 - 02 MK 41 - 05 - 05 - 03 MK 41 - 05 - 05 - 02 MK 41 - 06 - 03 - 01 MK 41 - 10 - 07 - 02 MK 41 - 10 - 10 - 03 MK 41 - 12 - 09 - 03 MK 41 - 15 - 15 - 06 MK 41 - 16 - 12 - 03 MK 41 - 18 - 16 - 04 MK 41 - 26 - 21 - 05 MK 41 - 30 - 10 - 06 MK 41 - 30 - 20 - 10 MK 41 - 32 - 27 - 06
1.0 1.0 1.0 0.3 0.1 0.2 0.5 0.3 0.5 0.8 0.5 1.0 2.0 1.0 2.0 2.0 3.0 7.0 7.0 15.0 13.0 33.0 62.0
A 2 3 4 5 5 6 10 10 12 15 16 18 26 30 30 32
B 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 4.5 3.0 7.0 10.0 9.0 15.0 12.0 16.0 21.0 10.0 20.0 27.0
C 1.0 2.0 2.0 3.0 1.5 1.0 2.0 3.0 2.5 6.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 10.0 6.0
Weight in g
0.1 0.2 0.3 0.6 0.3 0.2 1.0 3.0 2.0 11.0 5.0 10.0 23.0 15.0 50.0 44.0
Magnetic rings MK 42: Type MK 42 - 20 - 10 - 05 MK 42 - 25 - 12 - 08 MK 42 - 30 - 10 - 10 MK 42 - 40 - 15 - 10

Dimensions in mm
Note: The magnetic values are not decreased, even at strong reversed fields. Special dimensions available on request. Tolerances according DIN 7168, medium
A 20 25 30 40
B 10 12 10 15
C 5 8 10 10
Weight in g
0.4 0.4 0.5 0.9
Ordering example: Magnetic Core SAV 240.50 - MK 40 - 01 - 03 Ordering key: Name SAV - No. - Type SAV Workholding and Automation www.sav-workholding.com Chapter 11 219
Magnetic Core NdFeB

High energy magnets Design: Neodymium is the strongest available magnetic material. Compared to Samarium-Cobalt, the energy is approx. 40% higher and the volume is approx. 12% less. The magnets are produced through sintering. Max. application temperature: 80 C Remanence: 10,000 to 12,500 G Magnetic material: Neodymium, Nd2Fe14B unprotected. Mounting possibility: Glue, press.
SAV 240.55
Magnetic discs MK 50 N B
Magnetic plates MK 51 N C
Dimensions in mm
A Magnetic discs MK 50: Type MK 50 - 02 - 02 MK 50 - 02 - 04 MK 50 - 02 - 10 MK 50 - 03 - 03 MK 50 - 04 - 01 MK 50 - 04 - 02 MK 50 - 04 - 05 MK 50 - 05 - 03 MK 50 - 05 - 10 MK 50 - 06 - 02 MK 50 - 06 - 05 MK 50 - 08 - 06 MK 50 - 09 - 05 MK 50 - 10 - 03 MK 50 - 10 - 05 MK 50 - 14 - 04 MK 50 - 15 - 03 MK 50 - 15 - 05 MK 50 - 20 - 05 MK 50 - 20 - 10 MK 50 - 25 - 07
A Magnetic plates MK 51:
Dimensions in mm
A 1.5 2.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 5.0 5.0 6.0 6.0 8.0 9.0 10.0 10.0 13.5 15.0 15.0 20.0 20.0 25.0
B 2.0 4.0 10.0 3.0 1.2 1.5 5.0 3.0 10.0 2.0 5.0 6.0 5.0 3.0 5.0 3.5 3.0 5.0 5.0 10.0 7.0
Weight in g
Type MK 51 - 02 - 02 - 01 MK 51 - 03 - 03 - 01 MK 51 - 04 - 04 - 02 MK 51 - 04 - 05 - 05 MK 51 - 05 - 05 - 02 MK 51 - 05 - 05 - 01 MK 51 - 06 - 03 - 01 MK 51 - 06 - 06 - 05 MK 51 - 08 - 08 - 06 MK 51 - 10 - 07 - 02 MK 51 - 10 - 10 - 03 MK 51 - 10 - 10 - 06 MK 51 - 12 - 09 - 03 MK 51 - 15 - 15 - 05 MK 51 - 18 - 16 - 04 MK 51 - 20 - 10 - 05 MK 51 - 20 - 20 - 08 MK 51 - 30 - 10 - 06 MK 51 - 30 - 30 - 06 MK 51 - 50 - 20 - 08 MK 51 - 75 - 50 - 10 Magnetic rings MK 52: Type MK 52 - 15 - 05 - 06 MK 52 - 20 - 04 - 05 MK 52 - 20 - 10 - 06 MK 52 - 25 - 12 - 08 MK 52 - 40 - 23 - 06
0.1 0.1 0.2 0.2 0.1 0.1 0.5 0.4 2.0 0.4 1.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 7.0 23.0 25.0
A 2.0 3.0 4.0 4.8 5.0 5.0 6.0 6.0 8.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 12.0 15.0 18.0 20.0 20.0 30.0 30.0 50.0 75.0
B 2.0 3.0 4.0 4.8 5.0 4.5 3.0 6.0 8.0 7.0 10.0 10.0 9.0 15.0 16.0 10.0 20.0 10.0 30.0 20.0 50.0
C 1.0 1.0 2.0 4.5 2.0 1.5 1.0 5.0 6.0 2.0 3.0 6.0 2.5 5.0 4.0 5.0 8.0 6.0 6.0 8.0 10.0
Weight in g
0.1 0.1 0.2 0.8 0.4 0.2 0.1 1.0 1.0 3.0 2.0 4.0 2.0 8.0 9.0 7.0 24.0 13.0 40.0 59.0 278.0
Note: The magnetic values are not decreased, even at strong reversed fields. The magnets are corrosion-sensitive in humid surroundings and not resistant against acids and salts. Special dimensions available on request.
Dimensions in mm
A 15 20 20 25 40
B 5.0 4.2 10.0 12.0 23.0
C 6.0 5.0 6.0 8.0 6.0
Weight in g
7.0 11.0 10.0 22.0 37.0
Ordering example: Magnetic Core SAV 240.55 - MK 50 - 02 - 02 Ordering key: Name SAV - No. - Type 220 Chapter 11 Technical data subject to change without prior notice
Magnetic Core
With extreme high nominal holding force Design: Epoxy-bound Neodymium magnets are not sintered like other materials, but the magnetic powder is mixed with epoxy and hot-pressed in moulds. On request the form-pressed standard magnets can be machined in unmagnetized state according customer-specification. Max. application temperature: 80C Remanence: approx. 6800 G Tolerance : 0.1 to 0.2 mm Magnetic material: Neodymium, Nd2Fe14B Unprotected. Mounting possibility: Glue, press. Magnetic discs MK 60 N B C S Magnetic plates MK 61 N
SAV 240.56
Dimensions in mm
Magnetic material: Neodymium, Nd2Fe14B Plastic bonded, isotropic magnetized. Mounting possibility: Glue, press. Magnetic discs MK 60: Type MK 60 - 02 - 05 MK 60 - 03 - 10 MK 60 - 04 - 10 MK 60 - 05 - 10 MK 60 - 06 - 02 MK 60 - 06 - 10 MK 60 - 08 - 03 MK 60 - 10 - 05 MK 60 - 10 - 10 MK 60 - 13 - 05 MK 60 - 13 - 10 MK 60 - 15 - 03 MK 60 - 20 - 08 MK 60 - 25 - 05
Dimensions in mm
Magnetic plates MK 61: B 5.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 2.0 10.0 3.0 5.0 10.0 5.0 10.0 3.0 7.7 5.0
Weight in g
A 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 6.0 8.5 10.0 10.0 12.5 12.5 15.0 20.0 25.0
Type MK 61 - 05 - 05 - 02 MK 61 - 10 - 05 - 05 MK 61 - 24 - 12 - 10 MK 61 - 50 - 10 - 10 MK 61 - 50 - 12 - 10 MK 61 - 30 - 30 - 10 Magnetic rings MK 62: Type MK 62 - 26 - 22 - 05 MK 62 - 30 - 16 - 05 MK 62 - 35 - 21 - 05 MK 62 - 35 - 21 - 10
0.1 0.4 0.8 1.2 0.3 1.7 1.0 2.0 5.0 4.0 7.0 3.0 15.0 15.0
A 5.0 10.0 24.0 50.0 50.0 30.0
B 5.0 5.0 12.0 10.0 12.0 30.0
C 2.0 5.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0
Weight in g
0.3 2.0 18.0 30.0 36.0 54.0
Dimensions in mm
A 26 30 35 35
B 22.0 16.0 21.0 21.0
C 5.0 5.0 5.0 10.0
Weight in g
5.0 15.0 18.0 37.0
Note: The magnetic values are not decreased, even at strong reversed fields. The magnets can be used without protected surface at relative humidity upto 50% and normal ambient temperature. No special dimensions possible.
Ordering example: Magnetic Core SAV 240.56 - MK 60 - 02 - 05 Ordering key: Name SAV - No. - Type SAV Workholding and Automation www.sav-workholding.com Chapter 11 221
Magnetic Holding Plates

From Oxid-Ceramic Design: Magnetic strips with steel cover and mounting lips. Max. application temperature: 100 C Magnetic material: Hard ferrite Mounting possibility: Screw
SAV 240.60
5 12 9 16 20 2 80 2
10
83 103
Type HL 11 Holding force: Weight: 110 N ca. 0.105 kg
67 7
1.5
14
55
5 2 12 80 16 20
5 103
Ordering example: Magnetic Holding Plates SAV 240.60 - HL 13 Ordering key: Name SAV - No. - Type 222 Chapter 11 Technical data subject to change without prior notice
Magnetic-Ball Joint
Permanent magnetic Design: Magnetic holding of the ball in the steel seat. Because the ball is not linked mechanically, a wide swivelling range of 180 is possible. If the holding force is exceeded, the magnetic connection is broken. Surface galvanized. Max. application temperature: 100 C Overall tolerance: 0.1 mm Overal length tolerance: 1.0 mm Diameter tolerance of magnet: h6 (except SAV 240.36 - MG10-12) Magnetic material: Samarium-Cobalt, SmCo5 Mounting possibility: Clamp, press, screw
SAV 240.36 KG 10
SAV 240.36 - KG10 - 12
SAV 240.36 - KG10 - 10 - 10 to SAV 240.36 - KG10 - 25
E
Note: The magnetic ball joints are conducting electric current and are therefore suitable as quick release and rotating connection in low current electric systems, such as low voltage lights or testing tools. Another application example is the use as breaking section in rods. Due to the high sliding forces of the ball joint, it can also securely hold optical lens system scans, cameras, lights or lasers, without the need of mechanical fixtures.
A KG10 - 12
G A KG10 - 10 - 10 to KG10 - 25
Type 12 10 - 10 10 - 12 13 - 13 13 - 18 16 20 25
Dimensions in mm
H F 3.5* 12 12 12 12 12 16 16 G -* M3 M3 M4 M4 none M5 M5 H -* 5 5 6 6 5 7
F
A 12.5 10.0 10.0 13.0 13.0 16.0 20.0 25.0 B 8 10 12 13 18 16 25 25 C 12 20 20 20 20 20 25 35 D E 18.0 M 4* 28.0 M 3 30.5 M 3 31.0 M 4 36.0 M 4 34.0 M 4 47.0 M 5 56.0 M 5
* Ball with inside thread M4 x 3.5 mm. without thread on back side.
Ordering example: Magnetic-Ball Joint SAV 240.36 - KG 10 - 25 Ordering key: Name SAV - No. - Type SAV Workholding and Automation www.sav-workholding.com Chapter 11 223
10 18 18 40 40 70 150 200
0.017 0.017 0.019 0.032 0.038 0.054 0.116 0.216
Holding Magnet
Clamping on sensitive surfaces
with plastic cover
SAV 240.41
The suction function of the rubber surface give an extremely good lateral sliding force. These rubber covered holding magnets are especially suitable for magnetic mounting of parts as commercial displays, safety lights and car roofs, but also for scratch-free mounting of plates or samples on high polished, chromed or painted surfaces.
The holding magnets are provided with high-energy magnets from Neo-Delta magnet (NdFeB).These magnets do not only have a high holding force, but are also completely demagnetizing-resistant. The holding force is also not reduced after many years of usage. Due to the multi-pole assembly, a sealed magnetic field is achieved on the holding surfaces. This gives a good holding force, also on thin and painted car bodies.
Magnetic holding discs with rubber layer and bush with inner thread
Type MG 12 MG 43 MG 66 MG 88
A 12.0 43.0 66.0 88.0
B 7.0 6.0 8.5 8.5
C 14.8 12.0 15.0 17.0
D 8.0 8.0 10.0 12.0
E 1* 2* M 4 12.0 10.0 M 4 77.0 55.0 M 5 180.0 125.0 M 8 420.0 280.0 C E These magnetic holding discs are also available with outer threaded bush. D A B
31
43
1* - St 37 - 8 mm 2* - Steel sheet - 0.8 mm
Type MG 43 - M 6 x 15 MG 66 - M 8 x 15 MG 88 - M 8 x 15
With treaded bush
M 6 x 15 mm M 8 x 15 mm M 8 x 15 mm
Magnetic holding plates with rubber layer with 6 built in high energy magnets Type - MG 10 St 37 (mild steel) Steel sheet
Holding force at Holding force in N
8.0 0.8
120 80
M4
Holding magnet combination with rubber covered magnets, which are moveably mounted to a triangle aluminium holding plate. Good holding on bended car-body sheets. Type - MG 43 St 37 Steel sheet
Holding force at Holding force in N
6.0 0.8
230 165
Holding force in N
Type - MG 66 St 37 Steel sheet
Holding force at
6.0 0.8
540 375
Provided with 3 magnetic holding discs MG 66
43 with MG 43 66 with MG 66
Ordering example: Holding Magnet SAV 240.41 - MG 12 Ordering key: Name SAV - No. - Type 224 Chapter 11 Technical data subject to change without prior notice
6.
160
Provided with 3 magnetic holding discs MG 43
Rubber Covers for Holding Magnets

For scratch-sensitive surfaces Design: The rubber covers are fitted around the holding surfaces of the appropriate magnets. For holding magnets with a through-hole, covers with a hole are available. Application: For workpieces that must not be scratched, for instance with painted surfaces. Due to the high wearing of the covers, the sliding force of the magnets is doubled and is thereby almost equal to the holding force value. Because of the damping of the rubber, the holding magnets are protected against shocks that normally can damage the magnet.
SAV 240.39
Type MG 40 - 50 MG 40 - 63 MG 40 - 80 MG 41 - 63 MG 41 - 80
Dimensions in mm
Hole without without without with with
Diameter 50 63 80 63 80
Suitable for holding magnets: - SAV 240.01, Type MH 1 - SAV 240.02, Type MH 2 - SAV 240.03, Type MH 3 - SAV 240.05, Type MH 5 - SAV 240.06, Type MH 6
- SAV 240.07, Type MH 7 - SAV 240.08, Type MH 8 - SAV 240.23, Type MH 23 - SAV 240.24, Type MH 24
Ordering example: Rubber Covers for Holding Magnets SAV 240.39 - MG 41 - 80 Ordering key: Name SAV - No. - Type
Flexible Permanent Magnets

Light machining possible Design: Improved magnetic values by pointing of crystals in magnetic field (anisotropic). Resistant against demagnetizing and ageing. Max. application temperature: 85 C Max. bending radius: 8 x thickness Hardness: 40-100 Shore A Density: 3.7 g/cm3 Magnetic material: Hard ferrite, plastic bonded. Application: When bended in a circle ring magnets are created, which can be applied in small DC-motors when placed into the stator housing. Axial magnetized rings or discs can be punched out of these magnetic strips. Magnetic clamping strips are easily to produce by placing the magnetic strips between steel strips, resulting in an excellent holding force (sandwich system, see example). Mounting by gluing or pressing. Easy machining with normal tools. Chemical composition: Air, ozon and moist resistant. Withstands mineral oil, weak acids and bases, kerosene and glycol. Swells with gasoline, acetone, 90% alcohol. Dissolves when in contact with benzene and chloral solvent. Magnet strips
SAV 240.70
Steelstrips St 37 K
NS SN
Dimensions in mm
Type MF 10 - 03 MF 10 - 05 MF 10 - 06 MF 10 - 08 - 30 MF 10 - 08 - 09 MF 10 - 08 - 24
Thickness
0.15
Width
0.25
Length
0.50
3 5 6 8 8 8
25 25 30 30 9 24
200 200 200 200 250 500
Ordering example: Flexible Permanent Magnets SAV 240.70 - MF 10 - 06 Ordering key: Name SAV - No. - Type SAV Workholding and Automation www.sav-workholding.com Chapter 11 225
Magnetic Tape
Can be cut with scissors, holding surface on one side Design: Plastic bonded magnet, can be cut with scissors. Mounting possibility: Magnetic holding tape. Type MB 51 with almost non-magnetic backside and with adhesive material. Holding force Permaflex 424: - Thickness 1.0 mm; 0.55 N/cm2 - Thickness 1.5 mm; 0.57 N/cm2 - Thickness 2.0 mm; 0.58 N/cm2 Magnetic tape, colored MB 50: black (SW), white (WS), red (RT), blue (BL), green (GR), yellow (GB), light-brown (HB)
Dimensions in mm
SAV 240.71
Type MB 50 - 10 MB 50 - 15 MB 50 - 20 MB 50 - 30 MB 50 - 40 MB 50 - 50
Length
per Roll in m
Width Thickness 10 15 20 30 40 50 0.9 0.9 0.9 0.9 0.9 0.9
10 10 10 10 10 10
Magnetic tape, adhesive, anisotropic MB 51 Permaflex, colour red-brown

Dimensions in mm
Type MB 51 - 10 MB 51 - 12 MB 51 - 15 MB 51 - 20 MB 51 - 25 MB 51 - 30
Length
per Roll in m
Width Thickness 10 12.5 15 20 25 30 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5
10 30 10 30 30 10 Magnetic tape, C-profile MB 54 Flexible magnetic holding tape

Dimensions in mm
Magnetic tape, anisotropic MB 52 and MB 53 Permaflex, colour red-brown

Dimensions in mm
Type MB 52 - 10 MB 52 - 15 MB 52 - 20 MB 52 - 30 MB 52 - 40 MB 52 - 50 MB 53 - 10 MB 53 - 15 MB 53 - 20 MB 53 - 30
Length
per Roll in m
Width Thickness 10 15 20 30 40 50 10 15 20 30 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2
Type MB 54 - 10 MB 54 - 15 MB 54 - 20 MB 54 - 25 MB 54 - 30 MB 54 - 40 MB 54 - 50
Length
per Roll in m
Width 10 15 20 25 30 40 50
100 100 100 100 100 100 50 50 50 50
50 50 50 50 50 50 50
Note: All magnetic tape can be supplied in 1 m length against price adder
Ordering example: Magnetic Tape SAV 240.71 - MB 50 - 10 - SW Ordering key: Name SAV - No. - Type - Colour 226 Chapter 11 Technical data subject to change without prior notice
Magnetic Tape
Self-adhesive Design: Improved holding force by positioning of chrystals, one side magnetized, dark-brown with smooth surface, can be cut with scissors. The sliding force is approx. 1/3 of nominal force. Max. application temperature: 75 C Nominal holding force: 0.8 N/cm2 Mounting possibility: Almost non-magnetic backside with adhesive material. Note: 4-pole magnetized; excellent holding force on thin steel sheets.
SAV 240.72
Type MB 60 - 14 MB 60 - 20 MB 60 - 50
Dimensions in mm Length Width per Roll Width Thickness tolerance in m
14 20 50
1.5 1,5 1.5
0.3 0.3 0.5
40 40 40
Ordering example: Magnetic Tape SAV 240.72 - MB 60 - 50 Ordering key: Name SAV - No. - Type
Organizing Magnets
In plastic housing Design: Strong laminated magnet in plastic housing. Magnetic material: Hard ferrite, anisotropic Application temperature: 50C Type MO 10 - 01 Available in 4 executions: Type MO 10 - 01 with eye-bolt, white Type MO 10 - 02 with hook-bolt, white Type MO 10 - 03 with threaded bush M6, black Type MO 10 - 04 with inner thread M6, black Type MO 10 - 03
Total height approx. Holding force in N Weight in kg
SAV 240.80
Type MO 10 - 02
Dimensions in mm
Type MO 10 - 04
Type MO 10 - 01 MO 10 - 02 MO 10 - 03 MO 10 - 04
Length Width Height 58 53 58 58 58.0 27.5 58.0 58.0 15.0 12.5 19.5 15.0
41.5 28.0 42.0 19.5
300 150 300 300
0.130 0.053 0.125 0.119
Ordering example: Organizing Magnets SAV 240.80 - MO 10 - 01 Ordering key: Name SAV - No. - Type SAV Workholding and Automation www.sav-workholding.com Chapter 11 227
Organizing Magnets
In steel housing Design: Holding magnet with hook or eye. (MO 20 - 80). Steel housing with white lacquer. Special colours can be supplied for quantities 1000 pcs. and more (no price adder). Application: As decorating magnet. Magnetic material: Hard ferrite, anisotropic Type MO 20 - 16 MO 20 - 20 MO 20 - 25 MO 20 - 32 MO 20 - 36 MO 20 - 40 MO 20 - 47 MO 20 - 50 MO 20 - 57 MO 20 - 63 MO 20 - 80
Diameter in mm Hook Holding force in N Weight in kg
SAV 240.83
16 20 25 32 36 40 47 50 57 63 80
M3 M3 M4 M4 M4 M4 M4 M4 M4 M4 eye M 6
18 30 40 80 100 125 180 220 280 350 600
0.007 0.012 0.023 0.034 0.045 0.059 0.089 0.107 0.149 0.233 0.485
Ordering example: Organizing Magnets SAV 240.83 - MO 20 - 47 Ordering key: Name SAV - No. - Type
Organizing Magnets
With steel cover Design: Powerful holding magnets with steel housing. With grip for easy removal. Application: Holding magnet with grip, galvanized and white lacquer. For holding paper, drawings, etc. Special colours can be supplied for quantities 1000 pcs. and more (no price adder). Magnetic material: Hard ferrite, anisotropic
SAV 240.84
Type MO 30 - 25 MO 30 - 32 MO 30 - 36 MO 30 - 40
Dimensions in mm Diameter Height
25 32 36 40
29.5 29.5 29.5 30.0
40 80 100 125
0.025 0.035 0.045 0.062
Ordering example: Organizing Magnets SAV 240.84 - MO 30 - 32 Ordering key: Name SAV - No. - Type 228 Chapter 11 Technical data subject to change without prior notice
21.8
Nom. force in N
Weight in kg
Organizing Magnets
In plastic cover Type MO 40 Design: Decoration magnet in white plastic cover in different shapes. Nominal holding force: 120 N Application temperature: max. 50C Application: As decorating magnet, for drawing boards, etc. Magnetic material: Hard ferrite (Oxid 380)anisotropic Note: Form 05 also available with M5 thread*
8 6.2 12.5 2 21.5 ca. 37
SAV 240.85
12.5
20.5
12
6 43 43
10.5 43
4.5
Form 02
8 12.5 12.5
Form 03
8 5.5 0.5 10.5 90 43 2 3
Form 01
12.5 2
M4 43
43
Form 04
Form 05*
Ordering example: Organizing Magnets SAV 240.85 - MO 40 - 01 Ordering key: Name SAV - No. - Type - Form
Form 06
Organizing Magnets
Printable Type MO 50 Design: Powerful holding magnets with nicely shaped cap from coloured plastic. Gripping edge for easy removal (round design). The top of the plastic housing can be silk-screen printed for publicity/advertising on request. Application: For holding paper, drawings, etc. For recognition, for instance on planning and white boards.
Dimensions in mm Holding surface in mm Height Nom. force in N
SAV 240.88
Type MO 50 - 10 - 1 MO 50 - 10 - 2 MO 50 - 16 MO 50 - 20 MO 50 - 25 MO 50 - 30 MO 50 - 36* MO 50 - 11 MO 50 - 35 MO 50 - 21 MO 50 - 37 MO 50 - 55
Magnetic material: Hart ferrite, isotropic / anisotropic Available colours: red RT ; green blue BL ; orange white WS ; grey black SW ; brown yellow GB ; light-blue GN OR GR BR HB
10 10 16 20 25 30 36 11 x 11 35 x 35 21 x 12.5 37 x 22 55 x 22.5
6.5 6.5 7.0 7.5 7.5 8.0 8.5 6.5 9.0 6.5 7.5 8.5
0.7 1.5 1.3 1.5 3.0 6.0 9.5 1.5 6.0 1.5 4.5 7.0
Note: Min. quantity with print; 1000 pcs. Packaging per colour: 10 pcs. * Preferred magnet with high holding force. Colour blue, height 12 mm
Ordering example: Organizing Magnets SAV 240.88 - MO 50 - 36 - BL Ordering key: Name SAV - No. - Type - Colour SAV Workholding and Automation www.sav-workholding.com Chapter 11 229
12.5
Organizing Magnets
Printable Design: Powerful holding magnet with nicely shaped cover of coloured plastic. Cover of eminent ABS with light vaulted surface. Gripping edge for easy removal. The top of the plastic housing can be silk-screen printed for publicity / advertising on request. Application: For holding paper, drawings, etc. For recognition, for instance on planning and white boards. Magnetic material: Hart ferrite, isotropic/anisotropic Available colours: red RT ; green blue BL ; orange white WS ; black yellow GB ; mustard
SAV 240.89
Type MO 60 - 20 MO 60 - 30 MO 60 - 40
Dimensions in mm Diameter Height
Nom. force in N
GN OR SW SN
20 30 40
10 10 10
2 5 8
Note: Min. quantity with print: 300 pcs. Packaging per colour: 10 pcs.
Ordering example: Organizing Magnets SAV 240.89 - MO 60 - 20 - RT Ordering key: Name SAV - No. - Type - Colour
Organizing Magnets
With personal print Type MO 70 Design: Powerful holding magnets in plastic housing. The SAV-Logo can be exchanged with your personal decoration on request. Following versions are available. Shape: A: round, 25 mm B: round, 36 mm C: square, 25 mm D: square, 36 mm Available colours: red RT ; green GN blue BL ; white WS yellow GB Application: For holding paper, drawings, etc. For recognition on for instance planning and white boards. Height: 13 mm Holding force: 8 N at 25 mm Weight: 0.040 kg Magnetic material: Hard ferrite (Oxide 380) Note: Min. quantity with print: 300 pcs. Packaging per colour: 10 pcs. Ordering example: Organizing Magnets SAV 240.90 - MO 70 - A -1 - RT Ordering key: Name SAV - No. - Type - Form - Decoration - Colour 230 Chapter 11 Decoration: 1: smooth, without print 2: with printed sticker 3: direct print 4: as relief with print
SAV 240.90
CHAPTER 12
Precision dressing devices, stamp grinder Precision dressing device Precision radius dressing device Precision angle dressing device Precision angle dressing device Precision wheel side dresser Precision punch grinder Dressing diamonds Precision rotary indexers NC Rotary indexers, indexers with direct drive examples and possibilities of SAV Precision clamping blocks Precision circular grinders Precision circular grinding devices examples and possibilities of SAV for clamping of round parts Remarks application examples for profiling of grinding wheels for angle dressing of grinding wheels for angle dressing of grinding wheels for dressing side faces of grinding wheels for grinding of punchers for dressing
Page 231 - 244
SAV-No. 434.01 434.03 434.05 434.06 434.07 401.01
Page 232-234 235 236 237 238 239 240
207.11
241 242
243
Zero-setting device Zero setting device vertical and horizontal 483.02 244
Chapter 12
231
Applications
232
Chapter 12
Grinding Devices, Indexers, Apparatus

Special solution
Digital-precision-indexer with sine setting and encoder for axis. For measuring purposes the workpieces are clamped with an expanding mandrel.
Precision indexer with hydraulic tailstock and integrated, power operated expanding mandrel. The angle setting of the workpiece adjusted with 2 transducers.
Digital-precision-indexer on base plate with tailstock.
Chapter 12
233
Applications
Positioning of parts for circular and surface grinding in one set-up.
Complete 5-side machining for milling as 5th axis with palletising. On request
234
Chapter 12
Precision Radius Dressing Device

For profiling of grinding wheels Use: With this radius device, grinding wheels with concave and convex radii can be profiled. Design: The lapped, robust spindle runs in a honed hole and is sealed against dust. With angle gauge. The radius movement is limited by adjustable end stops. The bracket with the diamond dresser can be adjusted in height by threads. With the help of a fine adjusting screw on the bracket, one can bring the diamonds in the correct position with high precision. The precision radius dressing device is supplied with 3 replaceable dressing sets and dressing bracket. Optional are 2 additional brackets with a larger withdrawal radius range. Bracket 3 with raiser foot for dressing larger radius ranges. Accessories: Diamond dresser: SAV 401.01 K10, available against price adder.
SAV 434.01
A Axle height Max. grinding wheel diameter Diamond diameter Taper for diamond Weight mm mm mm kg 100 400 6.2 1:10 18.0
140
98.5
128
Examples of profiled grinding wheels
128
Bracket 1 2 3 Withdrawal Radius concave in mm 19 - 112 0-22 / 108-155 151 - 199 Withdrawal Radius convex in mm 0 - 25 21 - 68 Bracket length A in mm 143 143 158
Ordering example: Precision Radius Dressing Device SAV 434.01 - 1 - 2 - 3 Ordering key: Name SAV - No. - Bracket SAV Workholding and Automation www.sav-workholding.com Chapter 12 235
100
100
Precision Angle Dressing Device

For angle dressing of grinding wheels Use: Using this tool grinding wheels can simply be dressed in any angle or shape. For dressing of straights, angles and side faces necessary for grinding flat faces, slot but also accurate angled surfaces. Especially suitable for use on grinding machines without automatic dressing systems. Design: Can be tilted over 90 in both directions from vertical position. Adjustable using degree scale on face side. Accessories: Diamond dresser: SAV 401.01-06 available against price adder.
SAV 434.03
Adjustable in-feed head for diamond SAV 439.60 (in scope of supply)
60
40
30
Base plane approx. Max. stroke Drilling for diamond Weight Tilting range
in mm 70 x 75 in mm 60 in mm 6 in kg 4.1 in 90
52
70 86
ca.
10
12
75
Ordering example: Precision Angle Dressing Device SAV 434.03 Ordering key: Name SAV - No. 236 Chapter 12 Technical data subject to change without prior notice
Precision Angle Dressing Device

For angle dressing of grinding wheels Use: For precise grinding wheel dressing, according the sine principle on surface-grinding-machines. Design: All parts hardened to HRC 60 and precision polished. The starting position of the dresser lies at 45 degrees. Angle accuracy: 5 sec Accessories: Diamond dresser for SAV 434.05 45: SAV 401.01 K10 Diamond dresser for SAV 434.05 100: SAV 401.01 MK1 Application: The required angle is adjusted with end gauges according to an accompanying table (sine principle).
SAV 434.05
SAV 434.05 - 45; Dressing range: 45 mm
G B
SAV 434.05 - 100; Dressing range: 100 mm
Max. dressing range Base plate Height Carriage width Initial position Overall adjusting range Centre distance Weight
in mm
45
100 245 x 78 48 45 0 - 90 MK1 13.5
B x C in mm 140 x 70 F in mm G in kg 40 45 0 - 90 4.75
D x E in mm 142 x 172 232 x 302
in mm 6.2 / 1:10
Ordering example: Precision Angle Dressing Device SAV 434.05 - 100 Ordering key: Name SAV - No. - Max. dressing range SAV Workholding and Automation www.sav-workholding.com Chapter 12 237
Precision Wheel Side Dresser

For dressing the side faces of grinding wheels Use: For dressing the side faces of grinding wheels, for grinding slots; setting from 0.5 to 28 mm. Design: Produced from hardened tool steel HRC 60. Available with (K) or without (N) cooling system on request. Accessories: Diamond dresser; SAV 401.01-08, Type D available against price adder.
SAV 434.06
Wheel-Side Dresser SAV 434.06-K, with cooling system
Wheel-Side Dresser SAV 434.06-N in normal execution, without cooling system
max. 50
Base plate Height Setting range Max. wheel thickness Feed per turn Setting resolution thickness Bore for diamond Weight
mm mm mm mm mm mm mm kg
190 x 72 115 0.5 - 50 50 1 0.010 8 5.0
190 230
65
Ordering example: Precision Wheel Side Dresser SAV 434.06 - K Ordering key: Name SAV - No. - Execution 238 Chapter 12 Technical data subject to change without prior notice
115
Precision Punch Grinder

For grinding of punches and profiling of grinding wheels Application: For grinding of punches with highest accuracy as well as for profiling of grinding wheels. Design: Completely made of steel with the highest accuracy. All parts are hardened and ground. Radius dressing bracket for grinding wheels up to diameter 200 mm is standard part of scope of supply. Handling: The settable stops and a stop pin make it possible to set every desired angle. The stops are, to achieve the highest possible holding force, clamped to a conical strip. The setting screw is used for uncomplicated setting of the prism rest. The required angle is set with the adjustable stops, stop pin and a gauge, according the sine principle. The prism is led in a T-slot, positioned in the middle of the indexing plate. A single bolt is clamping the prism in every position without deviation. Index pin and index disc with 24 notches and 15 degree graduation with an accuracy of 30 sec. Equipped with handle for light turning of index disc. Through hole 30 mm for long punches. The L-shaped execution of the base gives the device additional stability and stiffness. Accessories: Angular bracket Dressing diamond Both against price adder SAV 434.07-01 SAV 401.01-10-92
SAV 434.07
Exemple of produced punches
Radius dressing bracket for grinding wheels upto 200 mm in scope of supply Width Total height Height of centers Depth Length of prism block Clamping range prism Max. withdrawal radius concave Max. withdrawal radius convex Max. withdrawal length Receptacle for diamond Weight
Angular dressing bracket SAV 434.07-01 105 mm 132 mm 76.2 mm 202 mm 40 mm 4 - 25 mm 100 mm 50 mm 10 mm 10 mm 5 kg
Examples of profiled grinding wheels (* angular dressing bracket required)
40 132 30
105 202
80
Ordering example: Precision Punch Grinder SAV 434.07 Ordering key: Name SAV - No. SAV Workholding and Automation www.sav-workholding.com Chapter 12 239
76.2
Dressing Diamonds
For dressing of grinding wheels Use: For use in dressing and punch grinding devices
SAV 401.01
Diameter Quality
10 mm 0.5 carat
10
Dressing diamond SAV 401.01 - 10 - 92: Suitable for Precision Punch Grinder SAV 434.07
ca. 91.5
Dressing diamond SAV 401.01 - 08: Suitable for Precision Wheel Side Dresser SAV 434.06. Diameter Quality 8 mm 0.25 carat
30
ca. 54 Dressing diamond SAV 401.01 - MK1: Suitable for Precision Angle Dresser SAV 434.05 - 100. Diameter Morse taper Quality 12.065 mm MK 1 0.5 carat
17.5
6.2
Dressing diamond SAV 401.01 - K10: Suitable for Precision Dressing Device SAV 434.05 - 45 and SAV 434.01. Diameter Cone proportion Quality 6.2 mm 1 : 10 0.5 carat
ca. 23.5 8 12 ca. 16.5 8.5 9 1 : 10
Diameter Quality
6 mm 0.5 carat
Ordering example: Dressing Diamond SAV 401.01 - 06 Ordering key: Name SAV - No. - Type 240 Chapter 12 Technical data subject to change without prior notice
Dressing diamond SAV 401.01 - 06: Suitable for Precision Dressing Device SAV 434.03 and SAV 434.02.
NC Rotary Indexers, Indexers with direct drive

Examples and possibilities of SAV
SAV 434.47 Digital precision indexer with sine setting (0-90), Heidenhain encoder and display unit. For grinding and measuring. With receptacle MK4.
SAV 434.49 Vice indexer for collets DIN 6388 and ER. With index 15 and 90
SAV 434.51 NC Rotary indexer for universal use. Sealed execution for wire erosion available. Standard with SAV control. Optionally also available for Siemens, Heidenhain and Infranor controls. Ordering example: Ordering key: SAV Workholding and Automation
SAV 434.52 Rotary indexer with direct drive. Also suitable for use as extra machine axis. Available in horizontal and vertical execution. With hydraulic clamping through 6 bar pneumatic supply. Standard supplied with Simudrive 611U.
Chapter 12
241
Precision Clamping Blocks

For clamping of circular parts, also stainless execution (RF) Use For simple, quick and secure clamping of round parts on which, for instance, 3 or 6 surfaces must be ground, eroded or milled. Design Outside precision ground. Made of tool steel hardened to 60 HRC. Receptacles suitable for Deckel collets with tightening thread S20x2 mm and Schaublin 470E (ER32) Suitable for clamping direct on a magnetic chuck or in a machine vice. Supplied without 355E and 470E collets! Collet receptacle: Angular accuracy: Parallel-accuracy: Deckel 355E (D) and Schaublin 470E (Sch) 3 sec. 0.003 / 100 mm PSS 20 - D PSV 10 - D
SAV 207.11
PSV 10 - SCH
light milling
Weight PSV 10 / D / Sch: 1.6 kg / 2.15 kg Weight PSS 20 / D / Sch: 1.4 kg / 1.85 kg
PSS 20 - SCH
S 20 x 2 97 50
50
35
97
PSV 10 - D 55
PSS 20
24
PSV 10 - Sch
55
PSS 20
Ordering example: Precision Clamping Block SAV 207.11 - PSV 10 - D Ordering key: Name SAV - No. - Type - Receptacle 242 Chapter 12 Technical data subject to change without prior notice
Precision Circular Grinding Devices

Specifications available on request
with and without sine base
Circular grinding devices with and without sine function. (1) (4) Available with receptacle Schaublin 470E Deckel 355E (2) (5) SK30, Sine setting 0-45 (3) (6) SK40 0-35 Supplied with control unit SAV 875.40.
with sine function
SAV 434.80 (1) (2) (4) (5)
SAV 434.81 (1) (2) (4) (5)
SAV 434.82 (1) (2) (4) (5)
SAV 434.83 (1) (3) (6)
SAV 434.84 (1) (3) (6)
Control unit SAV 875.40
without sine function
SAV 434.85 (1) (2) (3) (4) Manual operation Also available as indexer
SAV 434.86 (4) Sealed to IP65
SAV 434.87 (4) Sealed to IP65 Driving motor on side
SAV 434.88 (4) With base plate and tail stock
Example workpieces
Chapter 12
243
Zero Setting Device SAV Original

Vertical and horizontal Application For setting of tools (e.g. milling cutters) to zero and for determining the reference point of the machine spindle. No damage to the tools, no guiding gauge or arbours required. Design Resilient touchpad and casing body made of of hardened tool steel, precision ground. Supplied complete with dial gauge (reading accuracy 0.01 mm) in rubber storage gauge. Version with end- stop for horizontal approach of the cutter is available under SAV Nr. 483.02NE2. Usage 1. Bring the resilient touch pad and the reference surface of the device to the same height using a straight edge and set the dial gauge pointer at -0.50. 2. Place the zero setting device NE1 with the ground surface on the workpiece to be machined. For setting the reference point for horizontal spindle with the device NE2, put the lateral side on the workpiece, making sure the side stop stands securely against the workpiece-edge. 3. Move the resting tool on the resilient touchpad, until the dial gauge pointer is at 0.The milling cutter is now positioned exactly 50 mm 0.01 mm positioned above the workpiece to be machined (NE1), or it is up to 0.01 mm above the workpiece-edge (NE2). The reference point can now be entered into the machine control.
SAV 483.02
Type NE 1
Type NE 2
68 45
50 0.01
49.5
Type NE 1
28 Type NE 2 in mm 0.01 in mm 49.5 in mm 51.5 in mm 68 in mm 45 244 Chapter 12 Technical data subject to change without prior notice
Reading accuracy of dial gauge Hught casing reference surface Hught of resilient touch pad Diameter casing Diameter touch pad
Ordering example: Zero setting device SAV 483.02 - NE 1 Name SAV - No. - Type Ordering key:
CHAPTER 13
Precision pull-down vices Precision pull-down vice Precision mini pull-down vice Precision pull-down vice Remarks for precise clamping for precise clamping of small workpieces also in stainless execution
Page 245 - 250
SAV-No. 231.01 231.02 231.06
Page 247 247 248
Prism clamping block Multiple-prism clamping block stainless execution 207.01 249
Precision machine vices High precision machine vice High precision machine vice for precise clamping for precise clamping 233.01 233.07 250 250
Chapter 13
245
All standard- and special clamping devices can be supplied with zero reference systems according specification. We adapt the system used by yourselves. We are glad to advice you of the different possibilities.
Multi-prism clamping device with hydraulic actuation.
Execution with clamping slots (S)
Execution with T-slots (T)
Special execution SAV 231.06
Special solution for centric vice on turn-axis with scale.
246
Chapter 13

For precise clamping Product specification: - chromium steel through hardened to HRC 58 and ground on all sides - large capacity - pull-down-system - clamp-nuts on 4 sides - quick adjustment - stainless type on request Technical data: Square-accuracy: 0.005 / 100 mm Parallel-accuracy: 0.003 / 100 mm Optional: - wooden case against price adder - 231.01-35 and 231.01-48 only available in stainless execution (RF) - width 35 and 48 with quick adjustment over socket pins different from picture
Dimensions in mm
SAV 231.01
light milling
A 35 48 63 73 98 125 150
B 150 180 172 190 230 300 350
C D 70 50 75 50 90 60 100 70 125 80 160 98 210 100
E in kg optional ord.no. 25 1.4 SAV 539.03 25 1.9 SAV 539.03 30 3.7 SAV 539.03 35 4.6 SAV 539.03 40 11.4 SAV 539.05 48 18.5 SAV 539.09 50 24.9 SAV 539.09
Weight
Wooden case
C E
Ordering example: Precision Pull Down Vice SAV 231.01 - 73 Ordering key: Name SAV - No. - A
Precision Mini Pull Down Vice

For precise clamping of small workpieces Use: For precision grinding and EDM applications on small workpieces. Can also be used as electrode holding device for spark erosion SAV 581.05 Type EH 25. Technical data: Square-accuracy: 0.005 / 100 mm Parallel-accuracy: 0.003 / 100 mm Product specification: - chromium steel through hardened HRC 55 and ground on all sides - pull-down-system - mounting threads for use as electrode holder - stainless type on request (RF) Scope of supply: - hexagon key - wooden case optional E C
SAV 231.02
A 25
B 65
C 20
D 30
E 10
0.3 SAV 539.01 B A
Ordering example: Precision Mini Pull Down Vice SAV 231.02 - RF Ordering key: Name SAV - No. - Execution (optional) SAV Workholding and Automation www.sav-workholding.com Chapter 13 247
Dimensions in mm
Weight Wooden case in kg optional ord.no.

For precise clamping Product specification: - chromium steel through hardened HRC 60 and ground on all sides - pull-down-system - quick adjustment with socket pin - clamp-nuts on 4 sides - mounting threads for use with workpiece-stop - workpiece-stop fixed and moveable - prism in moveable jaw optional (P) - stainless type on request (RF)
SAV 231.06
Technical data: Square-accuracy: 0.005 / 100 mm Parallel-accuracy: 0.003 / 100 mm

light milling
Scope of supply: - hexagon key - workpiece-stop fix and moveable - 4 clamps - wooden case optional
C
optional
fixed workpiece stop moveable workpiece stop
Dimensions in mm
A 60 75 100 125 125 125 125 160
B 175 220 260 330 350 370 430 370
C 80 100 120 160 180 200 260 200
D 56 75 87 100 100 100 100 126
E 28 40 45 50 50 50 50 60
F 40 50 55 65 65 65 65 70
Weight in kg
Clamping force in daN
Wooden case optional ord. no.
2.8 5.8 10.9 19.8 20.4 21 27 38.0
1000 2000 3000 4000 4000 3500 3000 5000
SAV 539.03 SAV 539.03 SAV 539.07 SAV 539.09 SAV 539.16 SAV 539.16 SAV 539.16 SAV 539.16
Ordering example: Precision Pull Down Vice SAV 231.06 - 60 - RF Ordering key: Name SAV - No. - A - Edition (optional) 248 Chapter 13 Technical data subject to change without prior notice
Multiple-Prism Clamping Block

For rational multi-clamping Use: Rational simultaneous clamping of round, square and rectangular workpieces like hole punchers, ejector pins and mould inserts. Design: - variable use by changeable base-stands (optional on request) in heights 25/50/75/ 100/150/200 mm or according specification - single positioning and clamping of workpieces - tool steel, through-hardened and ground on all sides - execution SAV 207.01-150 with slots on the side, as recess for workpieces provided with collar, nose or head - special shapes and workpiece-specific solutions possible on request Technical data: Square accuracy : 0.01 / 100 mm Parallel accuracy : 0.01 / 100 mm Scope of supply: Wooden case.
SAV 207.01
SAV 207.01 - 320 also available in stainless execution RF (see chapter 8)
A ca. A + 55
SAV 207.01 - 150 with stands
90 C
Length (C) Width with prism (A) Height (B) 1st side for quantity x 2nd side for quantity x Weight
mm mm mm mm mm kg
150 320 60 95 70 56 15 x 0 - 7 8 x 14 - 32 8 x 0 - 14 8 x 14 - 40 8.5 22.5
Ordering example: Multi-Prism Clamping Block SAV 207.01 - 320 Name SAV - No. - length Ordering key: SAV Workholding and Automation www.sav-workholding.com Chapter 13 249
High Precision Machine Vice

For precise clamping Execution: - Produced from tool steel, hardened to HRC 58 and precision ground. - Clamping slots on long sides - Prism in moving jaw optional - Wooden case optional - Hexagonal socket wrench Technical data: Square-accuracy: 0.005 / 100 mm Parallel-accuracy: 0.003 / 100 mm Scope of supply: - Wooden case optional - Hexagonal socket wrench E
SAV 233.01
light milling
A 48 63 73 96
B 140 160 180 230
C 75 85 95 120
D 55 69 78 92
E 25 30 35 45
F 43 51 56 70
G in kg 30 2.7 30 4.6 40 6.4 40 13.0
SAV 539.03 SAV 539.03 SAV 539.03 SAV 539.07 A
Ordering example: High Precision Machine Vice SAV 233.01 - 96 Ordering key: Name SAV - No. - A
High Precision Machine Vice

For precise clamping Execution: - Produced from tool steel - through-hardened (HRC 58) and precision ground - for precise clamping - Square accuracy: 0.003 / 100 mm - Parallel accuracy: 0.003 / 100 mm Use: Grinding, drilling , measuring, milling Optional: - available with horizontal ground prism in moving jaw (PR) against price adder - available in stainless execution (RF) against price adder - Wooden case against price adder (SAV 539.03) E
Dimensions in mm Weight in kg Wooden case optional ord. no.
SAV 233.07
A 30 50 65 80 100 125 150
B 92 155 175 215 285 285 320
C 30 65 70 110 140 140 170
D 30 50 65 65 80 80 90
E 15 25 30 35 40 40 40
0.5 2.0 4.5 7.5 12.0 18.0 27.0
SAV 539.03 SAV 539.03 SAV 539.03 SAV 539.03 SAV 539.16 SAV 539.16 SAV 539.16
Ordering example: High Precision Machine Vice SAV 233.70 - 150 - PR - RF Ordering key: Name SAV - No. - A - Prism - Stainless 250 Chapter 13 Technical data subject to change without prior notice
Dimensions in mm
Weight
Wooden case optional ord.no.
CHAPTER 14
Vacuum workholding Vacuum clamping technology Vacuum grid chuck, modular Vacuum mat chuck, modular Vacuum circular grid chuck Vacuum rotary connector, compressors Vacuum rotary connector Modular vacuum compressor Vacuum auxiliary storage, accessories Vacuum auxiliary storage Vacuum seal Vacuum safety switch Accessories for vacuum workholding for relief of vacuum compressor for vacuum grid chucks ensures safety through machine interlocking for use with vacuum chucks for circular vacuum chucks for coolant and lubricants Remarks Information and application examples for universal use with rubber vacuum mat with radial grid
Page 251 - 260
SAV-No. 249.03 249.05 / 249.85 249.42
Page 252 253 254 255
249.70 249.72
256 257
249.73 249.76 249.74
258 258 259 260
Chapter 14
251
Vacuum Clamping Technology

Recommendations and examples on how to use Vacuum equipment can be used when non-magnetic materials, like light alloys, heavy and non-ferrous metals, carbides, plastics, glass, wood and nonmagnetic steels and irons etc. are to be machined. The workpieces to be clamped shall have a smooth and flat surface and cannot be porous. During clamping a vacuum is created between workpiece and vacuum chuck. A wide variety of vacuum clamping systems is available for different types of machining tasks. The size of the workpiece surface, the workpiece shape and the evenness are critical factors with regard to the attainable holding forces. Furthermore, in certain conditions the workpiece stiffness is a critical factor for the machining results.
Mat-chuck
Grid circular chuck Grid-chuck
Vacuum-Hydraulic clamping system Energizing through machine table
Vacuum chuck Combination with mechanical clamping system
Application criteria and holding forces of vacuum clamping systems: Due to the increasing use of light alloys and fibre composites which cannot be clamped magnetically the use of vacuum clamping solutions increased in the past years. Despite the limited holding forces, when compared with magnetic workholding (approx. factor 1:10), vacuum technology can be a competitive solution. In case of unwanted residual magnetism, a combination of vacuum and magnetic clamping technology is possible. Further advantages lie like magnetic systems in the overall surface force distribution and is therefore especially suitable for parts sensitive to distortion and vibration. Since the atmospheric air pressure fluctuates from 930 to 1013 hPa, the maximum available vacuum varies equally. This determines the maximum reachable holding force. Taking into account the leakage losses in the system, the flatness and roughness of the contact surface, a maximum holding force of approx. 9.3 N/cm2 can be reached.
Due to its significant effect on the overall holding force, the sealing of the workpiece to the vacuum system is of the utmost importance. The leakage losses are proportional to the workpiece size. In order to keep the pressure losses as low as possible, the capacity of the vacuum pump must be chosen to fit workpiece and chuck size.
Chuck size Capacity in m3/h
< 100 cm2 < 1200 cm2 < 5000 cm2 < 1.0 m2 < 2.0 m2 < 3.0 m2 < 4.5 m2
3 6 16 21 63 100 160
For safety reasons it is recommended that an auxiliary vacuum storage is used in combination with machine interlock. The auxiliary storage provides sufficient vacuum in case of mains drop. Additionally it prevents the compressor to run continuously, leading to overheating and wear due to dirt and chip contamination. Furthermore it provides reduced clamping times.
252
Chapter 14
Vacuum Grid Chuck

For universal use
modular
SAV 249.03
Use: Suitable for simple shaped workpieces with rough clamping surface for heavy machining. Special advantages: - high holding force - universal application - secure clamping of unmachined workpiece surface due to high friction coefficient of clamping surface - sealing cord evens out any irregularities between workpiece and chuck surface Application: - special shapes and sizes on request - the best suitable grid dimensions are determined by workpiece outline and size - clamping area is defined by neoprene sealing cords - vacuum chuck with fine grid for small workpieces with different shapes - forms the basis for many different special solutions in combination with special vacuum adapter chucks Scope of supply: - 1 tubing nozzle - 7 vent plugs - 10 O-rings - 1 Connector LW12 - 10 m sealing cord 4 mm - 1 m vacuum tubing 18 / 12 spiral reinforced - eccentric side stops - 2 clamps The Vacuum Grid Chucks are manufactured from high density Aluminium (A). Steel execution (S) manufactured on request. Also other sizes available on request in either steel or aluminium. C
Dimensions in mm
Designed for use with Sealing Cord SAV 249.76-35 and SAV 249.76-40. Specify required length on order.
A 300 300 600 300 300 600
B 200 400 400 200 400 400
C 32.5 32.5 32.5 32.5 32.5 32.5
Grid pitch`
Weight in kg
12.5 12.5 12.5 25.0 25.0 25.0
5.0 10.0 20.0 5.0 10.0 20.0 A
Ordering example: Vacuum Grid Chuck SAV 249.03 - 600 x 400 - 25 - A Ordering key: Name SAV - No. - A x B - Grid pitch - Aluminium / Steel SAV Workholding and Automation www.sav-workholding.com Chapter 14 253
Vacuum Mat Chuck

With rubber vacuum mat
modular
SAV 249.05 / 249.85
Use: For finishing of workpieces, especially for milling pockets and cut-outs and for drilling, without loss of vacuum. Design: Many vacuum spots in tight grid. The mats are positioned on the chuck using 6 plastic lugs. For a modular set-up the clamping surface can be freely extended by connecting different chucks over plug-in connectors. After through cutting or milling the mats can easily be replaced. The vacuum mats are provided with fine suction openings. The black vacuum mats are closed and are used to close the unused fields. Vacuum mats thickness tolerance: 0.04 mm Concave upto: 0.1 mm Scope of supply: For modular design: - 1 vacuum chuck - 1 tubing nozzle - 1 connector coupling - 7 vent plugs - 10 O-rings - 8 pressure blocks - 10 vacuum mats blue - 1 m vacuum tubing 18 / 12 spiral reinforced Required capacity: 1 chuck 3 - 6 m3/h 8 chucks 16 - 21 m3/h 20 chucks 40 - 63 m3/h 50 chucks 100 -160 m3/h C C C A SAV 249.05 - 300 x 200 Required suction capacity: 1 mat 3 - 6 m3/h 8 mats 16 - 21 m3/h 20 mats 40 - 63 m3/h 50 mats 100 -160 m3/h B
A SAV 249.05 - 600 x 400 Vacuum chucks SAV 249.05 A 300 300 600 Ordering Ordering Ordering Ordering
Dimensions in mm
A SAV 249.05 - 300 x 400 Modular Design Vacuum mats SAV 249.85
Weight in kg Colour Dimensions in mm
B 200 400 400
C 30 30 30
Design
Single Double
5.0 10.0
Quadruple 20.0
Blue Green Red Black
A 300 300 300 300
B 200 200 200 200
C 2.42 2.42 2.42 2.42
Standard Hard Soft Closed
example: key: example: key: 254
Vacuum Mat Chuck SAV 249.05 - 600 x 400 Name SAV - No. - A x B Vacuum Mat Name SAV 249.85 - Red SAV - No. - Colour Technical data subject to change without prior notice
Chapter 14
B
Edition
Vacuum Circular Grid Chuck

With radial grind Use: With this circular vacuum-chuck, disc and ring shaped workpieces can be clamped, for instance on lathes. Preferably for the glass- and plastic processing, but metal machining is of course also possible. Scope of supply: - 10 m seal for 38 mm chuck height - 20 m seal from 48 mm chuck height Available in high-tensile aluminium (A) or steel (S) execution. Circular vacuum grid chucks are available in custom made executions for clamping of special workpieces.
SAV 249.42
B 3xF E C D
Dimensions in mm
A 100 125 160 200 250 315 400 500 630
B 38 38 38 38 38 48 48 58 58
C 70 95 125 160 200 260 330 420 545
D 3 4 4 4 5 5 5 5 7
E 83 108 140 176 224 286 362 458 586
F M8 M8 M 10 M 10 M 12 M 16 M 16 M 16 M 16
Grid size
Weight aluminium in kg
Weight steel in kg
10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5
1.0 1.0 2.0 3.0 5.0 5.0 16.0 31.0 49.0
2.0 3.0 6.0 9.0 14.0 14.0 47.0 89.0 142.0
Ordering example: Vacuum Circular Grid Chuck Ordering key: Name SAV Workholding and Automation
SAV 249.42 - 630 - S SAV - No. - A - Execution Chapter 14 255
Vacuum Rotation Joints

For circular vacuum chucks Vacuum rotation joints for using with: - circular vacuum chucks on lathes with a hollow spindle - vacuum chucks on a rotating machine table with hollow spindle. The rotation joint allows rotary movement of circular or normal chuck but with a stationary vacuum supply without any vacuum loss. Standard rotation joints are available for 3 rotation speed ranges: upto 1500, 3000 and 6000 r.p.m. The rotation joints are supplied including plastic tubing. The plastic tube connects the chuck through the hollow spindle with the rotation joint. The tube absorbes the torque force. Scope of supply: - 1,5 m tube - connection parts
SAV 249.70
Type A
Type B
Type
Max.rotation speed in 1/min
Dimensions in mm
A
35 50 50
B
85 110 110
Approx Weight in kg
Connection in Zoll
A B B
1500 3000 6000
0.3 1.0 1.0
R 3 / 8 - R 3/8 R 1 / 2 - R 3/8 R 1 / 2 - R 3/8
Ordering example: Vacuum Rotations Joints Name Ordering key: 256 Chapter 14
SAV 249.70 - 1500 SAV - No. - max. rotation speed Technical data subject to change without prior notice
Modular Vacuum Compressor

For coolant and lubricants Special features: - vacuum storage with integrated liquid separator additional liquid separator is not required - very compact design - transparent combined container for liquid separation and vacuum storage offer quick visible safety - different storage capacity can be achieved by exchanging the acryl glass container - integrated air filter, liquid separator, relays, motor protection and differential pressure switch - available with different vacuum pumps from 6 m3 to 63 m3. On request also available with dry running pumps. - all pumps for the modular compressors are equipped with oil lubrication. Also available with dry running vacuum pump for module compressor on request. Scope of supply: 1 interface unit, with: - 2 m vacuum tubing - 3 / 2 manual valve with air vent - 1 vacuummeter - 1 electric connector with 3 m cable l r n m p
SAV 249.72
h i k t u a e d c s
Suction capacity in m3/h
f/g
Dimensions in mm
a storage accumulator cover b storage accumulator bottom c acrylic glass cylinder d threaded stut e mist collector f profile seal g drainage plug h e-motor i pressure difference switch k circuit relay l airfilter m oil filling plug n vacuum pump p exhaust air valve r oil level gauge s Schuko / CEE-Plug with overvoltage relay t ON/OFF switch u wire spiral hose
Size
Design
Motor drive in V/kW
Max. mbar
dB (A)
Modular compressor Modular compressor Modular compressor Modular compressor Modular compressor Modular compressor Modular mobile VM 63 - 400 compressor Modular mobile VM100 - 400 compressor
VM 6 - 230 VM 6 - 400 VM 16 - 230 VM 16 - 400 VM 21 - 230 VM 21 - 400
6 6 16 16 21 21 63
230 / 0.37 400 / 0.37 230 / 0.55 400 / 0.55 230 / 0.75 400 / 0.75 400 / 1.50
50 50 20 20 20 20 20 50
59 56 60 60 62 62 65 67
L 500 500 500 500 500 500 600 700
H 630 630 630 630 630 630 1030 1130
Weight kg
25 25 31 31 45 45 95 113
600 700
100 400 / 3.00
Ordering example: Modular Vacuum Compressor SAV 249.72 - VM 16 - 400 Ordering key: Name SAV - No. - Size SAV Workholding and Automation www.sav-workholding.com Chapter 14 257
Vacuum Auxiliary Storage

For relief of vacuum compressor Use: The auxiliary storage serves to extend the vacuum storage of the vacuum compressor ensuring more and longer vacuum capacity. Additionally it prevents the compressor to run continuously, reducing clamping times. Design: The auxiliary storage is equipped with two glass gauges and thus works as an additional filter or separator. The collected dirt or liquids can simply be drained.
SAV 249.73
Volume Dimensions in mm in L Length Width Height
Connection in inch
Weight in kg
54 555 315 325 210 800 500 530
Inside R Inside R
18 30
Ordering example: Vacuum Auxiliary Storage SAV 249.73 - 54 Ordering key: Name SAV No. - Volume
Vacuum Seal
For vacuum grid chucks Use: This high quality neoprene seal is placed into the suction slot of a vacuum grid type chuck to restrict the clamping area. The seal diameter is depending on the cross section of the slot. If a plate is remachined then a seal with a smaller diameter will be required. Minimum order quantity : 25 m When ordering, please specify length in m.
SAV 249.76
SAV-No. 249.76 - 20 249.76 - 30 249.76 - 35 249.76 - 40 249.76 - 45 249.76 - 50 249.76 - 55 249.76 - 60 249.76 - 65 249.76 - 70 249.76 - 80 249.76 - 100
Diameter in mm 2,0 3,0 3,5 4,0 4,5 5,0 5,5 6,0 6,5 7,0 8,0 10,0
Ordering example: Vacuum Seal SAV 249.76 - 100 - 50 Ordering key: Name SAV - No. - length 258 Chapter 14 Technical data subject to change without prior notice
Vacuum Safety Switch

Ensures safety through machine interlocking Use: Safety regulations require that machines with power actuated clamping devices are set in such a way that the machine main drive can only be switched on in case the clamping device has been completely energized.
SAV 249.74
Application: The safety interlock is a requirement for all powerful machine tools and shall be integrated in the machine control. When the vacuum level remains under the low threshold an optical signal is generated. The built in potentially free contacts can be integrated into the machine control and can e.g. trigger an emergency stop (spindle stop, table shift stop, full machine stop). The range between high and low vacuum can be set stepless. In case of utilising a magnet valve the clamping process can be controlled directly from the machine control panel.
Size 100 105 110 115 120
Description Safety control with electronic vacuum switch Safety control with electronic vacuum switch Safety control with electronic vacuum switch Safety control with electronic vacuum switch Safety control with electronic vacuum switch
Inside tubing in mm
12 18 18 25 32
Voltage U in V 24 V 24 V 24 V 24 V 24 V
Type A A B A A
mm mm mm mm mm
Ordering example: Vacuum Safety Switch SAV 249.74 - 105 Ordering key: Name SAV - No. - Size SAV Workholding and Automation www.sav-workholding.com Chapter 14 259
Accessories for Vacuum Workholding

Specifications on request For vacuum workholding systems, an extensive range of accessories is available: Examples:
Vacuum switch with LED-display
Vacuum electro-magnetic valves
Vacuum valve with slide
Quick coupling with male thread Plug for quick coupling
Hose nozzles, hose nipples, reducers, double nippels, etc. on request
260
Chapter 14
CHAPTER 15
Magnetic Chucks Evolution of magnetic workholding technology Magnetic field and magnetic lines of force Workpieces in the magnetic field Maximum holding forces Material properties Magnetic clamping of workpieces Influence on holding forces Demagnetizing Side stops for milling Technical explanations and typical wording Sales- and delivery conditions
Page 261 - 280
Page 262 263 264 265 266-268 269 270-273 274-275 276-277 278-279 280
Chapter 15
261
Evolution of magnetic workholding technology

1. The evolution of magnetic workholding technology
1.1. Origin of magnetic technology: Mankind has been aware of the existence of magnetism for centuries. The term magnet is derived from the ancient Thessalonian landscape Magnesia. As far as 5 ages B.C., magnetic ore was found there as well as in other places. Back then, as today, therewas a certain fascination attached to the for our senses inaccessible magnetic effect. The cause of earths magnetic field was also legendary. According to modern knowledge, the earths magnetic field arises from the rotation of earth which brings the electrons in earths interior (which consists of liquid iron/ nickel composites) into orderly circular motions. Within this circular motions, there arises therefore a magnetic field. The measured magnetic field on the earths surface can be reduced to one portion whose cause lies in the earths interior and an external portion which comes from variable electrical flow in the ionosphere and magnetosphere. This directional force of the earth is used, e.g. in magnetic compasses in order to determine the cardinal points. The magnetic needle orientates itself to the north/south direction of earths magnetic field. In 1820 the Danish physicist Hans Christian Oerstedt discovered the reciprocal relationship between electricity and magnetism and hence created the basis of the development of modern magnetic technology.
The earths magnetic field
1.2. Chronologic & table of the use of permanent magnetic materials in the last 100 years: The technical use of magnetic materials limited itself to compasses until the middle of the 19th century. The development of the electromotor by Jacobu (1834) and of the dynamo machine by Werner von Siemens (1866) required for the first time large amounts of magnetic materials. The chronological table below gives a short overview of the evolution of permanent magnetic materials.
Year 1834
Technical use
Magnetic materials Carbon steel
Attributes low strength, easy to demagnetize 10w strength, easy to demagnetize low strength, more difficult to demagnetize
Production casting casting casting
1917 1933 1936 1938 1952 1962 1980 Today
Electromotor (Jacobu, 1834) Dynamo machine (Siemens, 1866) Telephone (Bell-Gray, 1876) Loudspeaker Broadcasting Television Magnetic workholding technology
1900
Wolfram steel Cobalt steel AlNi AlNiCo isotropic
weak magnet with difficult demagnetization casting enhanced magnetic force with difficult Casting, demagnetization heat treatment large strength, demagnetization Casting, contin. cast., AlNiCo anisotropic cooling in magn. field comparable with AlNi weak magnet, higher resistance against Sintering, isotropic Hartferrit demagnetization and anisotropic large magnetic strength, very difficult to Sintering, anisotrop, SmCo demagnetize expensive raw material strongest magnetic material with highest Sintering, anisotrop, NdFeB robustness against demagnetization cheaper raw material increasing use of NdFeB. lmprovements thro measures and combination of several magnetic materials.
262
Chapter 15
Magnetic field and magnetic lines of force

2. Physical basis of the magnetic workholding technology
2.1. The magnetic field: The space in which magnetic forces work is known as magnetic field. The magnetic effect is, at the same time, dependent on place and direction. A magnetic field develops between two or more poles, like poles repel each other and unlike poles attract each other. The clearest and easiest way to demonstrate a magnetic field is by sprinkling iron powder over a separating layer, e.g. paper or glass, that is lying within a magnetic field.
Fig. 1: Field line course of a bipolar rod magnet
By storing a rod magnet appropriately, it adjusts itself to the magnetic field of earth in known way. The pole which points in the geographically north direction is known as the north pole of the magnet. If a rod magnet is bent to a U-shape, a bipolar magnet system is created (horse shoe magnet fig. 2). 2.2. Magnetic lines of force: Magnetic lines of force run from the north to the south pole of a magnet. The magnetic field tries with the help of its leakage and effective flux to close over the air gap (fig. 2). If the magnetic field extends beyond the soft iron it always happens vertical to the surface. The lines of force course searches for the shortest occupiable distance between the poles.
Fig. 2: Illustration of the magnetic lines of force of a horse shoe magnet
However, air offers the magnetic field a very high resistance, so that the magnetic lines of force prefer to proceed in ferro magnetic material (e.g. iron). The lines of force stand for the illustration of the magnetic flux in Wb (Weber). For the effect of the magnetic field, e.g. the achievable holding force, the concentration of the lines of force per surface, or rather the magnetic flux density B in mT (1 Tesla = 1 Wb/m2) or G (1 Gauss = 0.1 mT) is the deciding factor. The cause of the magnetic field with its lines of force is the magnetic field strength H in A/m or 0e (1 kA/m = 12,56 Oersted). The connections between field strength and flux density can be seen as similar to the conditions between the electric voltage and the electric current.
Chapter 15
263
Workpieces in the Magnetic Field

2.3. Iron workpieces in the magnetic field: Resting iron workpieces offer the magnetic field just a low resistance and therefore shorten the path of the lines of force. Therefore the magnetic field does not need to take the awkward path through the air any more (fig. 3). In comparison to e.g. air, the magnetic conductivity (permeability) of steel (St 37, A570, 4360-40) is approx 2000 times better. If the resting iron part is removed from the magnet, the force of the magnetic field opposes an enlargement of the magnetic resistance and therefore also a change in the magnetic energy. As the magnetic energy is related directly to the work to be used, in order to remove a ferromagnetic workpiece from magnets, it opposes an enlargement of the air gap or, the magnetic energy. That is why materials containing iron are attracted and hold. In order to keep a workpiece magnetic, at least a north and south pole must be overbridged with it.
Fig. 3: Magnetic flux and the holding forces becoming effective while overbridging of a N- and a S-pole
2.4. Atomic interpretation of the magnetization: In magnetisable (ferromagnetic) materials, there are tiny magnetic fields, so called molecular magnets, available. Within the atoms, electrons circle the nucleus as tiniest electric charges, as well as also circling their own axis and generate - from the connection first observed by Oersted - a magnetic moment, or rather, a magnetic dipole. Without the influence of an external field, these magnetic dipoles are arranged at random in ferromagnetic materials and neutralize themselves extensively in their effect. By feeding an external magnetic field, there follows an exact arrangement of the dipoles. A large number of arranged dipoles in small areas, the so-called Weiss domain, figure the smallest magnetic bodies. These molecular magnets arrange themselves under the influence of external magnetic fields and remain more or less in the imposed formation, depending on material, even after being distanced from the external field. The arrangement of the molecular magnets illustrates over and above that the demagnetizing effect of heat, impact, radioactive radiation or magnetic foreign fields. The relevant body, which areas arranged to such an extent contains, works together as one magnet. By complete arrangement of elementary magnets, further magnetizing is impossible. The material is saturated.
external magnetizing field H
Fig. 4: Arrangement of the molecular magnets in Weiss domains by an adjacent magnetic field
264
Chapter 15
Maximum Holding Forces

2.5. Maximum possible holding forces and influences to be taken into consideration: The magnetic forces depend on several influences which are difficult to determine in praxis, so that the interpretation of magnetic systems needs a lot of experience. The following criteria are effective: - constructive design and type of magnetic material - material composition and state of heat treatment of the piece to be clamped - ratio of pole pitch and workpiece thickness - contact between the workpiece surface and the magnet and its roughness - influence of magnetic coverage - influence of pole shoes - influence of operating temperature
The effect of the individual criteria will be thoroughly discussed in the following. To illustrate the influential sizes, there is a theoretical connection for the maximum holding forces to be expected given below.
magnet airgap airgap
airgap
The maximum holding force FH max refers to the air gap surface Aairgap. However, the air gap surface does not always have to be identical to the workpiece surface, as it does with, eg. laminated pole plates. The individual factors take the following effects into consideration: : : Resistance factor for considering material composition and state of heat treatment. The magnetic holding forces sink drastically with decreasing pure iron content. The dispersion coefficient comprises the ratio between unused magnetic flux parallel to workpiece and effective flux in the air gap between the magnet and the workpiece. It is very dependent on the construction of the magnetic system and the workpiece geometry, and provides together with the dispersion coefficient - the big most critical at the calculation. The ratio between the magnetic cross section and the air gap explains the increasing holding forces in the ratio between the magnet and decreasing workpieces. Borders are, however reached, when the workpiece material is saturated, which means that it cannot take ariy more magnetism. The permanence stands for flux density of the magnetic material when there is a 0 mm air gap. It is the deciding factor and mainly dependent on permanent magnetic material. This is the permeability or induction constant. It amounts to 1.256 10-8 Vs/Am and describes the constant connection between field strength and flux density in the air gap. The magnetic holding force decreases rapidly with increasing air gap (increasing of surface roughness).
A2magnet / A2aigap:
BP:
0: KLuftspalt:
The effects of workpiece thickness, pole shoes and operating temperature are not taken into consideration and so are mainly left to experience.
Chapter 15
265
Material Properties
3. Magnetic properties of materials
If one examines the reaction of various materials in a magnetic field, one recognises that there are three different materials in the area of magnetism. 1. non-magnetic materials 2. soft magnetic materials 3. hard magnetic materials 3.1. Non-magnetic materials: This inciudes materials like eg. brass, copper, aluminium, wood, glass, plastics and further metals which dont react, or only react insignificantly to a magnetic field. Such materials can be flown through by a magnetic field like air or a vacuum. Therefore there is no interaction (attractive force) between the magnetic field and the material. These materials can not be magnetically chucked. 3.2. Soft magnetic materials: This group consists mostly of iron, low alloyed steels, nickel, cobalt. Magnetic fields concentrate and strengthen themselves in theses materials. They lose a lot of theireffect after removal of the magnetic field. Depending on alloying contents, a small residual magnetism can, however, remain. 3.3. Hard magnetic materials This concerns permanent or continuous magnetic materials. After magnetization they show a magnetic field with very high energy density, which can be used technically in static or dynamically occupied magnetic circuits, that is, in magnetic circuits with a constant or variable air gap. A permanent magnetic material must show two qualities. Firstly, It must absorb enough magnetism (high remanence Br or saturation Bs), secondly the magnetism stored in the material must remain stuck to it (high coercive force Ho). Permanent magnetic materials are used for clamping and workholding systems, as well as motors, loudspeakers, measuring instruments etc. Fig. 5 gives a general view of the partitioning of magnetic materials. Today hard ferrite, AlNiCo and SmCo are used for permanent magnets. Today NdFeB is found to have a further increased coercive force and use of residual flux density, alongside SmCo.
2,5 T 2,0
soft magnetic materials Fe (silicon) CoFe
semi-hard materials carbon steels
permanent-magnetic materials
FeCoVCr Fe medium Ni-content AlNiCo CrCoFe Cr-, Costeels CoFeNi
1,5 BS 1,0
NiFe
sintering
high Ni-content NiFe soft magnetized ferrites CuNiFe PtCo hard ferrite
SmCo
0,5 0
10-1
100
101
102
103 HC
104
105
106 A/m 107
Fig. 5: General board for magnetic materials
266
Chapter 15
Material Properties
4. Permanent or continuous magnetic materials
4.1. Metallic permanent magnets: made of AINiCo: The main alloying components are aluminium, nickel, cobalt, iron, copper and titanium. This hard material is produced in a sintering or casting technique and can only machined by grinding. AINiCo magnets are almost exclusively anisotropically produced. During the production, they therefore receive a preferential direction of magnetization, which leads to better alignment of the elementary magnets and therefore to better magnetic values. Through the generation of columnar crystals during casting and through a heat treatment under a feeded magnetic field, the anisotropy is achieved. The measurement ratio between length and diameter L:D should be 4:1 in the open magnetic circuit in order to show a good demagnetizing resistance. AINiCo can achieve the largest holding forces under given magnetic volume with this ratio. The more the magnetic circuit is closed, the shorter the chosen construction length can be. AINiCo magnets have a high remanence, but a low coercive force. Because of this, these magnets can take up a strong magnetic field, but they can also easy be demagnetized again. Due to this reason, they can be used in electrically switchable permanent-magnetic chucks. AlNiCo magnets are usable in a proportionately high temperature range up to ca. +400 C and irreversibly lose their magnetization at the so-called Curie-temperature,
4.2. High-energy rare earth magnets: made of samarium-cobalt (SmCo5 / SmCo17) or neodymium-iron-boron (Nd2Fe14B) This deals with sintered, metallic permanent magnets with a very high energy product from the group of rare earths. The rare earths are 15 elements with the atomic numbers 57 - 71 in the periodic table of elements. The costly processing and the expensive raw materials result in a relatively high price. These magnets always maintain a magnetic preferential direction (anisotropy) during the production. Even strong retarding potentials have no influence on the magnetic field. a) Samarium-cobalt: The magnetic material with excellent magnetic values is very hard and brittle an can only be machined by grinding or by using diamond tools. The maximum operating temperature is ca. +200 C. b) Neodym-iron-boron: Using this magnetic material which is the strongest available at the moment, the highest magnetic values can be achieved, which can be produced economically. The energy product is approx. double as high as the samarium-cobalt. The energy product stands for the quality of the magnets and is the product of flux density and field strength (BxH). The maximum operating temperature is approx. +80 C.
Chapter 15
267
Material Properties
4.3. Hard ferrite magnets according to German industrial Standard 17 410: They consist of ca. 80% iron oxide and 20% barium or strontium carbonate. These raw materials are available in amounts and therefore relatively cheap. Like all ceramic materials, these magnets are very hard and brittle. Therefore they can be only machined with diamond tools. Hard ferrite magnets are produced anisotropic and isotropic, in other words with and without preferential direction. Isotropic magnets show only a low energy density after magnetizing. In relation to remanence, the coercive force in anisotropic magnets is high. Therefore a large magnetic pole surface is necessary. The maximum operating temperature is +200 C.
4.4. Short comparison between permanent magnetic materials:
F F F F
NdFeB-magnet V = 0.30 cm3 SmCo-magnet V = 0.86 cm3 Ferrite-magnet V = 25.4 cm3 AlNiCo 500-magnet V = 19.5 cm3
The example shows the volume reduction at only 4.4% or 1.6% of the output volume during the use of high-energy magnetic materials SmCo or NdFeB. At a distance of 5 mm, an equally strong magnetic field of B = 100 mT arises at any time, which leads to equal holding forces at any time.
Fig. 6: Magnetic volumes for different magnetic materials with the same magnetic energy content
Hard ferrite isotropic
(B x H)max in kJ/m3
Hard ferrite anisotropic AINiCo anisotropic AINiCo anisotropic SmCo-magnets NdFeB-magnets
400 300 200 100 0
In the ratio of the maximum energy products (BxH)max there are likewise the maximum attainable holding forces. The numbering after the magnetic types gives the maximum energy product ca. in GOe. NdFeB 2700, 2850, 3600, anisotropic SmCo AINiCo 600, 450, 500, crystal orientated, heat treated, anisotropic AINiCo 360, 450, 500, heat treated, anisotropic Hard ferrite 270, 330, 380, anisotropic Hard ferrite 100, isotropic
Fig. 7: Comparison between the maximum energy products for various magnetic materials
268
Chapter 15
Magnetic Clamping of Workpieces

5. Magnetic clamping of workpieces:
5.1. Holding and sliding forces in the magnet technology: Pole pitch, workpiece shape, surface quality and material have a large influence on the holding and sliding force of a workpiece. a) The holding force is the break-off force of a clamped workpiece vertical to the clamping surface. b) The sliding force is the force necessary to slide a workpiece parallel to the clamping surface. Depending on the surface quality, the sliding force comes to about ca. 15 to 30% of the holding force. Unless specifically mentioned, the given nominal holding forces for our products, they are valid for a ground test specimen of St37, with the dimensions 100 x 100 x 40 mm.
Holding force Sliding force
Magnet
Fig. 11 Holding and sliding forces of magnetic chucks 5.2. Influence of the pole pitch and workpiece thickness: In order to achieve a consistent holding force over the entire clamping surface and also to clamp smaller workpieces, magnetic chucks are produced with various pole pitches and pole clearances. Therefore the clamping surface is designed with alternating north and south poles (fig. 12). The pole gap consists of a non-magnetic material, like brass or epoxy.
Pole gap
Pole pitch P
Fig. 12: Definition of pole gap and pole pitch in magnetic chucks
Chapter 15
269
Influence on holding forces

The magnetic field of the rested workpiece goes from one pole to the next in half circles.
Workpiece
Magnet
Workpiece
Magnet
Fig. 13: Lines of force course in workpiece thickness > pole clearance
Fig. 14: Lines of force course in workpiece thickness < pole clearance
When there are larger pole pitches, a larger penetration of the magnetic field can be attained for thicker and raw workpieces and therefore a larger holding force is attained.
Holding force in %
If the workpiece thickness is significantly smaller than the pole clearance, the workpiece will not entirely absorb the magnetic field. This results in a reduction of the holding force. When all lines of force are running within the workpiece, the best holding forces are attained.
Workpiece thickness / Pole pitch
Fig. 14a: Holding forces depending on pole pitch relation
5.3. Influence of contact surface and surface condition: Any surface of the workpiece which is actually touched by the magnet surface is to be seen as a contact surface (fig. 15). a) Dependence of holding force on the workpiece shape:
continuous contact 100 %
interrupted contact 60 %
line contact
15 %
Fig. 15: Rough illustration of the reduction of holding force because of unfavourable workpiece shapes
270
Chapter 15

b) Holding force dependence of surface quality The surface quality is very important for the holding force of a workpiece, as it decreases rapidly with increasing roughness. The best values are achieved with a finely polished surface without air gap (fig. 16).
Holding forces vertical to the magnet 20 % - 50 % Workpieces 50 % - 70 % 70 % - 80 % 80 % - 90 %
Magnet Fig. 16: Influence of workpiece surface on the attainable holding forces c) Holding force dependence on air gap Air gaps on workpieces can never be prevented. They are for instance caused by material deformation in the pre-manufacturing, shrink holes and unevenness on casted parts, roughness after mechanical machining, layers of paint and non-magnetic protection surfaces. As air creates a very large magnetic resistance, fewer field lines can be built-up and the holding forces will reduce quickly. This can be seen in the example diagram below.
100 % 90 % 80 % 70 % 60 % 50 % 40 % 30 % 20 % 10 % 0%
Holding force in %
0,1
0,2
0,3 0,4 Airgap in mm
0,5
0,6
Fig. 16a: Influence of air gap on the attainable holding forces
The air gap sensitivity is mainly depending on the workpiece size in relation to the magnet size, the material properties and the pole pitch of the magnet. Generally speaking, magnetic systems with bigger primary pole pitch can easier bridge the air gaps. In comparison to electro-permanent magnetic chucks, the electromagnetic chucks create deeper magnetic fields and are therefore less sensitive to air gaps.
Chapter 15
271

5.4. Material composition of workpieces: The highest magnetic flux values and therefore the highest holding forces can be achieved with technically pure iron. In practice, a number of materials with different magnetic qualities are found.
100 % 95 % 95 % 94 % 93 % 92 % 90 % 87 %
technical pure iron St37 C15 34CrNiMo6 St52-3 90MnV8 C45 Ck45
86 % 84 % 75 % 72 % 65 % 50 % 30 % 0%
C60 42CrMo4 St50 X155CrMo12 X210CrW12 20MnCr5 GG (Cast iron) Non metallic materials
Fig. 17: Material dependency of the holding forces Further, the heat treatment also influences the magnetizability of the workpieces, because this changes the physical structure of the material. Hardened workpieces do not conduct the magnetic flux that well.
Tool steel quenched Tool steel hardened Tool steel tempered St 37 tempered
49% 44% 84% 100%
Holding force in %
Fig. 18: Influence of heat treatment on the holding forces (example) 5.5. Influence of pole plate coverage: As has been shown, the holding force per workpiece surface is dependent on the size of the pole plate coverage, Measurements gave the below listed reduction of maximum holding force per workpiece surface (example): Arrangement a workpiece with 50 x 100 mm < contact surface < 150 x 300 mm a workpiece with contact surface > 150 x 300 mm or several workpiece with 50 x 100 mm < contact surface < 150 x 300 mm Holding force per workpiece surface 120 N / cm2
80 N / cm2
272
Chapter 15

The reasoning lies, first and fore most in the magnetic parallel connection of the workpieces, as in the second case, the magnetic flux is distributed over a larger surface. As a result, the flux density sinks, and therefore the available holding force does too. However, the holding forces per surface do not sink that much on bigger surfaces as one would expect from the quadratic connection mentioned in section 2.5, as the leakage flux outside of the workpiece and the effective air gap in increasing workpiece surface reduce themselves:
5.6. Influence of pole raisers: In case pole raisers are necessary for solving a workholding problem, these are not only effective as magnetic resistance but also increase the leakage flux simultaneously. It should therefore be observed that, for instance, pole raisers with a height up to 140 mm can have a drop in holding force of up to 20%.
Holding force in %
Pole raiser height in mm Fig. 19: Influence of the pole raiser height on the attainable holding forces Due to the effects described in 5.5 this loss of holding force is balanced out with suitable dimensioning, and can possibly even increase. Under all circumstances the pole raisers are not allowed to bridge the pole gap, because then there will be no magnetic flux available in the workpiece. 5.7. Influence of the application temperature: Temperature influences can significantly influence the qualities of a magnetic clamping system, so they are to be taken in consideration when choosing and constructing a magnetic clamping device. Increasing temperatures lead to reduction of the remanence and therefore the holding forces and to an increase of the coercive force. Above the Curie-temperature, the magnetic materials lose their magnetization irreversibly.
Material
Max. application temperature
Curie-temperature
Hard ferrite AlNiCo SmCo NdFeB
200 C 450 C 350 C 80 C
ca. 450 C ca. 850 C ca. 750 C ca. 300 C
Chapter 15
273
Demagnetizing
6. Demagnetizing of materials
When ferromagnetic workpieces are magnetically clamped or held, the still retain a low residual magnetism (remanence) after the magnetic field has been switched off. In practice, this side effect, which is often disturbing, can be removed with the following equipment:
6.1. Electronic polarity-reversing control units: The units serve both as a direct current supply and a demagnetizing fixture for all electro and electro-permanent magnets. During polarity-reversing and demagnetizing, a process (excitation and counter excitation) occurs with progressively decreasing energy until the residual fields are eliminated. Therefore the magnetization created by the holding magnet can be mostly removed. It is guaranteed thereby, that workpieces without residual force can be lifted from the holding magnet. The use of equipment such as holding or transporting magnets guarantees an immediate and precise loosening of the parts. If, however, a high demagnetization quality is required, an additional treatment of the workpieces with a demagnetizer must be carried out.
6.2. Demagnetizers: This equipment serve to remove the often disturbing residual magnetism in the workpieces. An extensive demagnetization is necessary for many products like cutting, punching and measuring tools or roller bearings. The unorientated ground state of the molecular magnets is thereby achieved, by exposing the workpiece to a permanently alternating, strong magnetic field with a decaying amplitude. Therefore demagnetizers are operated with alternating current, where the polarity alternates in the mains frequency 50/60 Hz. The decaying amplitude can be attained by leading the workpiece out of the alternating field slowly and steadily. The part to be demagnetized should be moved through the alternating field at ca. 0.2 m/s. At a distance of 20-30 cm, the alternating amplitude is approx. 0.
max.
Fig. 20: Decreasing magnetic alternating field for demagnetization
274
Chapter 15
Demagnetizing
a) Table demagnetizers: With this equipment a laminated iron system leads the alternating field on to the plate surface. Thereby a very strong magnetic field with large penetration is achieved. The pole surface is halved by a non-magnetic gap. The workpiece must be led over this parting line (fig. 21). Table devices are suitable for the demagnetizing of parts up to approx. 50 mm thickness. Thicker parts must be treated from both sides. The apparatus serve as table equipment or can be installed in automatic conveying devices (fig. 22). If the parts are very heavy, it is possible to lead the demagnetizer over the workpiece (fig.23). Mass production parts can also be led over the device in plastic containers.
Fig. 21
Fig. 22
Fig. 23
Fig. 21 to 23: Use of table demagnetizers
b) Tunnel demagnetizers: Tunnel demagnetizers consist of a coil protected by non-magnetic material. The equipment is especially suited to the demagnetizing of parts with large surfaces like, e.g. tubes, bars, profiles - and to bundled and packaged parts. They can likewise be installed in conveying devices (fig. 24) or be arranged ca. 30 degrees diagonally (fig. 25), so that the parts can slip through.
Fig. 24
Fig. 25
non-magnetic chute
30
Fig. 24 and 25: Tunnel demagnetizers with band conveyor and chute
c) Low-frequency generators: As already described, table and tunnel demagnetizers operate with the normal mains frequency of 50/60 Hz. Better demagnetizing results can possibly be attained by using a lower frequency, especially on high alloyed and hardened materials. Low-frequency generators lower the mains frequency to 16 Hz. Such devices can simply be connected before the table and tunnel demagnetizers.
Chapter 15
275
Side Stops at Milling

7. Machining forces during milling
7.1. Standard milling: The milling cutter tries to lift the surfaces that are to be machined and to slide them along the chuck. As illustrated below, the machining force F forms a tangent to the milling cutter. The Iefthand end stop and the frictional forces between the workpiece and the clamping surface counteract their horizontal component. The vertical component F faces the tensile force of the chuck. The picture illustrates two important aspects: - The task of the chuck is to keep the workpiece in its fastened state. - The task of the end stops is to avoid lateral displacing. For this reason the end stops should always be used.
FV FH FV
Workpiece
Fig.26: Force conditions at standard milling 7.2. Down-cut milling: Here the machining force F has a component directed against the chuck and in addition one directed towards the bottom right-hand corner of the workpiece. That is why the end stop is to be fastened to that position where the milling cutter is placed. At moving milling cutters the machining forces help to hold the workpiece on the pole plate surface, whereby higher cutting rate, as in standard milling cutters, is made possible. This is why down-cut milling is to be recommended from the point of view of clamping technology.
n Workpiece FH F End stop
Fig. 27: Force conditions at down-cut milling
276
Chapter 15
Side Stops at Milling

7.3. End milling: In concentric end milling, the machining forces work on towards the left end and the lateral end stop, as the centre line of the milling cutter path corresponds with that of the workpiece. This requirement does not always fulfill itself. Sometimes the workpiece has to be clamped off-centre to the milling axle. During this so-called off-centre end milling, the workpiece is moved to the same side, but to the right-hand end stop. It is recommendable, therefore, to check that the workpiece, end stop, lateral end stop, packing and compressing pieces are all in the correct position in order to fulfill their conditions, before switching on the feed.
concentric end milling Lateral end stop
Center line Workpiece F
Center line milling cutter is equal center line workpiece
End stop
off-center end milling F Lateral end stop
Center line milling cutter not over center line workpiece
End stop Fig. 28: Force conditions at end milling
Chapter 15
277
Technical Explanations and Terms

8. Technical explanations and terms from magnet technology:
Air gap : Clearance between magnet and counter pole (workpiece). AINiCo: Aluminium-nickel-cobalt magnetic material. Metallic permanent magnet with high remanence and comparatively lower coercive force. Anisotropy: Anisotropic materials are described as preferential-directioned. During their production (casting, sintering and alloying-in) they are exposed to a magnetic field or particular layering process. A/m: Ampere per meter; unit of the magnetic field strength (1 A/m = 0,01256 Oersted) (BxH)max: Biggest product from B and H on the demagnetization curve in kJ/m3 or GOe (1 GOe=79,6 10 kJ/m3). The bigger the (B x H)max-value, the smaller the volume of the magnetic material for the same holding force can be, but under unchanged conditions. Coercive force BHC: Size of required retarding potential strength in kA/m or 0e, to bring a saturated magnetic material back to zero with the existing retarding potential. Coercive force JHC: Size of required retarding potential strength in kA/m or 0e, to bring a saturated magnetic material back to zero, even after the retarding potential has been switched off. Curietemperature: At this temperature magnetic materials irreversibly lose their magnetization. Diamagnetism: Term for all materials who only react insignificantly to a magnetic field eg. plastics, fluids, organic materials etc, Demagnetizer: Equipment to remove the residual magnetism (see remanence) from workpieces which have been effected by a magnetic field. Demagnetizing: Reduction of magnetization by using a retarding potential or a decaying alternating field or also by using temperature influences. Demagnetizing curve: That part of a hysteresis loop, which runs in the second quadrant of a rightangled coordinate system. The course of the demagnetizing curve and its targets Br (remanence) and H(coercive force) mark the significant magnetic qualities of a permanent magnet. Diamagnetism: Term for all materials who only react insignificantly to a magnetic field eg. plastics, fluids, organic materials etc, . HC new curve B BR Dimension ratio: The ratio L/D = length/diameter of a rod magnet, has an optimal value for every magnetic material in the optimal work point. Dispersion coefficient : The dispersion coefficient takes into consideration that part of magnetic flux which is not available for, eg. clamping of the workpiece. It is heavily dependent on the clamping system and workpiece. Ferromagnetism: Generic term for all materials which shows a more or less large magnetization after the feeding of an external magnetic field. Flux density: Density of the lines of force of the induction field. Unit: 1 Tesla = 10 Gauss. Gauss (G): Old unit of magnetic induction. Holding force FH: Work force of a magnet or magnet system. The holding force refers to a vertical workpiece break-off and a precisely defined test specimen. Hard ferrite magnet: Oxide magnet made from iron oxide, barium or strontium carbonate with relatively low remanence and coercive force. Hysteresis loop: Graphic representation of the magnetizing and demagnetizing cycle.
Induction: Induction is the change which is effected on a material by a feeded magnetic fied. Isotropy: The equality of magnetic characteristics in all directions of magnetic material.
278
Chapter 15
Technical Explanations and Terms

Technical explanations and terms from magnet technology:
Lines of force: Grafic representation of the magnetic field. Magnetic flux : The magnetic flux in Wb (Weber). Stands for the number of lines of force. Magnetic system: Magnet with one or more fastened pole shoes as well as two or more magnets which operate in a functional unit. Magnetization M: Value in kA/m. The magnetization by the aligned elementary magnets. For practical use it is considered by the relative permeability. Magnetizing: Alignment of elementary magnet ranges by feeding an external magnetic field. NdFeB: Neodymium-iron-boron magnetic material. High-energy magnet with the highest remanences at present. workpiece. Oersted: Old unit of the magnetic field strength. 1 Oersted = 79,6 Nm. Operating temperature max: A magnet can be used up to this temperature without losing its magnetization. Permanence BP: The permanence gives the maximum flux density of the magnetic material by 0 kA/m field strength. The difference between this and remanence Br is that permanence adjusts itself to continually changing air gaps. The permanence is always smaller than remanence. Permeability o: Also known as induction constant. Conductivity for magnetic lines of force in a vacuum. Ratio between magnetic induction B and magnetic field strength H in a vacuum. Permeability, absolute Conductivity for magnetic lines of force, ratio between magnetic induction B and magnetic field strength H. = o x r Permeability relative : The relative permeability considers the magnetization of the material. Pole gap S: Clearance between a north and a south pole which consists of non-magnetic materials mostly brass, epoxy or stainless steel. Pole pitch P: Clearance from one north to one south pole. The pole pitch always contains a pole gap. Pole shoes: Also known as pole extensions or raisers. They are always used in connection with magnet systems to lead the magnetic field into the workpiece. Pole shoes facilitate a 5-sided machining and also allow complicated workpiece shapes to be clamped. Preferential direction: See anisotropy. Remanence Br: Size of the remaining field strength of a magnet in a closed circuit. Resistance factor T: Factor which considers the loss of field strength at the transmission point and in the workpiece. Saturation: The saturation flux density BS is achieved, when the workpiece cannot absorb any more magnetization. Screened magnet system: Leading and concentration of the magnetic field through an iron pot around the back and lateral surfaces of a magnet. Sliding force: Force of a magnetic clamping system which stands vertical to the holding force and therefore lies parallel to the pole plate. SmCo: Samarium-cobalt magnetic material. High energy magnet with large remanence and large coersative field strength. Temperature coefficient of the remanence TKBr: Value given in % which illustrates the lowering of the remanence during increasing ambient temperatures. Temperature coefficient of the coerciveforce TKHC: Value given in % which illustrates the increasing of the coercive force during increasing ambient temperature. Tesla: Unit of magnetism induction. 1 Tesla= 104 Gauss.
Chapter 15
279
Conditions of sale and delivery

Translation: the original version in German of these conditions takes precedence over any translations thereof
1. General and contract conclusion a) all agreements and offers are based on our conditions; they apply as accepted through placement of order or acceptance of the supply. Deviating conditions of the customer, which we do not accept expressly in writing, are noncommittal for us, even if we do not contradict explicitly. b) For the scope of supply our confirmation of order is determining. Verbal, telephonically, telegraphic and telefaxed special agreements and additional contract modifications have validity only if they are confirmed in writing by us. The same applies to assured properties of the supplied article. All data in our designs, illustrations, measurement tables, weight tables etc. are - so far not explicitly confirmed by us - only approximate values. The documents belonging to the offers remain our property, are subordinate to our copyright and may not be made accessible to third parties or only with our written approval. c) The order acceptance by us takes place in writing. If we should deviate slightly in our order confirmation in relation to the order of the customer, then our order confirmation is obligatory, if within eight days - in urgent cases by telephone call, telegram or telefax - one does not contradict to these. Hereunder applies the principle that a wrong transmission always goes debited to the customer, and will not be borne by us. d) Place of delivery for all obligations developing from the contractual relation is Nuremberg Germany. Area of jurisdiction for all from the contractual relation as well as law cases rising over its developing and its effectiveness is Nuremberg; after our choice also seat of the customer (with foreign contracts: also court of the capital of the country, in which the customer has his seat). The contractual relation is always subject to the German material right under exclusion of international purchase rights. e) All written or oral offers are, unless no other agreements are made or confirmed by us, not binding. 2. Prices The prices are in Euro. The prices apply, if not explicitly differently agreed, purely net ex works including loading, excluding packing, freight, insurance, assembly and other additional expenses. All increase of freight and tariffs, value added tax, material prices and wages are for the account of the customer. With supplementary orders the prices are newly agreed upon. 3. Delivery time. The delivery time is specified after best discretion and is therefore to be understood as approximately, excluding explicitly firm designated agreements. The time for delivery starts only from the time, in which written agreement exists over the final supply and all questions necessary for the trouble-free execution of the order are clarified. The time for delivery does not begin before the time that all documents are made available to us, the necessary official and private explanations, permissions and releases etc. are available and the customer has fulfilled the agreed payments and other obligations. The delivery time is considered as firm, if the shipment has left our works within the agreed delivery time. If the delivery is delayed for reasons not attributable to us, then the time for delivery is considered as firm with the message that goods are ready for dispatch within the agreed delivery time. The time for delivery extends - also within a delivery delay appropriate at occurrence of foreseen events, which we could reasonably not prevent despite the circumstances of the case equally to events in our work or at possible subcontractors - for example operational disturbances, wasting of an important working part, delays in the delivery of substantial raw materials and delivery parts, strike, lockout, mobilization, war and riot as well as in delay of the customer from this or another contract. At later changes of the contract, which can affect the delivery time, the delivery time extends, unless special agreements concerning this can be made, to appropriate extent. Consequential loss or damage because of late supply with negligent behaviour by us or our personnel are explicitly excluded. In any case we are responsible for such damage only up to the invoice amount excluding V.A.T., whose cause and extent could have been foreseen by us. Partial deliveries are permissible. For special and customer specific products a withdrawal is not possible. 4. Terms of payment Our invoices are payable within eight days from invoice date with 2% discount or within 30 days net. Repair and spare part invoices are immediately payable without any deduction. The retention of payment due to whatever unrecognized or legally invalid counterclaims of the customer is just as inadmissible as the set-off with such counterclaims. Cheques and discountable changes are accepted only after special agreement and only when all additional collection and discount charges are paid. When payment is received after the due date, interests according the usual bank interest on debit balances plus 2% as well as all arising additional fees or other costs can be charged. With call-off orders we are entitled make our invoices payable at readiness for dispatch. With call-off delays, starting 14 days after announcement of readiness for dispatch, the additional charges for storage, care and shifting of the commodities can be charged. With payments by instalments which were accepted by us the entire remainder becomes immediately due, if the customer with a due payment is over 10 days in delay or in his financial circumstances nature-due, if the customer with a due payment is over 10 days in delay or substantial degradations in his financial circumstances occurs. In addition we are entitled to reject all pending supplies subject to payment, or to insist on acceptance and/or if necessary validate claims for damages in accordance with the condition of the previous paragraph. 5. Transfer of risk The risk is passed-on to the customer, even if freight-free delivery was agreed: a) At delivery of the supplies by us or one of our assigned transporters, however latest at leaving of our works or warehouse. The packing takes place with best care. The dispatch takes place after best discretion of the supplier. On request and for the account of the customer the delivery is insured by the supplier against breakage, transportation- and fire damage. b) If the dispatch, the delivery or the acceptance are delayed for reasons, which are not attributable to us, then the risk is transferred to the customer on the day of readiness for dispatch; however we are prepared to take out a desired insurance on request and for the account of the customer. 6. Receipt Delivered articles are to be received by the customer, even if they show insignificant defects. Partial deliveries are permissible. 7. Guarantee If a commodity is defective, is missing assured characteristics or will loose characteristics during the guarantee period due to production or material failures or will it become defective during the guarantee period due to production or material failures, then we will, under exclusion of further guarantee claims of the customer, according our choice supply a replacement or have the commodity reworked. If this is not possible, the rework fails or is refused by us or unreasonably delayed, then the customer has the right to a replacement or reduction. Damage claims because of non-fulfilment or consequential damage are explicitly not accepted, except for mandatory liability because of guilt. For consequential damages we only take responsibility, if the customer should be secured by the warranty against such consequential damages. In these cases we are liable only up to expectation interest, maximum up to 2-times the value of the supply, excluding value added tax. Determination of all defects must be announced immediately - with recognized defects at the latest within 8 days after receipt of the commodities, with non-recognized defects immediately after determination - in writing. Costs of the rework are for our account up to the value of the defective part, beyond that it is for the account of the customer. Wear or damages, which are due to careless or unsuitable use, excessive load, unsuitable equipment, inadequate construction work, is excluded, as far as unknown to us at completion of contract and the use was expressly assured. When improper changes or repairs are made by the customer or a third party, our liability for the consequences caused by this is waived. For improvement work and spare pieces we are liable to the same amount as for the original delivered commodity, and only up to the expiration of the guarantee period of the original delivery commodity. For sub supplied commodities our total liability is limited to passing on the liability claims, which we have against the supplier of these commodities. Only if these were claimed without result, our liability according paragraph 1 is revived again. In all cases only such damages, whose cause and extent were foreseeable for us, are replaced. The guarantee claims expire 12 months after delivery. 8. Other claims for damages, resignation Claims for damages from impossibility of the performance, delay, positive violation of contract, debts at completion contract or tortuous liability are excluded, unless, these are based on intent or gross negligence of us. Claims for damages are limited in each case to the value of the supply. When the performance becomes impossible to us or the customer, then general rights of law apply under the following condition: If the impossibility is due to our fault, then the customer is entitled to require compensation of damages. This is limited to half of the value of the supply, excluding value added tax, of the part of the supply or performance, which cannot be taken in useful service because of the impossibility. The right of the customer to the resignation remains unaffected. If unexpected events in the sense of number 3 of the economic meaning or the contents of the supply or performance change substantially or considerably affect on our company, the contract will be changed proportionally. As far as this is economically not justifiable, a right of resignation is entitled to us. If we want to make use from this right, then we will communicate this to the customer immediately after determination of significance, and also then, when even at first with this an extension of the delivery time was agreed upon. In all cases only such damages, whose origin and extent were foreseeable for us, are replaced. 9. Right of ownership The supplied commodity remains our full property until full payment, also the future developing demands, indifferently from whatever argument this developed, even if payments for particularly designated demands were made. With open invoices the reserved property applies as security of our demand for balance. a) By machining and processing of the reserved commodities, the customer does not acquire the property of the new item in accordance with. 950 BGB. The processing is performed by the customer for us, without resulting in any obligations to us. If the reserved commodities are processed, connected, mixed or integrated with other items not belonging to us, we acquire the property of the new item in relationship to the value of the reserved commodity to the other finished items. b) The allowances of the customer from resale or rental of the reserved commodities are directly assigned to us and without consideration, if the reserved commodities are without or after processing, connection, mixture or integration and if they are resold to one or multiple customers. These demands serve as protection only upto the value of the already sold reserved commodities. In case that the reserved commodities are sold together with other items not belonging to us, with or without processing, the transfer of the demand for purchase price applies only to the amount of the reserved commodities , which is, together with other items, the subject of this contract. Regardless of the transfer and our right to resignation, the customer is entitled for resignation in so far, when he fulfils his obligations to us and does not come into financial collapse. On request the customer has to give us the details necessary for the resignation of the resigned demands, and communicate the resignation to the debtors. The customer has to inform us immediately about the execution measures of third parties in the reserved commodities or the in advance resigned demands, by handing over the documents necessary for an intervention. The customer bears the cost of our intervention. c) The customer has the obligation to keep the commodities in proper condition during the duration of the right of ownership and will directly have the necessary repairs - apart from emergencies performed by us or by one of our recognized repair workshop at own expense. 10. Transfer of the contract The transfer of demands on us to third parties is impossible, if we do not agree in writing.
280
Chapter 15

SAV Precisioncatalogue

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Исходное описание:

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

SAV Precisioncatalogue

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

SPANN- AUTOMATIONS- NORMTEILETECHNIK GMBH

WORKHOLDING AND AUTOMATION

PRECISION WORKHOLDING AND CLAMPING SYSTEMS

ERFAHREN INNOVATIV WEGWEISEND

Pages 101 - 116

Pages 117 - 124

Pages 125 - 170

Pages 171 - 182

Pages 183 - 192

Pages 193 - 230

Pages 231 - 244

Pages 245 - 250

Pages 251 - 260

Pages 261 - 280

SAV Spann- AutomationsNormteiletechnik GmbH NurembergHeadquarters Sales and Marketing

EXPERIENCED INNOVATIVE DIRECTIVE

SAV - The Company

The SAV group is represented worldwide

SAV Produktions GmbH Nuremberg-Eibach Gundelfinger Strae 8 D-90469 Nuremberg-Eibach Germany

North America Sales and Marketing North America

SAV - The Company

Workholding from one source

for hard turning

for Quick Mould Change

for lifting of loads

for precision circular grinding

for precision surface grinding

for precision profile grinding

for a variety of applications

SAV Palletising and Automation

SAV Vacuum Workholding

standard and special pallets

precision turning and sine table

vacuum special solutions

dressing- and circular grinding tools

vacuum chucks, round and square

SAV - The Company

Workholding from one source

multiple clamping on machine vices

multiple clamping of ejector pins

SAV Norm parts

Digital precision indexer with mandrel

SAV - The Company

SAV - The Company

SAV - The Company

SAV - The Company

Engineering, Research and Development

Leading in technology for SAV not just words

SAV - The Company

SAV - The Company

SAV-No. 242.90 243.01 243.07 243.09 243.10 243.11 243.12

Permanent Magnetic Workholding Systems application examples

244.02 244.03 244.04 244.05 244.06 244.07 244.08 244.10

248.01 248.05 248.06

Milling on magnetic chuck.

Spark-erosion with Neodymium circular magnet.

Technical data subject to change without prior notice

Permanent Magnetic Vertical Chuck

A 250 350 400 500

B 150 150 200 200

C 190 190 240 240

E 156 156 175 175

38.0 52.0 75.0 93.5